Range Rover Sport User Manual 2005

R
OWNER’S HANDBOOK
Publication Part No. LRL 21 02 54 501
© Land Rover 2004

L
Introduction
This handbook covers all current versions of the Range Rover Sport petrol and diesel models and,
together with the other books in your literature pack, provides all the information that you need to
derive maximum pleasure from owning and driving your new vehicle.
For your convenience, the handbook is divided into sections, each dealing with a different aspect of
the vehicle. These are listed on the Contents page and you will find it worthwhile to take a little time
to read each one, and get to know your Range Rover Sport as soon as you possibly can. The more
you understand before you drive, the greater the satisfaction once you are seated behind the steering
wheel.
The specification of each vehicle will vary according to territorial requirements and also from model
to model within the vehicle range. Some of the information published in this handbook, therefore,
may not apply to your particular vehicle.
To include changes made after the handbook is printed, it is sometimes necessary to issue one or
more handbook supplements. When reading this handbook, check the literature pack for possible
supplements.
Any further updates will be posted on the Land Rover internet site and can be accessed at
www.landrover.com in the Owner Information area.
* An asterisk appearing within the handbook text identifies features or items of equipment that
are either optional, or are only fitted to some vehicles in the model range.
Land Rover operates a policy of constant product improvement and therefore reserves the right to
change specifications without notice at any time. Whilst every effort is made to ensure complete
accuracy of the information in this handbook, no liabilities for inaccuracies or the consequences
thereof can be accepted by the manufacturer or the dealer, except in respect of personal injury
caused by the negligence of the manufacturer or the dealer.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or
transmitted, in any form, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or other means without
prior written permission from the Service Division of Land Rover.
As part of Land Rover’s environmental policy, this publication is printed on paper made
from chlorine-free pulp.
2
R
Handbook Contents
Quick Overview Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Quick Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Filling Station Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Dynamic Stability and Traction Control . . 187
General Information Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Air Suspension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Dynamic Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Controls and Instruments Terrain Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Keys and Handsets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Locks and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Towing Eyes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Load Carrying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Front Lighting Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Airbag SRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 On-road Driving
Door Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 On-road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Facia Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Off-road Driving
Settings Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Off-road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Off-road Driving Techniques . . . . . . . . . . 230
Message Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Warning Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Maintenance
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Audible Warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Bonnet Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Lamps and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Under-bonnet Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Wipers and Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Electric Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Engine Oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Heating and Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Interior lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Power Steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Interior Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Dynamic Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Loadspace Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Audio System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
In-Car Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Driving and Operating Cleaning and Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Starting and Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Identification Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Parts and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Fuel Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Park Distance Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Roadside Emergency
Wheel Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Transfer Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
3
L
Handbook Contents
Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Technical Data
Lubricants & Fluids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Engines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Wheels & Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Vehicle Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
4
R
Quick Overview
Quick Overview
THE REMOTE HANDSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
EMERGENCY UNLOCKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
FACIA CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
WARNING LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR . . . . . . . . . .9
LAMPS MASTER SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
WIPERS & WASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
CONFIGURABLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . .13
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
INTERLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
PARKBRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
TEMPERATURE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . .15
AUTOMATIC MIRROR DIPPING . . . . . . . . .16
RESONANCE WITH LOWERED WINDOWS .16
AIRBAG DISABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
VOICE RECOGNITION* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Filling Station Information

FUEL FILLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
OPENING THE BONNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
TYRE PRESSURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
5
L
6
R
Quick Overview
THE REMOTE HANDSET Partial arming
Quick Overview
If the driver’s door is not fully closed when the

handset lock button is pressed the vehicle horn
will activate. Until the door is fully closed the
vehicle will remain unlocked and unprotected
1 by the alarm system.
EMERGENCY UNLOCKING
H5910G
1. Key release button. Press to release the

folded key.
2. Lock button. Superlocks all doors and
activates perimetric alarm. If interior space
protection and tilt sensor options are fitted,
they can be over-ridden by pressing the
button twice within 3 seconds. See
Superlocking, 30, Perimetric alarm, 31,
Interior space protection*, 31, and Tilt
Sensor*, 31.
Note: When the doors have been
superlocked, they cannot be opened from H5946G
inside the vehicle.
If the handset should fail there is an emergency
3. Unlock button. Press once to disarm all access feature on the left-hand front door lock.
alarm features and unlock driver’s door With the key inserted into the slot beneath the
only. Press twice to open all doors. handle cap, the cap can be pulled outwards
4. Land Rover button. The handset can be slightly and then moved backwards to unhook
programmed to initiate one of 5 features; it. The key can now be used to unlock the
Panic alarm, Headlamp courtesy delay vehicle. For a full description of this feature see
Tailgate release, Tailglass release or Air Emergency locking/unlocking, 35.
suspension control. For a full description of
how to programme this button see ‘LAND
ROVER’ BUTTON, 26.
7
L
Quick Overview
FACIA CONTROLS
1 2 3 4 5
AUTO
1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
10 9 8
H5911L
1. Headlamps and direction indicator controls For a full description of facia controls and their
2. Wiper and washer control functions, see FACIA CONTROLS, 77.
3. Audio/display controls
4. Hazard warning light switch
5. Heater/air conditioning controls
6. Display screen*
7. Electric parkbrake switch
8. Starter switch
9. Cruise Control switches*
10. Lamps master switch
Note: The precise specification and location of
the controls may vary according to territorial
requirements and from vehicle to vehicle.
8
R
Quick Overview
WARNING LIGHTS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
H5931L
1. Dynamic Response (RED). SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR

2. Battery charging (RED).
3. Low oil pressure (RED).
4. Safety belts (RED).
5. Airbag SRS (RED).
6. Brakes (RED).
7. Parkbrake (RED).
If one of these red warning lights illuminates, a
serious fault is indicated. Stop the vehicle and
refer to the main section of this handbook.
For a full description of warning lights and their
functions, see WARNING INDICATORS, 97
H5949G
To view the next service date, turn the starter

key to position 1 and then, within 5 seconds,
press the System Check control button
(arrowed). The next service date is displayed
(dd.mm.yy) for 5 seconds.
For a full description of this feature, see
SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR, 95.
9
L
Quick Overview
LAMPS MASTER SWITCH
AUTO
AUTO
1 2 3
H5936G
The detent positions from fully pushed in are:

2 3
1 1. Off
4
2. Front fog lamps*
3. Rear fog lamps
AUTO
If front fog lamps are not fitted, the rear fog
lamps come on at the first pull of the switch.
Headlamp delay feature
When you leave the vehicle in a darkened
situation you can set the headlamps to remain
on for a while.
H5934L
With the master switch in positions 2, 3 or 4,
1. Off. turn the starter switch off and remove the key.
2. Position lamps. Turn the master switch to the off position. The
3. Low beam headlamps. headlamps will remain on for up to 240
seconds. For a full description of this feature
4. Auto lamps* and how to set the time delay, see Headlamp
For a full description of these functions, see courtesy delay, 106.
EXTERIOR LAMPS, 104.
10
R
Quick Overview
Headlamp beam adjustment WIPERS & WASHERS
Position of the lever will vary depending on type
of headlamps and side of vehicle.
3
When this is moved it enables the vehicle to be
driven in opposite-hand-drive markets without 2
having to stick blanking decals onto the
headlamp lens. 1
H5937G
1. Intermittent wipe
2. Normal speed wipe.
3. Fast speed wipe.
For a single wipe, pull the lever down and
release immediately.
Intermittent variable delay
H6339G
Follow the process shown in HEADLAMP UNIT,

296 to gain access to the inside of the headlamp
unit. Move the lever to adjust the beam.
Lever default position
Halogen Bi-Xenon
Right hand Down Up
side lamp
H5938G
Left hand Up Up
side lamp With the lever in position 1, rotate the switch to
vary the delay between wipes.
11
L
Quick Overview
Windscreen washer control
H5939G
Rear window wash/wipe
H5940G
For more detailed information on the wash/wipe

system, see WINDSCREEN WIPERS, 109
12
R
Quick Overview
CONFIGURABLE FEATURES
Settings options (trip computer)
A number of features can be configured via the settings menu that can be displayed on the main
message centre. See SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 81.
SETTINGS CHOICE
TRIP DISTANCE UNITS (odometer) MILES/KM
FUEL USAGE UNITS MPG
l/100km
Km/l
oC or oF
EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE
OVERSPEED WARNING Off
20 - 250 km/h or 15 to 140 mph in 5-unit steps
(Units set as trip distance)
HEADLAMP OFF DELAY 30/60/120/240 seconds
AUTO DOOR LOCK (speed related locking) ON/OFF
REVERSE MIRROR DIP ON/OFF
LAZY ENTRY ON/OFF
RESTORE DEFAULT SETTINGS YES/NO
Remote handset Starter key reminder

• Single point entry, allowing only the drivers Provides an audible warning indicating that the
door to be opened remotely. See, key is in the starter switch when the drivers
Single-point entry, 32. door is open. See, Starter key reminder, 102.
• Panic alarm, for personal protection. See, Passenger airbag disabling
‘LAND ROVER’ BUTTON, 26. The safest place for a child seat is fitted to the
• Headlamp courtesy delay, providing rear seating. However, if it is necessary to fit a
lighting for personal safety. See,‘LAND child seat to the front passenger seat the front
ROVER’ BUTTON, 26. passenger airbag must be disabled. See,
• Tailgate release function, releases the PASSENGER AIRBAG DISABLING SWITCH, 66.
tailgate as a whole. See,‘LAND ROVER’ Daytime running lamps
BUTTON, 26.
Unless prevented by legislation, it is possible to
• Tailglass release function, releases only the automatically switch on the exterior lamps
tailglass. See,‘LAND ROVER’ BUTTON, 26. whenever the engine is running. See, Daytime
• Air suspension control, allows remote running lamps*, 107.
operation of the air suspension. See,‘LAND
ROVER’ BUTTON, 26.
13
L
Quick Overview
Speed dependant wiper mode PARKBRAKE
The wiper speed in all modes can be The parkbrake is electrically operated.
automatically varied according to vehicle
speed. See, Speed-dependant mode*, 110.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
INTERLOCKS
Vehicles can only be started when the gear
selector lever is in the ‘P’(Park) or ‘N’(Neutral)
position.
To move the lever from ‘P’ to ‘R’, ‘R’ to ‘P’ or ‘N’
to ‘R’, the selector release button (see inset)
H5951L
must be pressed.
To apply the parkbrake, lift the lever and release
it. A RED indicator light in the instrument pack
will illuminate continuously.
To release the parkbrake the starter key must be
switched on and pressure must be applied to
the foot brake.
The parkbrake will release automatically if the
AUTO
1 2 3
accelerator pedal is pressed. To delay this

ABC DEF
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
release, hold the parkbrake lever in the raised

position until you are ready to move, then
release it.
For more detailed information on the parkbrake,
see PARKBRAKE, 184.
H6171L
To move from ‘P’ or ‘N’ into a drive gear

position, the foot brake must be applied.
For more detailed information on the automatic
gearbox, see AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
USE, 164.
14
R
Quick Overview
TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
12 3 1 2 3 12
11
4 10
9
5 6 7 8
5
H6099G
1. Auto mode:
Press for fully automatic operation.
2. Blower control
3. Temperature controls:
Rotate anticlockwise for maximum cooling.
4. Air distribution controls
5. Air recirculation control - manual
6. Air recirculation control - auto*
7. Off
8. Economy mode
9. Heated rear screen
10. Heated front screen.*
11. Defrost mode
Press to defrost or demist the windscreen.
12. Front seat heaters*
For more detailed information on the climate
control system, see TEMPERATURE
CONTROLS, 119.
15
L
Quick Overview
AUTOMATIC MIRROR DIPPING AIRBAG DISABLING
If your vehicle is fitted with the driver’s seat The airbag directly ahead of the front passenger
memory option, the door mirrors may dip when seat can be disabled. Although the
reverse gear is selected. This gives the driver a recommended and safest position for a child
view of the kerbside to aid vehicle positioning seat is in the rear seats, the front passenger
when reversing. seat is an optional position.
The feature is optional and can be adjusted by
the user.
For more detailed information on automatic
mirror dipping, see Automatic mirror
dipping*, 76.
RESONANCE WITH LOWERED

WINDOWS
If a resonance/booming sound occurs with only
the rear windows open, lowering a front
window about 25 mm (1 inch) will eliminate the
condition. This will change the frequency of the
air volume moving in/out of the vehicle and
thus lessen or remove the booming sound.
H6033L
From the passenger side of the car, open the

front door and insert the starter key into the
airbag disabling switch. Turn to the ‘OFF’
position.
For more detailed information on airbag
disabling, see PASSENGER AIRBAG
DISABLING SWITCH, 66.
16
R
Quick Overview
VOICE RECOGNITION* To activate voice control:
Voice control provides a safe and convenient • Briefly pull the control paddle (your Audio
way of operating the audio system without the will mute at this point). A brief acoustic
need to operate the controls manually. This signal will be heard, and ‘LISTENING’ will
enables you to concentrate fully on driving the be displayed on the main message centre
vehicle, and removes the need to divert your to indicate that the system is now waiting
attention from the road ahead in order to for a voice command.
change settings, or receive feedback from the Note: It is only necessary to use the steering
system. wheel voice control paddle at the beginning of
A number of voice commands are available, and each voice session.
with a little experience you will find them easy
Defined voice commands
and convenient to use. Whenever you issue one
of the defined commands with the system The voice control system understands
active, the voice control system converts your predefined commands which need to be quoted
command into a control signal for the audio word for word.
system. Your inputs take the form of dialogues An audio feedback of voice commands is
or commands. You are guided through these available. To activate the feedback, pull the
dialogues by announcements or questions. voice control paddle briefly and give one of the
following commands:
Activating the system
General commands
• Voice help: To list all commands.
• Notepad Help: To list Notepad commands.
Audio commands
• Radio help: To list Radio commands.
• CD help: To list CD commands.
Please refer to the Audio System Handbook
for full operating instructions.
Navigation & Telephone commands
• Phone help: To list telephone commands.
• Navigation help: To list Navigation
commands.
Please refer to the Navigation, TV &
Telephone Handbook for full operating
AUTO
instructions.
For further information see VOICE
RECOGNITION*, 148.
H6159L
17
L

FUEL FILLER When delivery is complete, withdraw the nozzle
The fuel filler is located in the rear right-hand and replace the cap. Tighten the cap clockwise
wing. Ensuring that the vehicle is not until you hear it click three times. Return the
superlocked, press the fuel filler flap to open. fuel filler flap to its closed position.
The fuel filler flap springs out, revealing the

filler cap.
Unscrew the filler cap and place it on the
projection on top of the hinge of the fuel filler
flap.
Insert the pump nozzle into the filler neck,
pushing aside the spring-loaded cover.
H5944G
Fuel type
Petrol vehicles Premium unleaded 95 RON
Diesel vehicles To EN590 specification. NOT compatible with Bio-diesel fuels.
Note: For more detailed information, see LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 307.
OPENING THE BONNET 1. Inside bonnet release

2. Bonnet safety catch
H5945G 2
Engine oil top-up

V8 petrol vehicles Use a 5W/30 oil to specification ACEA:A1or A3 (with API SJ or SL)
Engine oil top-up
Diesel vehicles Use a 5W/30 oil to specification ACEA: B1/B3
Cooling system top-up
All vehicles to -36°C (-33°F) 50% mix of water and an approved antifreeze
Note: For more detailed information, see LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 307
18
R

TYRE PRESSURES
Air pressure naturally increases in warm tyres
(after the vehicle has been driven for a while). If
you have to check warm tyres, you should
expect the pressures to have increased by
between 30 and 40 kPa (0.3 to 0.4 bar) (4 to 6
lbf/in2). In this circumstance, NEVER let air out
of the tyres in order to match the recommended
pressures.
Loading condition kPa bar lbf/in2

Normal operating conditions Front 230 2.3 34
Rear 250 2.5 36
Vehicle loaded to maximum gross vehicle weight Front 260 2.6 38
Rear 290 2.9 42
Temporary spare wheel (All operating conditions) 420 4.2 60
19
L
20
R
General Information
General Information
HANDLING CHARACTERISTICS WARNING LABELS ATTACHED

TO THE VEHICLE
WARNING
Your vehicle has a higher ground clearance Warning labels attached to your
and, hence, a higher centre of gravity than vehicle bearing this symbol mean: DO
ordinary passenger cars. This will result in NOT touch or adjust components until
different handling characteristics. you have read the relevant
Inexperienced drivers should take additional instructions in the handbook.
care, particularly in off-road driving Labels showing this symbol indicate
situations and when performing abrupt that the ignition system utilises very
manoeuvres on unstable surfaces. high voltages. DO NOT touch any
ignition components while the starter
switch is turned on!
SYMBOLS
The following symbols used within the SECURITY CARD
handbook call your attention to specific types of The security card, supplied with the literature
information. pack, contains important emergency
This recycling symbol identifies those information. It is ESSENTIAL that you keep the
items that must be disposed of safely in card safe from theft and ensure that it is passed
order to prevent unnecessary damage to the new owner if you sell the vehicle.
to the environment. • Locking wheel nut number: If your vehicle
This symbol identifies those features has locking wheel nuts, you will have been
that can be adjusted or disabled/enabled provided with a special wheel nut socket to
by a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised remove them. You will need to quote this
Repairer. number to obtain a replacement socket.
• VIN (Vehicle Identification Number): This
WARNINGS IN THIS HANDBOOK identity number is unique to your vehicle
WARNING and is essential proof of its specification.
Safety warnings are included in this The number can also be found in various
handbook. These indicate either a procedure locations around the vehicle (see VEHICLE
which must be followed precisely, or IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN), 270).
information that should be considered with Caution: Never leave the security card inside
great care in order to avoid the possibility of the vehicle when it is unattended.
personal injury.
Caution: Cautions are included in this

handbook. These indicate either a procedure
which must be followed precisely, or
information that should be considered with
great care in order to avoid the possibility of
damage to your vehicle.
21
L
General Information
SERVICE PORTFOLIO TYRE PRESSURE LABEL
The Service Portfolio book included in your
literature pack contains important vehicle
identification information as well as useful
RANGE ROVER
consumer advice.
MAX. 230 2.3 33 250 2.5 36
235/65R17
Most important of all, however, is the section 255/55R18
255/50R19
(kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
L7MTA
275/40R20 260 2.6 38(PSI) 290 2.9 42
on maintenance. This outlines the servicing (kpa) (BAR) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
requirements for your vehicle and also includes T175/80R19

MAX. 420 4.2 60 420 4.2 60
RTC500340
the service record slips, which the Dealer 420 4.2 60 420 4.2 60
should sign and stamp to certify that the routine (kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
services have been carried out at the

recommended intervals.
TOW BAR LABEL
H5955L
Information on tyre pressures for differing tyres

and vehicle loadings is given on a label attached
to the ‘B’ post on the driver’s side.
For further information on tyre pressures see
Tyre pressures, 260; TYRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM*, 264; WHEELS &
TYRES, 313.
H5954G
A label, located on the inside face of the rear

bumper access hatch, shows the attachment
and removal procedure for the tow bar system.
For information on removing and fitting the
detachable tow bar, see Towing, 207.
22
R
General Information
SUN VISOR LABELS IN AN EMERGENCY
Remember the breakdown safety code
If a breakdown occurs while travelling:
• Wherever possible, consistent with road
safety and traffic conditions, the vehicle
should be moved off the main
2U5A-5400014-DA
thoroughfare, preferably into a lay-by. If a
breakdown occurs on a motorway, pull well
over to the inside of the hard shoulder.
H5953G
• Switch on hazard lights.
Always take careful note of warning information
• If possible, position a warning triangle or a
about the airbag SRS affixed to the driver’s and
flashing amber light at an appropriate
passenger’s sun visor.
distance from the vehicle to warn other
An additional label, located on the ‘B’ post, traffic of the breakdown, (note the legal
warns against the use of rear-facing child seats requirements of some countries).
in the front passenger seat.
• Consider evacuating passengers through
For further information concerning the airbag nearside doors onto the verge as a
SRS and the use of child restraints, consult the precaution in case your vehicle is
relevant sections of this handbook. accidentally struck by other traffic.
BRAKE PADS
Brake pads require a period of bedding in. For
the first 800 km (500 miles), you should avoid
situations where heavy braking is required.
Regular servicing is vital to ensure that the
brake pads are examined for wear and changed
periodically to ensure long term safety and
optimum performance.
23
L
General Information
ON-BOARD EVENT DATA To access this information special equipment
must be connected directly to the recording
Service data recording modules. Land Rover do not access event data
Service data recorders in your vehicle are recorder information without obtaining
capable of collecting and storing diagnostic consent, unless pursuant to court order or
information about your vehicle. This potentially where required by law enforcement, other
includes information about the performance or government authorities or third parties acting
status of various systems and modules in the with lawful authority.
vehicle such as engine, throttle, steering or Other parties may seek to access the
brakes. information independently of Land Rover.
In order to properly diagnose and service your
vehicle, Land Rover and service and repair
facilities may access vehicle diagnostic
information through a direct connection to your
vehicle.
Event data recording
Other modules in your vehicle - event data
recorders - are capable of collecting and storing
data during a crash or near-crash event. The
recorded information may assist in the
investigation of such an event. The modules
may record information about both the vehicle
and the occupants, potentially including
information such as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
seat belts were buckled.
• How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or the brake pedal.
• How fast the vehicle was travelling.
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
24
R
Keys and Handsets

Controls and Instruments
KEYS AND HANDSETS Note: Should a key transmitter be lost or

damaged, a replacement can only be obtained
from your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer, where it will be programmed to your
vehicle. The dealer will require proof of
ownership, and keep a log of all enquiries for
replacement key transmitters.
It is advisable to notify your dealer as soon as
possible if a key transmitter is lost or stolen,
and have the remaining transmitters
reprogrammed. This will prevent access to the
vehicle using the lost/stolen transmitter.
H5966G
Remote handset battery
You have been supplied with two remote
handsets with integral keys which operate all of The battery is rechargeable. The fact that the
the vehicle’s locks. battery needs recharging will be apparent from
the following:
The operation of all transmitter buttons, on all
handsets, will be inhibited whilst a key is in the • ‘KEY BATTERY LOW’ will be displayed in
starter switch. the main message centre.
Note: The key transmitter may not operate • A gradual deterioration in range and
correctly in areas that are subject to performance will be noticed.
interference from other radio equipment Caution: The handset contains delicate
operating on a similar frequency. Areas where, electronic circuits and must be protected from
for example, equipment such as amateur radio, impact and water damage, high temperatures
medical devices, telecommunications and humidity, direct sunlight and the effects
equipment or other remotely operated alarms of solvents, waxes and abrasive cleaners.
are in use may cause difficulty. If such
Battery recharge
difficulties are experienced, try to operate the
transmitter as close as possible to the vehicle, Insert the key into the starter switch and start
or use the key in the door lock. the engine. This will start to recharge the
handset battery.
The keys supplied with your vehicle are
programmed to your security system - the
engine cannot be started without a key
programmed to your vehicle.
Caution: Keep the spare handset key in a safe
place - NOT IN THE VEHICLE.
The other two keys that you have received are
for locking the main glovebox.
25
L
Locks and Alarms

Locks and Alarms
SECURITY SYSTEM ‘LAND ROVER’ BUTTON

The security system fitted to your vehicle is Customer programmable button
Thatcham category one approved, and meets
European regulation 97 and directive 95/56/EC.
Security Information
For your own safety, and that of the vehicle,
when the vehicle is left unattended:
• Apply the park brake
• Remove all keys and transmitters from the
vehicle prior to locking the doors
• Close all doors, windows, luggage
compartment (including blind), sunroof,* H5947G
and glove box The fourth button - marked with the Land Rover
• Park the vehicle where it is visible (a well lit logo - on the remote handset can be
area after dark) programmed to give remote operation of one of
the following functions:
• Keep your vehicles keys safely out of sight
• panic alarm
• NEVER leave children or pets unattended in
the vehicle • headlamp courtesy delay
• NEVER leave luggage or valuables on • air suspension control
display • tailgate release
• tailglass release
Note: Programming and subsequent use of the
‘Land Rover’ button will not occur if the key is
in the starter switch.
WARNING
Be aware that the previously programmed
feature will be activated when the button is
initially pressed to start the programming
sequence.
26
R
Locks and Alarms

Handset Programming Headlamp Courtesy Delay
Panic Alarm This facility is programmed by pressing the
This facility is programmed by pressing the ‘Land Rover’ button and, keeping it pressed,
‘Land Rover’ button and, keeping it pressed, flashing the headlamps. A chime from the
pressing the hazard warning lamps button on instrument panel buzzer will confirm successful
the instrument panel. A chime from the programming of the remote’s button.
instrument panel buzzer will confirm successful A short press of the button will now cause the
programming of the remote’s button. vehicle’s headlamps to illuminate for the length
A short press of the button will now cause the of time specified in Settings. A second press of
vehicle’s alarm to be sounded and the hazard the button after three seconds will de-activate
warning lamps to flash. the lamps.
The alarm is turned off by inserting the key in
the starter, or pressing the lock or unlock
buttons on the remote handset.
Note: In some countries it is an offence to
activate the panic alarm for any purpose other
than an emergency.
H5974G
1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
H5973G
27
L
Locks and Alarms

Air Suspension Control
This facility is programmed by pressing the
‘Land Rover’ button and, keeping it pressed,
pressing the suspension control switch. A
chime from the instrument panel buzzer will
now confirm successful programming of the
remote’s button.
Programming of this function must be done
within one minute of switching off the engine.
Pressing and holding the button, then briefly
pressing the lock button on the remote will now
cause the air suspension to rise, provided that
the hazard warning lamps have been switched
on.
Pressing and holding the button, then briefly
pressing the unlock button on the remote will
cause the air suspension to lower, provided that
the hazard warning lamps have been switched
on.
If any button is released during the raising or
lowering of the suspension, all movement of
the suspension will stop. It will restart once the
buttons are pressed again. H5975L
For further information see AIR SUSPENSION,

192.
28
R
Locks and Alarms

Tailgate Release Tailglass Release
This facility is programmed by pressing the This facility is programmed by pressing the
‘Land Rover’ button and, keeping it pressed, ‘Land Rover’ button and, keeping it pressed,
pressing the main tailgate release button on the pressing the main tailglass release button
rear tailgate. A chime from the instrument panel situated under the rear number plate plinth. A
buzzer will confirm successful programming of chime from the instrument panel buzzer will
the remote’s button. confirm successful programming of the
A short press of the button will now cause the remote’s button.
vehicle’s tailgate to release. A short press of the button will now cause the
vehicle’s tailglass to release.
H6369G H6370G
29
L
Locks and Alarms

Anti-theft alarm indicator If the alarm sounds
If the alarm is triggered, the alarm will sound
and the hazard warning lamps will flash for 30
seconds, before resetting to the same
protection status that existed prior to the alarm
being triggered.
To silence the alarm, press the lock or unlock
button on the remote handset or insert the key
into the starter switch. Pressing the lock button
will keep the alarm armed.
1
When the vehicle is disarmed, the hazard
warning lamps will quickly flash eight times if
the alarm has sounded since the vehicle was
last armed.
Superlocking
H5969G
WARNING
The indicator provides information about the For safety, NEVER use Superlocking if
status of the alarm and immobiliser systems, as passengers are to remain inside the vehicle -
follows: in an emergency they would not be able to
When the alarm is armed with interior space escape, or be released by emergency
protection*: services. Also, any movement from within the
vehicle would activate the interior space
The indicator will triple flash for 10 seconds protection alarm*.
then continue to single flash until the vehicle is
disarmed and immobilised. Superlocking is activated by one press of the
When the alarm is armed without interior lock button on the handset.
space protection: When the vehicle is superlocked the doors can
The indicator will double flash for 10 seconds, only be opened from inside or outside of the
then continue to single flash until the vehicle is vehicle with the correct key or key transmitter.
disarmed and immobilised. Superlocking immobilises the interior door
When the alarm is disarmed but the vehicle is handles, thereby preventing an intruder from
immobilised (key out of starter switch): gaining entry by smashing a window and
The indicator will single flash until the alarm is reaching inside the vehicle to operate the door
armed or the vehicle is mobilised. handles.
When the alarm is disarmed and the vehicle
is mobilised (key in starter switch):
The indicator gives a one-second flash on
remobilisation.
30
R
Locks and Alarms

Perimetric alarm
This feature is activated automatically
whenever the vehicle is locked using the
handset and protects the doors, bonnet and
tailgate.
If any of these apertures are opened, or a key
that has not been programmed to the vehicle is
inserted into the ignition switch, while the
feature is activated, the alarm will be triggered.
When the perimetric alarm is activated the
direction indicators will flash three times, and
the security system status indicator will flash.
Mislock
If an aperture is open when an attempt is made
to lock the vehicle an audible warning will
sound once to indicate that the vehicle is not H5972G
secure.
Disabling interior space protection:
Interior space protection* If there is a requirement to disable interior
Interior space protection is activated whenever space protection (if a window or sunroof is to
the vehicle is superlocked. be left open, for example), press the lock button
Note: Never activate interior space protection if on the remote handset twice within three
windows or sunroof are to be left open, or if seconds.
passengers or animals are to be left inside the Tilt Sensor*
vehicle - any movement will activate the alarm.
Your vehicle is fitted with a tilt sensor which
Interior space protection is designed to protect activates the alarm if the vehicle is tilted fore
the interior of the vehicle from intrusion (entry and aft, or side to side, after it has been
by a thief through a smashed window, for superlocked.
example). Four roof-mounted sensors monitor
The alarm will sound if theft is attempted by
the interior space and activate the alarm if air
hoisting onto another vehicle or if a side is lifted
movement is detected in the passenger
to attempt wheel removal.
compartment.
Disabling tilt sensor protection:
Note: Interior space protection cannot be
activated if a door is open. If you wish to have the doors locked but the tilt
sensor disabled (e.g. when aboard a ferry or
having the vehicle transported on a recovery
truck) press the lock button twice within three
seconds.
31
L
Locks and Alarms

Single-point entry ALARM SYSTEM
This is a personal security feature, which
enables only the driver's door to be unlocked,
leaving the other doors in a locked state.
Single-point entry can be disabled on individual
handset keys by pressing and holding the lock
and unlock buttons together for three seconds.
Repeating the procedure will re-enable the
feature.
Each time single-point entry is turned on or off,
the vehicle will lock then unlock into the
selected mode (all doors unlocked or just
driver’s door unlocked).
Battery-backed sounder*
This device will sound the full alarm if the alarm
is activated, or if the vehicle’s battery or the
sounder is disconnected whilst the security
system is armed.
H5967G
Your vehicle is fitted with a sophisticated

electronic anti-theft alarm and engine
immobilisation system. There are also a
number of additional security features, some of
which are selectable options and some are
standard features of the vehicle.
In order to ensure maximum security and
operating convenience, you are strongly
advised to gain a full understanding of the
features and alternatives available, by
thoroughly reading this section of the
handbook.
Note: FOR MAXIMUM SECURITY ALWAYS
SUPERLOCK THE VEHICLE. If passengers or
animals are to be left in the vehicle, windows
and/or sunroof are left open, or the vehicle is on
a moving platform, e.g. a ferry, lock the vehicle
by pressing the lock button twice within three
seconds. This disables the superlocking, tilt
sensing* and interior space protection*.
32
R
Locks and Alarms

LOCKING/UNLOCKING
While it is not necessary to point the handset at
the vehicle, the handset must be within range of
the vehicle when a button is pressed.
Note: If the handset fails to work even when
close to the vehicle, it could be that it is not
synchronised with the system, see Emergency
locking/unlocking, 35. Putting the key in the
starter switch and running the engine for six
minutes will restore full operation.
The operating range may vary depending upon
handset battery condition and may sometimes
be limited by physical and geographical factors
beyond your control.
Note: If a key is in the starter switch, the vehicle
will not respond to remote handset commands.
H5968G
Locking with the remote handset

Remove the key from the starter switch and
shut all doors, the bonnet and the tailgate.
The four buttons on the handset are used as
follows:
1. Key release button.
33
L
Locks and Alarms

2. Lock button: Press to superlock all doors Partial arming
and to activate the perimetric alarm and If the driver’s door is not fully closed when the
interior space protection* and activate the handset lock button is pressed, the doors will
tilt sensor* (see Superlocking, 30, Tilt remain unlocked and the alarm will remain
Sensor*, 31). disarmed. A brief sound from the vehicle horn
Press twice within three seconds to lock all will confirm that the door is not fully closed.
doors and activate the perimetric alarm, If a passenger door or other aperture is not fully
but NOT activate interior space protection* closed when the handset lock button is
or tilt sensor*. pressed, the ‘partial arming’ attributes of the
The direction indicator lamps will flash security system will enable as much of the
three times. system to be armed as possible (all fully closed
3. Unlock button: Press once to disarm the door, bonnet or tailgate apertures will be
alarm and unlock the driver’s door and to protected, but an open one will not).
activate the ‘Lazy seats’* feature, (see A brief sound from the vehicle’s horns will
DRIVER’S SEAT MEMORY FACILITY*, confirm that an aperture is not fully closed.
45). Press again to unlock the remaining As soon as the open aperture is closed, the
doors (see Single-point entry, 32). system will automatically arm, signalled by
In either case, the interior lamps illuminate three flashes of the hazard warning lamps, with
and the direction indicators flash once. interior space protection* activating 30
The hazard warning lamps will quickly flash seconds after all apertures are closed.
eight times when the vehicle is disarmed if Note: The vehicle will not superlock if an
the alarm has sounded since the vehicle aperture (other than the bonnet) is open.
was last armed.
4. Customer Configuration - ‘Land Rover’
button: This button can be configured to
operate panic alarm, headlamp courtesy
delay, tailgate release, tailglass release or
suspension control (see ‘LAND ROVER’
BUTTON, 26).
34
R
Locks and Alarms

Emergency locking/unlocking Removing the cap
1. Insert the key fully into the slot under the
handle cap.
2. The cap can now be removed at the forward
edge and unhooked from the rear edge.
3. Remove the key from the slot and use it in
the emergency lock.
Note: Unlocking the left hand front door by the
key will not disarm the alarm, if it was
previously set. If the vehicle was superlocked,
only the left hand front door will unlock. The
rest of the doors will go from superlocked to
centrally locked and the alarm will disarm when
a valid key is detected in the starter switch.
H5970G
Under a removable cap on the left-hand front

door outer handle, there is an emergency-use
door lock. In the very unlikely event that the
remote handset has failed, this lock can be
used.
35
L
Locks and Alarms

Refitting the cap Unlocking:
Turn the key in the front left door lock
anticlockwise to unlock only the local door.
If the alarm system is not armed, turn the key
anticlockwise to unlock the left front door. To
unlock the rest of the doors press the master
unlock switch.
Master lock and unlock switches
1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
1 2
H5971G
1. Insert the key fully into the slot in the H5977G

handle cap. 1. Pressing the master unlock button will
2. Hook the cap onto the lock barrel at the rear unlock all of the doors.
edge. 2. Pressing the master lock button will lock all
3. Push the front edge of the cap onto the of the doors.
panel. 3. Simultaneously pressing both the master
4. Remove the key from the slot. lock and unlock switches for three seconds
Locking: will cause the whole tailgate to release.
Turn the key clockwise to lock only the local Note: If the locks have already been
door. To lock all of the doors press the master superlocked using the key, the switch will not
lock switch, then exit the vehicle through the release the locks.
front left door. Lock the left front door by
turning the key clockwise (this will not arm the
alarm system).
36
R
Locks and Alarms

Speed related locking Interior door handles and door locking buttons
This security feature locks all the doors
automatically when the vehicle speed exceeds 8
km/h (5 mph).
Note: The speed at which speed-related locking
occurs is not selectable by the driver. Any
presses of the master lock / unlock buttons will
over-ride the speed locking function, and will
remain in that state for the whole journey until
the master switch is operated again or the
internal door handles are used.
Speed-related locking can be selected
or deselected by a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer or by the
driver.
See SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 81.
Automatic relock H5979L
If the vehicle is unlocked using the remote From inside the vehicle, each door can be
handset and one minute elapses before a door, individually locked by depressing the
the tailgate or the bonnet is opened, or the key appropriate door button (arrowed). Doors can
is inserted into the starter switch, the vehicle be unlocked by pulling the door handle
will relock and the alarm will re-arm. (inboard). A second pull opens the door.
Vehicle unlocking in an emergency When the master lock or unlock button is
If the vehicle is involved in a collision forceful activated, all door locking buttons will move
enough to cause a restraints device to deploy, automatically.
provided that the doors have not been locked These locking buttons will only operate if the
using the door key or remote handset, all door doors have not been secured using the remote
locks will become unlocked and the hazard handset or door key.
warning lamps will start to flash. If the vehicle
is stationary, the interior lamps will also
illuminate.
Tailgate emergency unlock
Simultaneously pressing both the master lock
and unlock switches for three seconds will
cause the whole tailgate to release. This is an
emergency release function in case the tailgate
exterior release switch becomes inoperative.
37
L
Locks and Alarms

ENGINE IMMOBILISATION CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
Engine immobilisation is an important aspect of
the security system. It is designed to safeguard
the vehicle from theft, should the driver forget
to lock the doors. The system prevents the
engine from being started unless the GENUINE
handset key is inserted into the starter switch.
Engine immobilisation is automatic five
seconds after the key is removed from the BAD 500030 L7MTA
starter switch.
Note: The engine will be re-mobilised
automatically whenever the genuine handset
key is inserted into the starter switch.When this
happens, the anti-theft alarm indicator will
illuminate for one second and then extinguish.
H5981G
Child safety locks are fitted to the rear doors.

Open a rear door and insert the ignition key into
the child safety keyhole. Turn the key one
quarter of a turn so that the top of the key
moves towards the vehicle. Repeat for the other
door.
With the child safety locks engaged, the rear
doors cannot be opened from inside the
vehicle. This prevents a door from being
opened accidentally with the vehicle in motion.
Inserting the key and turning it in the opposite
direction disengages the lock.
WARNING
NEVER leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
38
R
Locks and Alarms

TAILGATE Opening the tailgate
Opening the tailglass
H5983G
H5982G
With all doors unlocked, press the tailgate
With all doors unlocked, press the touch pad on release button on the right hand side of the
the underside of the exterior handle and pull to tailgate.
open. If the tailgate fails to open, an emergency
If the tailglass fails to open, an emergency procedure is available.
procedure is available. Note: If the tailgate is open, the system
Tailgate emergency unlock prohibits the tailglass release, and vice versa. It
will only accept another release when the open
Simultaneously pressing both the master lock
panel has been closed.
and unlock switches for three seconds will
cause the whole tailgate to release. This is an
emergency release function in case the tailgate
exterior release switch becomes inoperative.
39
L
Seats
Seats
FRONT SEATS
max.
30 o
WARNING
To avoid the risk of loss of control and
personal injury, DO NOT adjust the driver's
seat while the vehicle is in motion.
Sitting correctly
The seats, head restraints, seat belts and
airbags all contribute to the protection of the
occupants. Optimal use of these components
will give you more protection. Therefore,
observe the following points:
• Sit in the most upright position with the H5984L
base of your spine as far back as possible
and the backrest not reclined more than 30
degrees.
• Do not move the front seat too close to the
instrument panel. The driver should hold
the steering wheel with slightly bent arms.
The legs should also be slightly bent so that
the pedals can be pressed to the floor.
• The seat belt should rest in the centre of the
shoulder. The lap part should fit tightly
across the hips and not on the stomach.
Make sure your driving position is comfortable
and enables you to maintain full control of the
vehicle. A properly adjusted seat helps reduce
the risk of injury from sitting too close to an
inflating airbag.
40
R
Seats
POWER FRONT SEATS Folding armrest*
Lumbar support adjustment*
H5992L
H5994L
A handwheel in the side of the seat provides for
adjustment of lumbar support. Some vehicles are fitted with adjustable front
seat armrests. These are used in the horizontal
To adjust the amount of lumbar support, twist
position or can be stowed vertically alongside
the knob clockwise to ‘stiffen’ the seat or
the seat backrest.
anticlockwise to reduce the support.
The horizontal position can be adjusted for
height by turning the knob set into the end of
the armrest. Turning the knob clockwise raises
the armrest; anticlockwise lowers it.
Note: For information on adjusting the electric
steering column see ELECTRIC STEERING
WHEEL ADJUSTMENT*, 71.
41
L
Seats
POWER OPERATED FRONT SEATS Forward/backward adjustment
The seat adjustment controls are situated on
the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Note: In order to change the position of any
part of the power-operated seats, the starter
key must be in positions ‘I’ or ‘II’. Power
operated Memory Driver’s seat also has a 10
minute active period initiated when:
• The driver’s door is opened/closed
• The starter key is turned to the off position
WARNING
DO NOT adjust any part of a seat while the
vehicle is in motion.
Vehicle movement may cause the seat to
suddenly shift, potentially causing injury.
H5998L
Push and hold the switch to move the seat to

the desired position.
42
R
Seats
Seat back adjustment Seat cushion height adjustment
H6000L H6002L
Twist the switch until the desired seat back Push the switch up or down to raise or lower
angle is achieved. the cushion.
WARNING
DO NOT travel with the seat backs reclined
steeply rearwards. Optimum benefit is
obtained from the seat belt with the seat back
angle set to no more than 30 degrees from the
upright (vertical).
43
L
Seats
Seat cushion edge adjustment* Head restraint adjustment
H6004L H5996L
Push the switch up or down to raise or lower Adjust the head restraint up or down until the
the front edge of the cushion. cushion is level with the back of the head.
HEATED SEATS* Note: Ensure that the headrest is adjusted
correctly for each passenger (the top of the
For information on operating the front and rear
headrest should be above the centre line of the
seat heaters, refer to SEAT HEATERS*, 123.
head).
44
R
Seats
DRIVER’S SEAT MEMORY
FACILITY*
2 1
3
H6006L
WARNING Setting the memory pre-sets

Before activating the seat memory, ensure Adjust the seat, steering column and exterior
that the area immediately surrounding the mirrors to the desired position.
seat is clear of obstructions and that all Note: For information on adjusting the mirrors,
occupants are clear of moving parts. see EXTERIOR MIRRORS, 74, or steering
wheel, see ELECTRIC STEERING WHEEL
1. Memory store button ADJUSTMENT*, 71.
2. Memory pre-set buttons 1. Insert the starter key and turn it to position
3. Seat adjustment controls (see POWER ‘I’ or ‘ll’.
OPERATED FRONT SEATS, 42 for further 2. Press the memory store button (1) to
information). activate the memory function.
Your vehicle can memorise up to three different 3. Within five seconds, press the desired
driver seating positions for each of three pre-set button (2).
possible starter keys. This enables three 4. ‘Memory Stored’ will be displayed on the
separate drivers to achieve optimum comfort at message centre (if fitted) to confirm the
the touch of a button. storing action. A single chime will sound
from the instrument panel to confirm
storing.
45
L
Seats
Recalling a stored seat position
Providing the power operated memory seat is
active (see POWER OPERATED FRONT SEATS,
42), press the pre-set button associated with
the desired driving position. The seat, steering
column and mirrors will move to the position
stored on that pre-set.
A confirmation message will display in the
message centre. A double chime will sound
when recall has achieved its correct position.
Note: To stop seat movement at any time when
recalling a memory setting, press any seat
adjustment control.
Lazy seats*
When the lazy seats option is selected and the
vehicle is unlocked using the handset, the
vehicle adjusts the driver’s seat, steering
column and the exterior mirrors to the position
associated with that particular handset.
Lazy seats and associated options can be
selected or deselected by a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer or by selecting
Settings, (see SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION,
81).
46
R
Seats
REAR SEATS
WARNING
DO NOT adjust any part of a seat while the
vehicle is in motion.
Vehicle movement may cause the seat to
suddenly shift, potentially causing injury.
Folding down the seats

One or both parts of the unequally split
second-row seat can be fully folded to further
increase the rear loadspace.
Remove any items from the second-row seats
and from the rear footwell before attempting to
fold down the seats.
If the front seats are in their rearmost position,
move them forward. They can be returned to
their original position after the second-row seat
backs have been folded down.
Ensure that the head restraints are fully
lowered. Press in the collar at the base of the
headrest support, and push the headrest down.
H6009G
Using the strap at the rear of each cushion, pull
the required cushions forwards as far as they WARNING
will travel .
It is extremely dangerous to ride in the cargo
To fold a backrest forwards, pull the seat area. In a collision, anyone riding in this area
backrest release lever(s). While pulling the is more likely to be injured or killed. Do not
lever(s) located on the top edges of the allow anyone to ride in any area of your
backrests, tip the seat backrest(s) forwards as vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
far as possible. safety belts. Be sure that everyone in your
Note: Only Land Rover approved seat covers vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt
and accessories should be used on these seats. properly.
47
L
Seats
Returning the seats to the upright position Pull the strap vertically on the back of the seat
to unlock the seat. Continue to pull to raise the
backrest(s) until they click into position. Push
the seat cushion(s) firmly back into position.
Visually check that the lever is fully in place. If
it has not returned to its locked position, red
‘flags’ will be visible around the lever sides.
To raise the headrest pull it upwards to the
required height.
WARNING
After the seat is returned to the upright
position, the latching mechanism should be
checked and physically tested to ensure that
both the seat base and backrest are secure
before driving.
Also, ensure that the headrest is adjusted
headrest should be above the centre line of
the head).
H6010G
48
R
Seats
Rear seat armrest Head restraint adjustment
H6011G
H6013G
Adjust the head restraint up or down until the
Pull the centre armrest down as shown. cushion is level with the back of the head.
Note: Ensure that the headrest is adjusted
headrest should be above the centre line of the
head).
49
L
Seat Belts
Seat Belts
SEAT BELTS SEATBELT USE DURING PREGNANCY

The use of front and rear seat belts is
WARNING
mandatory in most countries. Using seat belts
Pregnant women must wear a correctly
saves lives. They should be worn by all
positioned seat belt; it is safer for mother and
occupants whenever the vehicle is in use, for
unborn child.
maximum protection.
Lap/shoulder inertia reel seat belts are provided During pregnancy, women should wear the lap
for both front seat occupants and all rear seat belt across the hips below the baby, with the
positions. diagonal belt passing across the shoulder,
The inertia reel operating mechanism of the between the breasts and to one side of the baby
seat belts allows the wearers to move their - if in doubt, consult a doctor.
upper bodies to reach various controls. The
seat belt locks automatically with accelerated
body movement or in the event of emergency
braking.
The front seat belt assemblies are fitted with
pre-tensioners. The pre-tensioners operate
with the airbags as part of the Airbag
Supplementary Restraint System (SRS), see
AIRBAG SRS, 60.
H6016G
Seat belt warning indicator*
Driver Beltminder commences when the starter Never place anything between you and the seat
switch is turned to position ‘II’ and the driver belt in an attempt to cushion the impact in the
belt is unbuckled. event of an accident. It can be dangerous and
reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt in
In certain markets the seatbelt reminder feature preventing injury.
also applies to the passenger seat and will be
activated if the seat is occupied and the
occupant is unbuckled.
The visual and audible warnings applicable to
either driver or passenger Beltminder are
market dependant to meet individual market
requirements. The warning signals given may
also change depending on whether the vehicle
is stationary or when the vehicle speed exceeds
a pre-determined threshold (see AUDIBLE
WARNINGS, 102).
Note: Objects placed on the passenger seat
may activate the seatbelt warning system when
this feature is fitted.
50
R
Seat Belts
SEAT BELT SAFETY
WARNING WARNING
Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony It is essential to replace the entire assembly
structure of the body and should be worn low after it has been worn in a severe impact even
across the front of the pelvis, or the pelvis, if damage to the assembly is not obvious.
chest and shoulders, as applicable. Wearing Belts should not be worn with the straps
the lap section of the belt across the twisted.
abdominal area must be avoided. Each belt assembly must only be used by one
DO NOT wear seat belts over hard, sharp or occupant. It is dangerous to put a belt around
fragile items in clothing, such as pens, keys, a child being carried on the occupant’s lap.
spectacles, etc. No modifications or additions should be made
Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as by the user which will either prevent the seat
possible, consistent with comfort, to provide belt adjusting devices from operating to
the protection for which they are designed. A remove slack, or prevent the seat belt
slack belt will greatly reduce the protection assembly from being adjusted to remove
afforded to the wearer. slack.
DO NOT allow front seat occupants to travel Should the seat belt not retract and remain at
with the seat backs reclined steeply its static length, consult your Land Rover
rearwards. Optimum benefit is obtained from Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
the seat belt with the seatback angle set to no Where possible, use the seat belts to secure
more than 30o from the upright. large items of luggage that are to be carried
Care should be taken to avoid contamination on the seats. In the event of an accident,
of the webbing with polishes, oils and unsecured items become flying missiles,
chemicals, and particularly battery acid. capable of causing serious injury.
Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild Ensure that all seat belts are worn correctly -
soap and water. The belt should be replaced an improperly worn seat belt increases the
if webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or risk of death or serious injury in the event of a
damaged. collision.
51
L
Seat Belts
FRONT SEAT BELTS Upper anchorage adjustment
Fastening the seat belts
H6018G
The height of the seat belt upper anchorage can

be adjusted for comfort AND safety on both
H6017G
front seats. Press down (solid arrow) to release
Pull the belt over the shoulder and across the the catch, then lift or push down to adjust the
chest and, ensuring that the webbing is not height of the anchorage. For safety, the seat belt
twisted, insert the metal tongue plate into the should always be worn with the webbing
buckle nearest the wearer - a ‘CLICK’ indicates crossing the shoulder MIDWAY BETWEEN THE
that the belt is securely locked. NECK AND THE EDGE OF THE SHOULDER.
Releasing the belt Ensure the anchorage has ‘clicked’ into one of
the locked positions before driving.
Press the RED button on the seat belt buckle.
Where possible, rear seat passengers should
adjust their position on the seat to enable the
seat belt webbing to cross the shoulder without
pressing on the neck.
WARNING
Never wear just the lap strap of a lap/shoulder
diagonal seat belt and never sit on the lap
strap using just the shoulder strap. Both of
these actions are extremely dangerous and
may increase your risk of serious injury.
52
R
Seat Belts
REAR SEAT BELTS SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONERS
The rear seat belts have a special locking The seat belt pre-tensioners activate in
mechanism which aids the retention of child conjunction with the airbag SRS and provide
seats. The procedure to install a child seat is as additional protection in the event of a severe
follows: frontal impact on the vehicle (see HOW THE
1. Place the child seat in the vehicle, attach AIRBAG SRS WORKS, 63). The pre-tensioners
the seat belt and secure the buckle in automatically retract the seat belts fitted to the
accordance with the manufacturer’s fitting front seats. This reduces any slack in both the
instructions. lap and diagonal portions of the belts, thereby
reducing forward movement of the belt wearer
2. Pull on the shoulder section of the belt to
in the event of a severe frontal collision.
unreel all of the remaining webbing to the
limit of its travel. This will engage the The airbag SRS warning indicator on the
automatic locking feature, which then acts instrument pack will alert you to any
as a ratchet, allowing the webbing ONLY to malfunction of the seat belt pre-tensioners.
retract. If the pre-tensioners have been activated, the
3. Allow the seat belt to retract onto the child seat belts will still function as restraints, and
seat (a ‘clicking’ sound will confirm that the must be worn in the event that the vehicle
ratchet has engaged), while firmly pushing remains in a driveable condition.
the child seat into the vehicle seat. Note: The seat belt pre-tensioners will be
4. Ensure that there is no slack in the seat belt activated in major side and frontal impacts and
by pulling upwards on the shoulder belt in rollovers.
immediately above the child restraint. This WARNING
seat belt should now be locked and the
The seat belt pre-tensioners will only be
child seat held firmly in position.
activated once and then MUST BE REPLACED
When the child seat is removed and all of the by a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
seat belt webbing is allowed to retract, the seat Failure to replace the pre-tensioners will
belt locking mechanism reverts to normal reduce the efficiency of the vehicle's front
operation. restraint systems.
Note: Where possible, use the seat belt After any impact, always have the seat belts
automatic locking mechanism to secure large and pre-tensioners checked and, if
items of luggage that are to be carried on the necessary, replaced by a Land Rover
seats. In the event of an accident, insecure Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
items become flying missiles capable of
In the interests of safety, it is recommended
causing serious injury.
that removal or replacement of the front seats
and seat belts should only be carried out by a
Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
53
L
Seat Belts
CARING FOR SEAT BELTS Service information
Regularly inspect the belt webbing for signs of WARNING
fraying, cuts and wear; also pay particular DO NOT attempt to service, repair, replace,
attention to the condition of the fixing points modify or tamper with any part of the
and adjusters. pre-tensioner and airbag SRS, or wiring in the
DO NOT bleach or dye the webbing and avoid vicinity of a pre-tensioner or airbag SRS
contaminating the webbing with polish, oil or component; this could cause the system to
chemicals (see Seat belts, 269). activate, resulting in personal injury.
Testing inertia reel belts
In addition, ALWAYS contact your Land Rover
• With the seat belt fastened, give the Dealer/Authorised Repairer if:
webbing near the buckle a quick upward
• an airbag inflates.
pull. The buckle must remain securely
locked. • a pre-tensioner activates.
• With the seat belt unfastened, unreel the • the front or side of the vehicle is damaged,
webbing to the limit of its travel. Check that even if the pre-tensioner has not activated.
unreeling is free from snatches and snags
and then allow the belt to FULLY retract.
• Partially unreel the webbing, then hold the
tongue plate and give it a quick forward
pull. The mechanism must lock
automatically and prevent any further
unreeling.
If a seat belt should fail any of these tests,
contact your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer immediately.
WARNING
Always replace a seat belt that shows signs of
webbing damage or has withstood the strain
of a severe vehicle impact.
Note: If the vehicle is parked on ground that is

not level, the seat belt mechanism may lock.
This is not a fault; gently ease the belt from its
attachment to unlock it.
54
R
Child Restraints
Child Restraints
CHILD SEATS WARNING

The seat belts fitted to your vehicle are Do not use a child restraint on a seat
designed for adults and larger children. For protected by an operational air bag in front of
their safety, it is very important that all infants it.
and children under 12 are restrained in a There is a risk of death or serious injury when
suitable child safety seat appropriate to their the air bag deploys.
age and size (see table). Child safety seats
approved for use in your vehicle are available The best place for a child is properly
from your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised restrained in the rear seats.
Repairer.
Only fit a child seat that has been approved for WARNING
use in your vehicle, and ensure that the Original text according to ECE R94.01.
manufacturer's fitting instructions are followed Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing
exactly. child restraint on a seat protected by an air
For optimum safety, children should travel in bag in front of it.
the rear of the vehicle at all times, front
passenger seat travel is NOT recommended.
However, if it is essential that a child travel in
the front, set the seat fully rearward and disable
the air bag using the switch on the end of the
instrument panel, see PASSENGER AIRBAG
DISABLING SWITCH, 66.
Always use an approved child seat suitable for
a child’s age and size.
Holding a baby or child in a person’s arms is
not a substitute for a child restraint system.
In an accident, a baby or child held in a person’s
arms can be crushed between the vehicle’s
interior and a restrained person.
The above symbol affixed to the passenger side

‘B’ post of your vehicle, warns against the use
of a REAR-FACING child seat in the front
passenger seat, when a passenger airbag is
fitted and operational.
55
L
Child Restraints
Mass Group 0 = Up to 10 kg 0+ = Up to 13 kg I = 9 to 18 kg II & III =15 to

As indicated on child (22 lb) (0-9 (29 lb) (0-18 (20 to 40 lb) (9 36 kg (33 to 80
safety seat packaging months) months) months - 4 lb) (4-12
years) years)
Seating Positions
Front passenger* U* U* U* U*
Rear seats, rear L L L L
outboard
Rear seats, rear centre L L L L
U = Suitable for ‘universal’ category restraints approved for this mass group.
UF = Suitable for forward-facing ‘universal’ category restraints approved for this mass group.
L = Suitable for particular child restraints as listed below.
X = Not suitable for children in this mass group.
Group 0 - Britax Cosy-Tot
Group 0+ - Britax Cosy-Tot
Group I - Britax Duo Isofix
Group II & III - Britax Kid
* Never place a child seat in the front passenger seating position unless the airbag has been
disabled, see PASSENGER AIRBAG DISABLING SWITCH, 66.
WARNING Do not use a forward-facing seat until a child is

above the minimum weight of 9 kg (20 lb) and
Information given in the table is correct at the
able to sit up unaided. Up to the age of two, a
time of going to press. However, availability
child’s spine and neck are not sufficiently
of child restraints may change. Please refer
developed to avoid injury in a frontal impact.
to your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer for the latest recommendation.
Rear seat belts have a special locking

mechanism which aids the retention of child
seats, see REAR SEAT BELTS, 53.
In many countries, legislation governs how and
where children should be carried when
travelling in a vehicle.
It is the responsibility of the driver to comply
with all regulations in force in the country
where the vehicle is being used.
56
R
Child Restraints
ISOFIX CHILD RESTRAINTS • Lift the velcro strap, exposing the ISOFIX
(Second-row seats) locking mechanism.
In some markets, child restraint systems • Slide the child seat into the locking
complying with International Standard mechanism.
Organisation regulations and approved for The tether anchorages are provided at each
fitting in your vehicle may be available. These seating position equipped to accept Isofix child
restraints are different from conventional child restraints (shown in the illustrations).
seats, requiring anchor bars built into the
vehicle seat in order to accept the ISOFIX
locking mechanism.
H6020G
Note: Always ensure that, if an upper tether is

provided, it is secured and tightened properly
as this provides the maximum protection for a
child.
WARNING
DO NOT attempt to fit ISOFIX restraints to the
centre seating position - the anchor bars are
not designed to hold an ISOFIX restraint in
this position.
H6019G
Both outer, rear seat, seating positions in your

vehicle are equipped to accept ISOFIX
restraints.
To install your child seat with an ISIOFIX
restrains system:
• Raise or remove the head restraint.
57
L
Child Restraints
Fitting ISOFIX child restraints
ISOFIX child restraints should only be fitted in
the two outer seating positions of the
second-row seats. Anchor bars built into the
rear seat frame, enable the ISOFIX restraints to
be securely attached to the vehicle seat only in
these positions.
In addition, two tether anchor bars are fitted to
back of the rear seats, to secure child restraint
anchor straps.
When fitting ISOFIX child restraints, always
follow the instructions supplied by the
manufacturer of the restraint.
Once the ISOFIX restraint is installed, you are
recommended to test the security of the
installation before seating the child. Attempt to
twist the restraint from side to side and to pull
the restraint away from the vehicle seat; then
check that the anchors are still securely in
place.
WARNING
If the restraint is not correctly anchored, there
is a significant risk of injury to the child in the
event of a collision or emergency braking.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only loads imposed by correctly
fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
58
R
Child Restraints
CHILD RESTRAINT CHECK LISTS ISOFIX child restraints
Follow the check list every time a child travels
Non-ISOFIX child restraints
in the vehicle:
Follow the check list every time a child travels
• Always attach the top tether when
in the vehicle:
installing the ISOFIX seat.
• Carefully follow the instructions provided
• Carefully follow the instructions supplied
by the manufacturer of the restraint
with the child seat.
system.
• Always give the ISOFIX seat a final pull to
• Always use the appropriate child restraints
ensure that the lower anchors are secure.
and adjust harnesses for every child, every
trip. • Always use the appropriate child restraints
and adjust the harnesses for every child,
• Avoid dressing a child in bulky clothing and
every trip.
do not place any objects between the child
and the restraint system. • Make sure that a child falls into the correct
weight range for the seat.
• Regularly check the fit of a child seat and
replace seats or harnesses that show signs • Avoid dressing a child in bulky clothing and
of wear. do not place any objects between the child
and the restraint system.
• Ensure that you have removed all slack
from the adult seat belt. • Regularly check the fit of a child seat and
replace seats and harnesses that show
• No child seat is completely child-proof.
signs of wear.
Encourage a child not to play with the
buckle or harness. • No child seat is completely child-proof.
Encourage children not to play with the
• Never leave a child unsupervised in the
buckle or harness.
vehicle.
• Never leave a child unsupervised in the
• Activate the rear door child safety locks,
vehicle.
see CHILD SAFETY LOCKS, 38.
• Activate the rear door child safety locks,
• Ensure that a child does not exit the vehicle
see CHILD SAFETY LOCKS, 38.
from the side where there is traffic.
• Ensure that a child does not exit the vehicle
• Set children a good example - always wear
from the side where there is traffic.
your seat belt.
• Set children a good example - always wear
your seat belt.
59
L
Airbag SRS
Airbag SRS
H6021L
AIRBAG SRS Curtain airbags will afford additional protection

The airbag supplementary restraint system to the side of the head facing the impact for the
(SRS) incorporates front, seat mounted side front seat and outer rear seat occupants, in the
airbag and side head airbags for the driver and event of a side collision or a rollover.
front passenger and side head airbags for the Note: Inflation and deflation of the seat
rear seat outboard passengers (see illustration mounted side airbags and front airbags takes
for airbag locations). These are indicated by the place very quickly and will not protect against
word ‘AIRBAG’ on the trim. the effects of secondary impacts that may
occur. Side head airbags deflate at a slower rate
WARNING and therefore offer additional protection in the
The airbag is a supplementary restraint event of a secondary impact or rollover.
system that provides ADDITIONAL protection
Occupants with disabilities that may require the
in a severe impact only - it does NOT replace
vehicle to be modified must contact a Land
the need to wear a seat belt.
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer before any
modifications are made. Unauthorised
Provided occupants are correctly seated, with
modification of the vehicle or parts may
seat belts properly worn, the airbags will
invalidate the vehicle’s warranty.
provide additional protection to the chest and
facial areas of the front seat occupants in the
event of the vehicle receiving a severe frontal
impact, and also to the side of the body facing
the impact, if a severe side collision occurs.
60
R
Airbag SRS
Airbag warning labels Obstruction of air bags
WARNING
Do not allow passengers to obstruct the
operation of the airbags by placing feet,
knees or any other part of the person, or any
other objects in contact with, or in close
proximity to, an airbag module.
DO NOT attach or position items on, or close
to the roof lining, ‘A’ , ‘B’ and ‘C’ post
finishers, front seat backs or to an airbag
cover, which could interfere with the inflation
of the airbag or, if the airbag inflates, be
propelled inside the vehicle causing injury to
the occupants.
To ensure correct deployment of the airbags, it

is essential that obstructions are not allowed to
intervene between an airbag and the occupant.
The following are examples of the type of
obstructions that could either, impede correct
H6023L operation of the airbags, or jeopardise personal
Airbag warning information is printed on the safety in the event of an airbag deployment:
driver’s and front passenger’s sun visor.
A B C
Airbag SRS warning indicator
A warning indicator mounted in
the instrument pack will alert you
to any malfunction of the airbag
SRS, see Warning Indicators, 97. The airbag
SRS should always be checked by a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer if any of the
following symptoms occurs:
• The warning indicator fails to illuminate H6025L
when the starter switch is turned to
position ‘ll’. • Accessories attached to or obscuring an
• The warning indicator fails to extinguish airbag cover, including; the roof lining, ‘A’,
within approximately four seconds after the ‘B’ and ‘C’ post finishers and the seat backs
starter switch is turned to position ‘ll’. of the front seats.
• The warning indicator illuminates after the • Items of hand luggage, or other objects
engine is started, or while the vehicle is placed on an airbag cover.
being driven.
61
L
Airbag SRS
• Feet, knees or any other part of the Seating positions
anatomy in contact with, or in close
proximity to, an airbag cover. WARNING
To minimise the risk of accidental injury from
• Head, arms or any part of the anatomy in
inflating airbags, seat belts should be
contact with, or in close proximity to, a seat
correctly worn at all times. In addition, both
mounted side airbag.
driver and front seat passenger should adjust
• Items of clothing hanging from the grab their seat to provide the maximum practical
handle attached to the roof. distance from the front airbags. Front seat
• Items of clothing or cushions draped over and outer rear seat occupants should also
the part of the front seat containing the ensure that a gap is maintained between the
airbag. upper torso and head, and the side of the
• Non-approved seat covers/accessory seat vehicle, to enable unobstructed inflation of
covers over a front seat; in particular, seat the seat mounted side airbags for the front
covers that have not been designed for use seat occupants and side head airbags for both
with side airbag. If in doubt, consult your front and rear passengers.
In order to provide optimum protection in the
event of a severe impact, it is necessary for the
airbags to deploy with considerable speed.
An inflating airbag can cause facial abrasions
and other injuries if the occupant is too close to
the airbag at the time of its deployment.
62
R
Airbag SRS
HOW THE AIRBAG SRS WORKS When an airbag inflates, a fine powder is
In the event of a collision, the airbag control released. This is not an indication of a
unit monitors the rate of deceleration induced malfunction. However, the powder may cause
by the collision, to determine whether the irritation to the skin and should be thoroughly
airbags should be deployed. flushed from the eyes and any cuts or abrasions
of the skin. After inflation, front and seat
Operation of the airbag SRS is dependent on mounted side airbags deflate immediately (side
the rate at which the vehicle's passenger head protection airbags deflate slowly). This
compartment changes speed as a result of a provides a gradual cushioning effect for the
collision. The circumstances affecting different occupant and also ensures that the driver's
collisions (vehicle speed, angle of impact, type forward vision is not obscured.
and size of object hit, for example), vary
considerably and will affect the rate of WARNING
deceleration accordingly. After inflation, some airbag components are
Note: The airbag SRS is not designed to hot - DO NOT touch until they have cooled.
operate as a result of rear collisions, minor
frontal or side impacts; nor will it operate as a Caution: If a non-approved phone system is to
result of heavy braking or driving over bumps be fitted, ensure that the installer is aware of
and potholes. the SRS system.
It follows, therefore, that significant superficial
damage can occur without the airbags
deploying or, conversely, that a relatively small
amount of structural damage may cause the
airbags to be deployed.
Dual stage deployment
The front airbags deploy in two stages,
depending on the severity of the frontal
collision. The unit monitors the rate of
deceleration during the impact.
In a moderately severe frontal impact, the
airbags inflate sufficiently to protect the front
seat passengers and reduce the risk of injury.
In a severe frontal impact, the airbags will fully
inflate thereby providing maximum protection.
Airbag inflation is virtually instantaneous and
occurs with considerable force, accompanied
by a loud noise. The inflated bag, together with
the seat belt restraint system, limit the
movement of an occupant, thereby reducing
the risk of injury to the head and upper torso.
63
L
Airbag SRS
AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT WARNING
Frontal and seat mounted side airbags An inflating airbag can cause facial abrasions
and other injuries. Minimise the risk of injury
by ensuring that front seat occupants are
wearing their seat belts and are seated
correctly, with the seat as far back as is
practical.
Ensure that a gap is maintained between the
upper torso and the side of the vehicle, to
enable unobstructed inflation of the seat
mounted side airbags.
DO NOT lean out of the window.
H6027L
Note: Airbags will only deploy when they are

required to supplement the restraining force of
the front seat belts.
In the case of a severe frontal collision, both
front airbags will be deployed. In the case of a
severe side collision, only the seat mounted
side airbags and curtain airbags on the
impacted side of the vehicle will inflate.
However, there may also be impact conditions
whereby one set of side and both front airbags
deploy at the same time, or where front and
side airbags respond separately as a result of a
secondary impact occurring after the initial
collision has taken place.
64
R
Airbag SRS
Curtain airbags The curtain airbag modules are located behind
the roof lining and pillar finisher, above the
doors. In the event of a severe side collision, the
airbag pushes out from behind the roof lining
and pillar finisher as it inflates. The curtain
airbag remains inflated for longer than the other
airbags, to provide additional head protection in
the event of a secondary impact/vehicle
rollover.
H6031L
WARNING
For the curtain airbags to deploy correctly,
the roof lining and ‘A’ post trim must be
undamaged and fitted correctly. Any damage
or suspect fitting should be referred to a Land
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer for
examination.
Curtain airbags are designed to protect the

head in the event of a severe side impact or
rollover event. They will NOT inflate as a result
of frontal or rear impacts alone.
65
L
Airbag SRS
PASSENGER AIRBAG DISABLING WARNING
SWITCH Do not use a child restraint on a seat
protected by an operational air bag in front of
Switch
it.
There is a risk of death or serious injury when
the airbag deploys.
The safest place for children is properly
restrained in the rear seats.
Operational status indicator
1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
H6036G
The passenger airbag operational status

indicator is an oblong lamp which illuminates
H6033L yellow when the passenger airbag disabling
If it becomes necessary to fit a child restraint on switch has been turned to the OFF position to
the front passenger seat, the airbag must be de-activate the passenger’s airbag.
de-activated using the switch located on the After the airbag has been de-activated, the
end of the instrument panel on the passenger’s indicator does not illuminate until the starter
side. Access to the switch can only be obtained key has been turned to position ‘ll’.
with the passenger’s door open.
This switch is operated using the starter key.
To use a child restraint in the front, make sure
that the key switch is turned to the OFF position.
66
R
Airbag SRS
Airbag switched off Airbag switched on
H6037G H6038G
In order to fit a child restraint to the front When an adult is seated in the front passenger
passenger seat, use the starter key to turn the seat of your vehicle, ensure that the airbag
airbag disabling switch to the OFF position. disabling switch is turned to the ON position.
Check that when the vehicle has been switched This will ensure that the airbag will perform as
on (position ‘ll’), the operational status lamp on intended in the event of a crash.
the instrument panel is illuminated indicating Check that, when the vehicle is switched on
that the passenger airbag is NOT operational. (position ‘ll’), the operational status lamp on the
If the airbag SRS warning indicator in the instrument panel is NOT illuminated, indicating
instrument cluster illuminates continuously, it that the passenger airbag is operational.
means that there is a malfunction of the system,
see Warning Indicators, 97.
Remove the child restraint from the front seat
and consult your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.
WARNING
When checking the status of the airbag using
the operational status lamp, always ensure
that the starter key is in position ‘ll’.
67
L
Airbag SRS
Airbag switch label
H6410G
The above label is fitted next to the passenger

airbag disabling switch as a guide to the
operation of the switch.
WARNING
To avoid the risk of injury, NEVER use a child
restraint in the front of the vehicle unless the
passenger air bag has been switched OFF.
To ensure that the adult restraint system
performs as intended, make sure that the
passenger air bag is switched ON
The safest place in your vehicle for a child is in

the rear seat.
68
R
Airbag SRS
SERVICE INFORMATION WARNING
WARNING For your safety it is recommended that you
seek the assistance of a Land Rover
DO NOT attempt to service, repair, replace,
Dealer/Authorised Repairer to carry out any of
modify or tamper with any part of the airbag
the following:
SRS, or wiring in the vicinity of an airbag SRS
component; this could cause the system to • Removal or repair of any wiring or
activate, resulting in personal injury. component in the vicinity of any of the
SRS components, including the steering
In addition, ALWAYS contact your Land Rover wheel, steering column, door trim, roof
Dealer/Authorised Repairer if: lining, instrument pack and instrument
panel.
• an airbag inflates.
• Installation of electronic equipment such
• the front or side of the vehicle is damaged,
as a mobile phone, two-way radio or
even if the airbag has not inflated.
in-car entertainment system.
• any part of an airbag module cover shows
• Modification to the front or side of the
signs of cracking or damage.
vehicle, including the bumper and
• any trim containing airbags - front seat chassis.
back, headlining or pillar trims - becomes
• Attachment of accessories to the front or
damaged.
side of the vehicle.
Caution: The components that make up the
airbag SRS are sensitive to electrical or
Disposing of vehicles
physical interference, either of which could
easily damage the system and cause If you sell your vehicle, be sure to inform the
inadvertent operation or a malfunction of the new owner that the vehicle has an airbag SRS.
airbag. If your vehicle is to be scrapped; uninflated
airbags are potentially very dangerous and
must be safely deployed in a controlled
environment by qualified personnel, before a
vehicle is scrapped.
69
L
Steering Column
Steering Column
MANUAL STEERING WHEEL

ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
DO NOT adjust the steering wheel position
while the vehicle is in motion. This is AUTO
extremely dangerous!
DO NOT drive the vehicle unless the locking
lever is in the locked position.
The angle of the steering column can be

adjusted to suit your driving position:
With the vehicle stationary, push the locking
lever up and hold in this position.
Move the steering wheel (up or down) into the
desired position, making sure the instrument
panel is clearly visible.
When adjustment is complete, release the
locking lever to lock the steering column in
position.
H6364L
70
R
Steering Column
ELECTRIC STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT*
WARNING
DO NOT adjust the steering wheel position
while the vehicle is in motion. This is AUTO
extremely dangerous!
Caution: Do not use steering wheel mounted

security devices since movement of the
steering wheel in entry/exit mode could result
in damage to the vehicle (e.g. the
windscreen) or possible injury to the
occupant.
The steering wheel position can be adjusted for
tilt and reach by operating the rotary/joystick on
the left side of the steering column.
1. Turn the switch to the ‘COLUMN’ or
‘AUTO’ position.
2. Move the switch forwards or backwards to
adjust reach.
3. Move the switch up or down to adjust tilt.
Three column positions for each of the H6362L
three possible starter keys may be stored
and recalled by the driver memory position
system.
71
L
Steering Column
Entry/exit mode
Entry/exit mode provides automatic movement
of the steering column and drivers seat to allow
easier entry to or exit from the vehicle.
Entry/exit mode is selected by setting the AUTO
steering column and drivers adjustment switch

to the ‘AUTO’ position.
Exit - If the ignition key is removed from the
ignition barrel the steering column will move to
the uppermost tilt position (unless already in
that position) and the seat will move slightly
rearwards and or downwards, depending on its
current position.
Entry - When the key is next inserted in the
ignition switch the steering column and seat
will return to their previous positions. If,
however, the memorised driver position has
been changed (using the MEMORY switch or
another key transmitter), the steering wheel
and seat will move to the new position.
Notes on entry/exit mode operation:
• If the adjustment switch is moved away
from ‘AUTO’ whilst the steering column is H6040L
tilted away, the steering column will move

back to its memorised position when the
key is next inserted in the ignition and
entry/exit mode is then cancelled.
• If the adjustment switch is moved during
entry/exit operation, steering column
movement will stop.
72
R
Steering Column
STEERING WHEEL POSITION
MEMORY*
Lazy entry*
When the lazy entry option is selected and the
vehicle is unlocked using the handset, the
vehicle adjusts the driver's seat, steering
column and the exterior mirrors to the position
associated with that particular handset.
Lazy seats and associated options can be
selected or deselected by a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer or by selecting
Settings, see SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION,
81
Note: On vehicles fitted with the driver’s seat
memory facility, up to three different steering
column positions can be stored in the seat
memory, this enables the driver to recall the
optimum steering wheel position at the touch of
a button - for further information, please refer
to DRIVER’S SEAT MEMORY FACILITY*, 45.
73
L
Door Mirrors
Door Mirrors
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Caution: Objects viewed in exterior mirrors
may appear further away than they actually
are.
Mirror adjustment
H6046L
The door mirrors have integral heating

elements which disperse ice or mist from the
glass. These will operate automatically with the
starter switch in position ‘II’ and are controlled
according to the external temperature and
H6044L
wiper status.
With the starter switch turned to position ‘l’ or Note: On vehicles fitted with the driver’s seat
‘II’, push the knob in the appropriate direction memory facility, up to three exterior mirror
to tilt the mirror glass up/down/left or right. positions for each of three possible starter keys
Rotate the knob to select either the left- or can be stored, see DRIVER’S SEAT MEMORY
right-hand mirror. FACILITY*, 45.
74
R
Door Mirrors
Folding the mirror body
The door mirrors are designed to fold forwards
or rearwards on impact. They can also be folded
in towards the side windows into a ‘park’
position.
H6048L
Manual operation: On some vehicles this H6050L

operation can be carried out manually, by
physically pushing the mirror bodies towards Electric operation:* With the rotary knob in
the side windows. the central position, push the knob downwards
to fold the mirrors. Push the knob downwards
again to unfold the mirrors.
If the mirrors are accidentally knocked out of
position (i.e. with one mirror folded and the
other in the normal position), an additional
operation of the switch will re-synchronise
them.
75
L
Door Mirrors
Automatic mirror dipping*
Vehicles with driver’s seat memory have a
pre-stored function, which causes the door
mirrors to dip whenever reverse gear is
selected, giving the driver a view of the
kerbside.
When this feature is first turned on, the mirrors
will dip to a pre-set amount see, SELECTING
SETTINGS OPTION, 81. The degree of dipping
can be programmed using the following
sequence:
1. Insert the ignition key and turn it to position
‘ll’.
2. Adjust the seat and the exterior mirrors to
the correct position and perform a
memory-store routine.
3. Select reverse gear - the mirrors will dip to
a pre-set level.
4. Adjust the mirrors to the required dipped
position.
5. Perform a memory-store sequence.
6. ‘Mirror Dip Stored’ will appear on the
message centre (if fitted).
7. A single chime will sound from the
instrument pack.
This feature can be enabled or disabled
by a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer or by the driver. See
SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 81.
76
Facia Controls
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
FACIA CONTROLS
AUTO
1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7
PQRS
8
TUV
9
WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
77
21
14
Facia Controls
AUTO
22
18
24 23 19 17
20 15
H5914L
16
R
L
Facia Controls
FACIA CONTROLS KEY
1. Headlamps and direction indicator controls
2. Cruise Control switches
3. Tachometer
4. Temperature gauge
5. Horn buttons
6. Fuel gauge
7. Speedometer
8. Audio remote controls
9. Wash/wipe controls
10. Heater/air conditioning controls
11. Hazard warning lamp switch
12. Door lock/unlock switch
13. Audio display/controls
14. Gear selector
15. Transfer gearbox switch
16. Hill Descent Control switch
17. Display screen
18. Electric parkbrake switch
19. Terrain ResponseTM control switch
20. Air suspension switch
21. Starter switch
22. Manual headlamp levelling
23. Dimmer control
24. Lamps master switch
Note:
The precise specification and location of the
controls may vary according to territorial
requirements and from vehicle to vehicle.
78
R
Instruments
Instruments
INSTRUMENT PACK
1 2 3 4
EXT 23 C
H6052L 9 8 7 6 5
1. Tachometer
Indicates engine speed in revolutions per
minute (x 1000). In normal driving conditions
the engine is most fuel efficient between 2000
and 3000 rev/min.
2. Temperature gauge
At normal operating temperature, the pointer
will be positioned midway between the RED and
BLUE segments of the gauge (the precise
position will vary according to climatic
conditions). H6055G
If the pointer moves above the mid point, the Stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits and
engine coolant is becoming too hot. Should the switch off the engine and allow to cool down. If
pointer move INTO the RED segment and the the problem persists, seek qualified assistance
RED warning indicator within the gauge before continuing.
illuminates, severe engine damage could occur
(under these circumstances, the air 3. Fuel gauge
conditioning may switch off and engine When the starter switch is turned to position
performance may reduce in order to minimise ‘II’, the pointer quickly rises to show the level of
engine load). fuel in the tank.
79
L
Instruments
When the remaining fuel reaches a minimum of 7. Gear selector position display
12 litres (3 gallons) on petrol vehicles, the For vehicles with automatic transmission the
AMBER low fuel warning indicator in the fuel current gear selector position is displayed. For
gauge illuminates. manual gearboxes, the actual gear engaged
within the gearbox is displayed. See GEAR
SELECTOR DISPLAY, 96, for further
information.
8. Main message centre
Displays all warning and information
messages. For further information concerning
messages and their meanings, refer to MAIN
MESSAGE CENTRE, 84.
9. Tachometer indicators panel
H6056G Displays four system status indicators.
The remaining fuel should give a range of 80 km
(50 miles).
The small arrow visible alongside the fuel pump
symbol on the gauge indicates the side of the
vehicle on which the fuel filler is located - a
useful reminder to help you position the vehicle
on the correct side of the forecourt pumps
before refuelling.
WARNING
NEVER allow vehicles to run out of fuel as the
resultant misfire may destroy the catalytic
converter.
4. Speedometer
Indicates road speed.
5. Total distance (odometer) and trip recorder
Indicates the total distance travelled, and also
shows the most recent individual journey
distance, see ODOMETER DISPLAY, 96.
6. Trip recorder reset switch
With the starter switch in position ‘ll’, pressing
this button resets the trip recorder to zero.
80
R
Settings Option
Settings Option
SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION

Various vehicle functions can be selected to
suit personal requirements. These can be set by
the driver.
MODE
3
SETTINGS
4
ENTER
EXIT
1
2
TRIP DISTANCE
UNITS
KM
NEXT
H6063G EXIT BACK
With the starter key in any position, but with the
vehicle stationary and a blank screen displayed, H6064G
a short press (less than two seconds) on the ‘i’ Move through the Settings menu by pressing
(information) button on the end of the direction buttons 1 or 2, and make choices by pressing
indicator stalk brings up the SETTINGS display. buttons 3 or 4.
Once this screen is displayed, pressing button When you have finished making adjustments, a
1 gives access to the menu of options that can short press (less than two seconds) on the
be personalised. information button will return you to the trip
computer display.
81
L
Settings Option
SETTINGS CHOICE
TRIP DISTANCE UNITS (odometer) MILES/KM
FUEL USAGE UNITS MPG
l/100km
Km/l
EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE oC or oF
OVERSPEED WARNING Off

20 - 250 km/h or 15 to 140 mph in 5-unit steps
(Units set as trip distance)
HEADLAMP OFF DELAY 30/60/120/240 seconds
AUTO DOOR LOCK (speed related locking) ON/OFF
REVERSE MIRROR DIP ON/OFF
LAZY ENTRY ON/OFF
RESTORE DEFAULT SETTINGS YES/NO
Confirming choices Key memory

After making any changes to the Settings All of the choices made during Settings are
options, press the information button again to stored within the vehicles memory. The choices
save settings and exit. are referenced to the handset that was used
Note: If the vehicle is moved while any changes during the process.
are being made to the Settings options, the These choices are recalled when the vehicle is
system will prevent any further input until the next unlocked using that remote handset.
vehicle is stationary again.
82
R
Trip Computer
Trip Computer
TRIP COMPUTER - A series of short presses of the button (less

FUNCTION SELECTION than two seconds) will scroll through the
following:
EXT 23 C
TRIP 274.5 Km
RANGE 387 km
AV.
FUEL 4.3 l/100km
AV.
SPEED 57 km/h
H6057L
OVERSPEED WARNING
The trip computer function can be set to give a 120 Km/h
wide range of information, with the units used
by the displays being chosen by the driver. EXT 23 C
The system is also used to display any warning
messages generated by the vehicle’s
self-checking facility. TRIP 274.5 km
At engine start-up, the screen shows SYSTEM
CHECK IN PROGRESS. When this check is H6060L
completed, the screen will show the outside
temperature. If the vehicle is in motion, the • Available range (with current fuel tank
screen will also show the trip distance, using contents)
the last used units. • Average consumption
Trip computer statistics can be viewed by • Average speed
pressing the ‘i’ button on the end of the • The option to activate/de-activate the
direction indicator stalk. overspeed warning function (A long press
A long press of the button (over two seconds) of the button turns the function on or off)
will zero the trip distance recorder which will • A review of active warning messages
then start to record distance from that point.
• A blank trip computer window (screen
shows outside temperature)
• A display of trip distance
83
L
Message Centre
Message Centre
MAIN MESSAGE CENTRE Warnings and information messages

Warning messages are non-critical, but must
be treated with some urgency. They will also be
accompanied by an audible warning each time
the message is displayed.
DO NOT ignore these messages - TAKE
EXT 23 C CORRECTIVE ACTION AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.
Warning messages are displayed for
approximately 20 seconds. If other warning
messages are pending, the display time will be
reduced to approximately 2 seconds.
Information messages will be displayed as and
when applicable, and also when the starter
switch is turned on or off. Where the message
LOW WASHER FLUID
requires action by the driver - TAKE
CORRECTIVE ACTION AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.
Messages are displayed in order of importance
H6065G with critical warnings taking priority.
Driver warning and information messages are
displayed in the main message centre.
They are displayed when a fault is detected and
also when the starter switch is turned off. It is
possible, by pressing the system check control
switch, to view messages for up to 3 minutes
after the key has been removed from the starter
switch.
Messages have different priority levels and are
grouped into the following categories.
Critical warning messages
Critical warning messages are accompanied by
an audible warning and the warning may have
the handbook symbol next to it. DO NOT ignore
these messages - TAKE CORRECTIVE ACTION
IMMEDIATELY! These messages are displayed
continuously while the starter switch is turned
on, and remain displayed while the fault
persists.
84
R
Message Centre
MESSAGE CENTRE
MESSAGES
The following table is a comprehensive list of all
messages that could appear in the Message
Centre. Market criteria mean that some
messages will not apply to your vehicle and will
therefore not appear.
Message Meaning What to do?
AAA.A M BBB.B M Trip computer information.
C.C Mph D.D Mpg
AIRBAG FAULT Fault in supplementary Seek qualified assistance
restraint system. immediately.
Average Cons. Trip computer information.
Reset mpg l/100km
Average Speed Trip computer information.
Reset Miles km
CANNOT EDIT Driver has attempted to access Stop the vehicle before entering
ON THE MOVE the Customer Settings menu Customer Settings menu.
when the vehicle is moving.
CAUTION Parkbrake has been applied Only use this function in an
PARKBRAKE while the vehicle is moving. emergency.
APPLIED
CAUTION! Displayed when the Terrain Raise suspension manually to
RISK OF Response system would off-road height if possible and
GROUNDING WITH normally have provided appropriate.
SUSPENSION AT off-road height but the driver
NORMAL HEIGHT has manually lowered the
vehicle (or the system cannot
raise the vehicle).
CHECK ALL Advisory message, pressure in Check tyre pressures.
TYRE PRESSURES a running tyre decreased to
first warning threshold.
CHECK Brake fluid in reservoir below Seek qualified assistance
BRAKE FLUID recommended level. immediately.
CHECK Brake pads worn beyond the Seek qualified assistance
BRAKE PADS service limit. immediately.
CHECK Pressure in spare tyre Check pressure of spare tyre.
SPARE TYRE decreased to warning
PRESSURE threshold.
85
L
Message Centre
COOLING SYSTEM Low coolant level Top up with engine coolant. If the
FAULT problem persists, consult your
MONITOR GAUGE Dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL Driver has switched off Cruise Nothing
CANCELLED Control.
CRUISE CONTROL Driver is pressing the Nothing, message will clear when
DRIVER OVERRIDE accelerator pedal during Cruise the driver releases the
Control. accelerator, then Cruise Control
will resume.
CRUISE CONTROL System not available due to Consult your Land Rover
NOT AVAILABLE system fault. Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
CRUISE CONTROL System fault or vehicle Consult Cruise Control section of
NOT PERMITTED operating parameters outside manual for guidance.
threshold for operation of
Cruise Control.
CRUISE CONTROL Speed set for Adaptive Cruise Nothing.
SET SPEED xxx km/h Control.
ACC GAP Adaptive Cruise Control set Adjust to required distance.
<----> distance (time gap). (4 settings).
ACC SENSOR Adaptive Cruise Control field of Check to make sure nothing is
BLOCKED view may be obstructed. covering the ACC sensor.
FWD ALERT Forward alert feature has been Nothing.
ON or OFF turned on or off.
FWD ALERT Forward alert sensitivity Adjust to required sensitivity.
<----> adjustment. (4 settings).
DOOR MIRROR DIP Memory system - confirmation Nothing.
STORED that memory has stored driver
information.
DRIVER Alert that action by the driver to If required, the driver should
INTERVENE apply the brakes is required. apply the brakes.
DRIVER OVERSPEED Trip computer information. Nothing.
SET CLEAR
DRIVER’S Driver’s door open or not fully Close driver’s door.
DOOR OPEN closed.
DSC System not available - switched To reselect, press DSC switch.
SWITCHED OFF off by driver.
86
R
Message Centre
ENGINE SYSTEM FAULT Engine management system Avoid high speeds and consult
registers a serious fault - your Land Rover
reduced performance may be Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
experienced.
ENGINE SYSTEM The relevant service interval Arrange as soon as possible.
SERVICE REQUIRED has elapsed and your vehicle
requires servicing.
FASTEN Seat occupied and safety belt Fasten safety belt.
SEATBELTS not fastened.
FRONT LEFT Possible loss of RF Seek qualified assistance
TYRE PRESSURE transmission or defective immediately.
NOT MONITORED sensor battery.
FRONT LEFT Pressure in a running tyre too Adjust to correct pressure as
TYRE PRESSURE high, threshold reached. soon as possible.
TOO HIGH
FRONT LEFT Pressure in a running tyre Adjust to correct pressure as
TYRE PRESSURE decreased to warning soon as possible.
VERY LOW threshold.
GRASS GRAVEL If you leave the rotary knob in Nothing.
SNOW this position then you will
activate the highlighted Terrain
Response special program.
GRASS GRAVEL The rotary knob has been left in Nothing.
SNOW one position for longer than
PROGRAM SELECTED two seconds and Grass Gravel
Snow special program has
been activated.
HDC FAULT System fault. Drive with care and do not
SYSTEM attempt to descend steep slopes.
NOT AVAILABLE Seek assistance immediately.
HDC HDC not operative because of Select correct gear if HDC is
NOT AVAILABLE incorrect gear selection. HDC is required. In LOW range, HDC
IN THIS GEAR fully functional in 1, R and D in operates in all gears.
HIGH range. It operates in all
gears in LOW range.
HDC HDC unavailable, speed Reduce vehicle speed.
NOT AVAILABLE threshold exceeded. Max HDC
SPEED TOO HIGH operating speed is 50 km/h,
max speed for HDC selection is
80 km/h.
87
L
Message Centre
HDC HDC switched off by driver, Nothing.
SWITCHED OFF Terrain Response system or
speed threshold exceeded.
HDC TEMPORARILY HDC switched off while brake Wait until message disappears
NOT AVAILABLE system is cooling. before attempting to descend
SYSTEM COOLING steep slopes.
HIGH ENGINE SPEED Engine idle speed increasing to Nothing.
FOR COOLING improve cooling and/or air
conditioning performance.
HIGH/LOW RANGE Advises driver that transfer box Nothing.
SELECTED has engaged HIGH/LOW range.
INTERIOR LIGHTS Courtesy lamps can only be Nothing
OFF operated manually, and will not
illuminate when a door is
opened.
INTERIOR LIGHTS All courtesy lights have been Nothing
AUTOMATIC ENABLED.
KEY BATTERY Handset battery charge low. Insert key in starter switch and
LOW PLACE start the engine to recharge the
KEY IN IGNITION Handset battery.
TO CHARGE
LOW Coolant level in header tank Top up with correct mixture of
COOLANT LEVEL below recommended level. antifreeze and water at the
earliest opportunity. If the
problem persists, consult your
Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.
LOW WASHER FLUID Washer fluid quantity below 1 Top up washer fluid.
litre.
MEMORY 1/2/3 Memory system - confirmation Nothing.
STORED/SELECTED that memory has been
stored/selected.
MUD RUTS If you leave the rotary knob in Nothing.
this position then you will
MUD RUTS SELECTED The rotary knob has been left in Nothing.
one position for longer than
two seconds and Mud Ruts
special program has been
activated.
88
R
Message Centre
PARKBRAKE A garage technician has If not required, an ignition reset
BEDDING CYCLE requested a bedding cycle. will cancel the function.
ACTIVE
PARKBRAKE FAULT Supports the yellow warning Seek qualified assistance.
indicator - electric parkbrake
functions may not be available.
PARKBRAKE FAULT Drive-away release function is Use manual release.
AUTO RELEASE not available.
NOT FUNCTIONAL
PARKBRAKE FAULT Supports the red warning Seek qualified assistance
SYSTEM indicator - electric parkbrake immediately.
NOT FUNCTIONAL functions are not available.
PARKBRAKE FAULT Electric parkbrake has lost Follow the instructions to park
TO HOLD VEHICLE vehicle speed information. the vehicle.
REMOVE KEY THEN
APPLY PARKBRAKE
PARKBRAKE OFF An emergency release Once original faults have been
LIFT SWITCH operation is detected. corrected, apply the switch to
TO APPLY reinstate electric park brake.
PARK LOCK Automatic transmission park Seek qualified assistance
FAILURE lock function ineffective due to immediately.
APPLY HANDBRAKE transfer box being out of HIGH
or LOW range.
PRESS FOOTBRAKE A switch release has been Follow the instructions to achieve
AND PARKBRAKE detected without brake pedal a manual release.
SWITCH contact.
TO RELEASE
PRESS FOOTBRAKE A switch release has been Follow the instructions to achieve
OR CLUTCH detected without brake pedal a manual release.
AND PARKBRAKE contact.
SWITCH
TO RELEASE
89
L
Message Centre
PROGRAM CHANGE Conditions prevail which make Be patient. If conditions change
IN PROGRESS it temporarily impossible to within 60 seconds, the chosen
select a new program. This can program will be activated.
be due to ABS or DSC activity If the message is prompted by
or the overheating of the electronic differential overheat,
electronic differentials. then it will take longer but there
will be separate advice about this.
Once the differentials have cooled
and this advice is no longer
present, try to reselect the
required special program.
RANGE Trip computer information.
Miles km
RECOMMEND LOW range is usually better for Select LOW range if required.
LOW RANGE Mud-Ruts special program.
IS SELECTED
FOR MUD-RUTS
PROGRAM
RECOMMEND RAISING In deep ruts it is beneficial to Raise suspension manually to
SUSPENSION TO raise the vehicle to off-road off-road height.
OFF ROAD HEIGHT height. This is done
IN DEEP MUD-RUTS automatically in LOW range but
has to be done manually if
mud/ruts program is used in
HIGH range.
RECOMMEND STARTING For slippery conditions it can Select second/third gear.
IN be beneficial to start off in a
2ND/3RD GEAR higher gear than usual.
FOR SLIPPERY
CONDITIONS
REDUCED Engine management system Avoid high speeds and consult
ENGINE registers a serious fault - your Land Rover
PERFORMANCE reduced engine performance Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
may be experienced.
RESET SUSPENSION Suspension still in extended Check if vehicle is clear of
HEIGHT IF CLEAR mode. obstacle. If clear, select required
OF OBSTACLE suspension.
ROCK CRAWL If you leave the rotary knob in Nothing.
90
R
Message Centre
ROCK CRAWL SELECTED The rotary knob has been left in Nothing.
two seconds and Rock Crawl
special program has been
activated.
SAND If you leave the rotary knob in Nothing.
SAND SELECTED The rotary knob has been left in Nothing.
two seconds and Sand special
program has been activated.
SELECT LOW RANGE Vehicle is not in LOW range, so Select LOW range if Rock Crawl is
TO ACTIVATE Rock Crawl cannot be required.
ROCK CRAWL activated.
SELECT NEUTRAL Alerts driver that range change Select neutral.
FOR RANGE will not occur until neutral is
CHANGE selected on the transmission.
SLOW DOWN OR VEHICLE Vehicle will automatically Choose to slow down or accept
WILL LOWER/RAISE lower/raise if vehicle speed height change.
increases.
SPECIAL You have deselected a Terrain Nothing.
PROGRAMS OFF Response special program and
the general program has now
been activated.
SPEED TOO HIGH Driver has requested range Reduce speed to 40 km/h on
FOR RANGE change when vehicle speed is automatic transmission or 20
CHANGE too high. km/h on manual transmission.
SUSPENSION Access height selected. Nothing.
ACCESS HEIGHT
SELECTED
SUSPENSION Air suspension height change Close all doors.
CLOSE DOOR is prevented because a door is
TO CHANGE HEIGHT open.
SUSPENSION FAULT A fault has been detected in the Seek qualified assistance
air suspension system. System immediately.
may still operate normally.
SUSPENSION FAULT A major fault has been detected Drive slowly until fault can be
MAX SPEED 50 km/h in the air suspension system. rectified.
(MAX SPEED 30 mph) Height cannot be controlled.
91
L
Message Centre
SUSPENSION FAULT A fault has been detected in the
NORMAL HEIGHT ONLY air suspension system. Only
normal height is available.
SUSPENSION FAULT Major component failure. Stop vehicle immediately and
STOP SAFELY seek qualified assistance.
STOP ENGINE
SUSPENSION FAULT A fault has been detected in the Drive slowly and take additional
VEHICLE LEAN WHEN Dynamic Response system. care until fault can be fixed.
CORNERING
SUSPENSION Vehicle body has become Nothing.
IN EXTENDED trapped on an obstacle and will
MODE raise automatically.
SUSPENSION Crawl mode selected and Nothing.
LOCKED AT suspension locked.
ACCESS HEIGHT
SUSPENSION Normal height selected. Nothing.
NORMAL HEIGHT
SELECTED
SUSPENSION A height change has been Reduce vehicle speed.
SPEED TOO HIGH requested but is prevented
TO CHANGE HEIGHT because speed is too high.
SUSPENSION Vehicle height can only be Start the engine.
START ENGINE raised with the engine running.
TO RAISE VEHICLE
SUSPENSION Vehicle is raising slowly Nothing.
VEHICLE RAISING because reservoir is empty.
SLOWLY (Only displayed if lift time
exceeds 12 seconds. This is
NOT a system fault).
SUSPENSION Air suspension compressor is Wait for suspension to carry out
WILL RAISE WHEN cooling. Lifting will resume lifting sequence.
SYSTEM COOLED when compressor has cooled.
SYSTEM CHECK Instrument cluster internal Nothing.
IN PROGRESS diagnostic routine.
SYSTEM FAULT Some Terrain Response special Be careful going off-road as
SOME PROGRAMS programs are not available Terrain Response may not
NOT AVAILABLE because of a system fault. function in the program required.
Get the vehicle checked and
rectified.
92
R
Message Centre
SYSTEM FAULT There is a fault on the vehicle Be careful going off-road as
SPECIAL PROGRAMS which makes the Terrain Terrain Response cannot
NOT AVAILABLE Response special programs function in any of its special
unavailable. programs.
Get the vehicle checked and
rectified.
TERRAIN RESPONSE If you leave the Terrain Nothing.
SPECIAL PROGRAMS OFF Response rotary knob in this
position, you will activate the
general program and any active
Terrain Response special
program will be deselected.
TRAILER CONNECTED Advisory message that vehicle If a trailer is connected, do
OFF ROAD HEIGHT has not selected off-road height nothing, as it may not be safe to
NOT SELECTED as trailer socket is being used. raise the vehicle to off-road
AUTOMATICALLY height.
If no trailer is connected
electrically but something else is,
such as a bike rack, then the
vehicle can be raised to off-road
height manually.
If nothing is connected, then the
socket needs checking for faults.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that automatic Seek qualified assistance
FAULT transmission has a fault. immediately.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that an Seek qualified assistance
FAULT AND automatic transmission fault immediately.
OVERHEAT has occurred and the
temperature is too high.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that automatic Seek qualified assistance
FAULT LIMITED transmission has a fault and immediately.
GEARS AVAILABLE performance may be affected.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that a fault has Stop the vehicle as soon as it is
FAULT occurred with the electronic safe to do so.
STOP SAFELY rear differential.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that a fault has Reduce speed and seek
FAULT occurred with the transfer box assistance as soon as possible.
TRACTION REDUCED control system. Note: Off-road performance will
be reduced.
93
L
Message Centre
TRANSMISSION Rear differential temperature Reduce speed and seek qualified
OVERHEAT has reached or is approaching assistance as soon as possible.
SLOW DOWN the overheat threshold.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that a fault has Reduce speed and seek qualified
RANGE CHANGE occurred which prevents the assistance as soon as possible.
NOT AVAILABLE transfer box from changing
range.
TRANSMISSION Transfer box control module Reduce speed and seek qualified
TRACTION fault. assistance as soon as possible.
REDUCED
Trip Dist Range Trip computer information. Nothing.
Ave Sp. Ave Cons.
Trip Distance Trip computer information. Nothing.
Reset Miles km
94
R
Message Centre
SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR
H6066G H6067G
When the starter switch is turned to position ‘I’, If the System Check Control Button, is pressed
a distance ‘countdown’ to the next service before the five seconds have elapsed, a clock
appears in the display. A minus sign preceding symbol appears and the next service date is
the distance indicates that the service interval displayed (dd.mm.yy) in place of the
point has been exceeded by that distance. countdown feature. This displays for a further
After approximately five seconds, the display five seconds.
reverts to show the total distance travelled. If the service/inspection date is passed before
The distance countdown is controlled by the the countdown feature has reached zero, the
engine management system and is clock symbol will be displayed for five seconds
automatically adjusted to allow for driving style at the start of every starter sequence to make
and conditions. the driver aware of the need to check the
vehicle’s service requirements.
Note: After the completion of each service, the
Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer will
reset the distance display for the countdown to
the next service.
95
L
Message Centre
GEAR SELECTOR DISPLAY ODOMETER DISPLAY
H6068G
This shows the current gear lever position and

indicates when LOW range has been selected.
The LOW range indicator (in the top right
H6069G
corner of the display) flashes whilst the transfer
gearbox changes ranges and then illuminates With the starter switch turned to position ‘II’,
constantly when LOW range has engaged. A the display indicates the total distance travelled
range change will also be confirmed in the main by the vehicle, and also shows the most recent
message centre. individual journey distance. See Settings
Option, 81.
96
R
Warning Indicators
Warning Indicators
WARNING INDICATORS
H6070L
Caution: RED warning indicators are of BACKGROUND

particular importance; their illumination
indicates that a fault exists. If a RED warning Direction indicators - GREEN
indicator illuminates, stop the vehicle safely An indicator flashes in time with
and review the specific instructions given in the corresponding left or right
this section. direction indicator lamps
The location and specification of the warning whenever they are operated. If the warning
indicators may vary according to model and indicator fails to flash, or flashes very rapidly,
market requirements. this may indicate a bulb failure in one of the
direction indicator lamps.
For ease of identification, the warning indicator
descriptions have been grouped into the five If the hazard switch is pressed, both warning
locations on the instrument pack. indicators will flash in conjunction with the
direction indicator lamps.
These are:
• background Trailer - GREEN
The indicator illuminates as a bulb
• tachometer
check when the starter switch is
• fuel/temperature gauge turned to position ‘II’ and
• message centre extinguishes when the engine is started.
• speedometer If a trailer is attached to the vehicle and the
direction indicators are used, this indicator will
flash in synchronisation with the direction
indicator lamps. If it does not flash, this
indicates that a trailer bulb is defective.
97
L
Warning Indicators
TACHOMETER Seat belt - RED
Illuminates when the starter
Battery charging - RED
switch is turned to position ‘II’ and
Illuminates as a bulb check when extinguishes after approximately
the starter switch is turned to 6 seconds, even if the driver's seat belt remains
position ‘II’ and extinguishes once unfastened. In some markets illumination of the
the engine is running. If it remains on, or indicator will be accompanied by a warning
illuminates whilst driving, a fault with the chime (see AUDIBLE WARNINGS, 102).
battery charging system is indicated. Seek
Note: In certain markets, the indicator will
qualified assistance urgently.
illuminate until the driver’s seat belt is fastened
Low oil pressure - RED correctly.
Illuminates as a bulb check when Airbag SRS - RED
the starter switch is turned to
The indicator illuminates when the
position ‘II’ and extinguishes
starter switch is turned to position
when the engine is started. If the indicator
‘II’ and extinguishes after about 4
remains on, flashes on and off, or illuminates
seconds. If the indicator illuminates at any
whilst driving, stop the vehicle as soon as
other time, there is a fault with the system -
safety permits and SWITCH OFF THE ENGINE
seek qualified assistance urgently.
IMMEDIATELY. Seek qualified assistance
before driving. Always check the oil level when Suspension- AMBER/RED
this indicator illuminates. This light is shared between the
Check engine - AMBER - petrol only Air suspension system and
Dynamic Response.
Illuminates as a bulb and system
check when the starter switch is The light illuminates both RED and AMBER
turned on and extinguishes as briefly as a bulb check when the starter switch
soon as the engine is started. Illumination at is turned to position 'II'.
any other time indicates an engine fault. If the If illumination occurs whilst driving, a fault with
indicator illuminates continuously while one of the systems is indicated, as follows:
driving, the emission performance of the • If the light shows RED (a flashing red light
engine management system is impaired - seek which changes to constant illumination
qualified assistance. after two minutes, and is accompanied by a
If the indicator flashes while driving, warning chime): This indicates a system
immediately reduce engine power to avoid fault that may result in serious damage to
catalytic converter damage. vehicle components and reduced Dynamic
Response performance. Stop the vehicle as
Glow plug - AMBER (diesel only)
soon as safety permits and switch off the
Illuminates when the starter engine. DO NOT CONTINUE DRIVING! Seek
switch is turned to position ‘II’. qualified assistance immediately.
When the engine is cold, wait for
the light to extinguish before starting. If the
engine is warm, the light will not illuminate.
98
R
Warning Indicators
The following message will be displayed in the LOW gear- GREEN
message centre window to accompany a red Illuminates when LOW range has
warning light for a dynamic response system been selected; flashes during
failure: range change.
‘SUSPENSION FAULT, STOP SAFELY, STOP
Hill Descent Control (HDC) ‘information’ -
ENGINE’.
GREEN
If the following message is displayed in the Illuminates briefly as a bulb and
message centre: system check when the starter
‘SUSPENSION FAULT, MAX SPEED 50KPH switch is turned to position 'II' and
(MAX SPEED 30MPH)’ also illuminates when HDC is selected.
This indicates an air suspension fault, with the If HDC is selected and all operating conditions
system not being able to control ride height. In are met, the indicator will illuminate
which case the maximum speed indicated continuously.
should not be exceeded until the fault has been If HDC is selected and all operating conditions
rectified. are not met (vehicle in neutral gear, clutch
• If the light shows AMBER (constant pressed on manual gearbox vehicles, vehicle
illumination): This indicates a system fault speed above HDC operating range) the
that will result in reduced Dynamic indicator will flash.
Response performance but will not leave If a fault with the HDC system occurs, HDC will
the vehicle in a dangerous condition. You fade-out and then deselect, or deselect
may continue driving, but reduce speed, immediately (depending on the type of fault and
take additional care, and consult a Land whether or not HDC is in operation). The green
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer at the indicator will extinguish and the message
earliest opportunity. The ride quality of the ‘SYSTEM NOT AVAILABLE’ will appear in the
vehicle may be reduced in this condition. message centre.
The following message will be displayed in the
message centre window to accompany an Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) and
amber warning light: Electronic Traction Control (ETC) - AMBER
Illuminates briefly as a bulb check
‘SUSPENSION FAULT, VEHICLE LEAN, WHEN
when the starter switch is turned
CORNERING’.
to position ‘II’. The indicator also
If the following message is displayed in the illuminates when DSC is switched off.
message centre: De-activating DSC has no effect on traction
‘SUSPENSION FAULT, NORMAL HEIGHT control.
ONLY’. The indicator will flash while DSC and/or ETC is
This indicates an air suspension fault, but the activated and will remain flashing until the
vehicle can still be driven normally. system is no longer active.
99
L
Warning Indicators
If the indicator illuminates constantly, and does FUEL/TEMPERATURE GAUGE
not extinguish when the DSC switch is pressed,
a fault has been detected in the system and DSC Headlamp high beam - BLUE
and/or ETC will be inactive - drive with care and Illuminates when the headlamps
seek qualified assistance as soon as possible. are switched to high beam or
headlamps are flashed.
Tyre pressure monitoring- AMBER
The indicator illuminates as a bulb
check when the starter switch is
turned to position ‘II’. If the
indicator stays on or illuminates during driving,
the tyre pressure in one or more tyres is
significantly low and should be rectified as
soon as safely possible.
Brake systems
This indicator shares its position
and symbol with four brake system
warnings and illuminates briefly as
a bulb check when the starter switch is turned
to position ‘II’ (the indicator will illuminate red
and amber during bulb check).
Emergency brake assist - AMBER
If the indicator remains amber after starting, or
illuminates whilst driving, a fault with the EBA
system is indicated. Drive with care and seek
Brake pad wear - AMBER
It illuminates when brake pad wear has reached
a predetermined limit.
Electronic Brake force Distribution (EBD) -
RED
A fault with the EBD system is indicated by
illumination of the red brake warning indicator.
If this illuminates while the vehicle is being
driven, stop the vehicle gently, as soon as
safety permits, check and top up brake fluid if
necessary. If the lamp remains illuminated,
seek qualified assistance before continuing.
100
R
Warning Indicators
Brake fluid level - RED SPEEDOMETER
Low brake fluid level is indicated by illumination
Cruise Control active - AMBER
of the red brake warning indicator. If this
illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, Illuminates when Cruise Control is
stop the vehicle gently, as soon as safety operating.
permits. Check and top up brake fluid if Adaptive Cruise Control active
necessary. If the lamp remains illuminated,
Illuminates when Adaptive Cruise
Control detects a vehicle in front
Have the problem checked by your Land Rover
and will react to it.
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
Adaptive front lighting system- AMBER
Anti-lock braking system - AMBER
Illuminates when a fault occurs
Illuminates as a bulb check when
with the Adaptive Front Lighting
the starter switch is turned to
System.
position ‘II’. If the indicator
remains on or illuminates whilst driving, a fault Parkbrake system - RED or YELLOW
with the ABS system is indicated. Drive with Illuminates for about 3 seconds as
care, avoiding heavy brake application, and a bulb check when the starter
seek qualified assistance urgently. switch is turned to position ‘ll’.
If the indicator flashes red or illuminates yellow,
a fault with the parkbrake system is indicated,
When parking the vehicle in this condition,
ensure that the vehicle is secured stationary
without reliance on the parkbrake.
Front fog lamps - GREEN*
Illuminates when the front fog
lamps are switched on.
Rear fog guard lamps - YELLOW
Illuminates when the rear fog
guard lamps are switched on.
101
L
Audible Warnings
Audible Warnings
AUDIBLE WARNINGS Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) warning

The market specification will determine which A warning chime will sound once:
of the following audible warnings are • If a fault with the DSC system is detected,
appropriate to your vehicle. and the appropriate warning indicator(s)
illuminates (DSC, ABS, Amber Brake
Electronic air suspension warnings
Warning or HDC fault text message). The
A warning chime will sound: vehicle may still be driven with care, but
• Whenever the air suspension raise/lower seek qualified assistance at the earliest
switch is operated to raise the vehicle to opportunity.
off-road height, or to return it to standard
ride height. Adaptive Cruise control
A warning chime will sound:
• If changes to or from off-road height are
requested but not permitted. • When the driver must intervene and take
control.
• Whenever the speed threshold for the
current ride height is reached. Electric park brake
• Whenever the air suspension is lowered to A warning chime will sound:
crawl mode. • If the driver selects electric park brake
Dynamic Response warning whilst the vehicle is moving.
A warning chime will sound: Starter key reminder
• If a fault with the Dynamic Response A warning will chime continuously:
system is detected. The chime will coincide • If the key is left in the starter switch while
with the suspension warning light flashing the driver's door is open. The chime stops
RED then turning solid after 2 minutes, as soon as the door is closed or the key is
with the following message in the message removed from the starter switch.
centre ‘SUSPENSION FAULT, STOP
The starter key reminder can be enabled
SAFELY, STOP ENGINE’. This indicates a
or disabled by a Land Rover
system fault that may result in serious
damage to vehicle components and
reduced Dynamic Response performance. Seat belt reminder
Stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits In some markets, a warning chime will sound
and switch off the engine. DO NOT (one second frequency):
CONTINUE DRIVING! seek qualified
• If the driver's seat belt has not been
assistance immediately.
fastened when the starter switch is turned
on. The chime operates in conjunction with
the seat belt warning indicator and sounds
for 6 seconds, or until the seat belt is
fastened (whichever occurs first).
If the seat belt remains unfastened, the chime
will sound at intervals of 15 seconds.
102
R
Audible Warnings
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System*
A warning chime will sound:
• Whenever the tyre pressure is very low in
one or more tyres.
• Whenever the vehicle speed increases from
0 to 60 km/h (38 mph) with more than one
tyre very low.
• Whenever a Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System or wheel sensor fault is detected.
103
L
Lamps and Indicators

EXTERIOR LAMPS
Lamps master switch
AUTO
AUTO
1 2 3
H6075G
The detent positions are:

1. Off
2 3 2. Front fog lamps*
1
4 3. Rear fog lamps
If front fog lamps are not fitted, the rear fog
AUTO lamps come on at the first pull of the switch.
Side lamps
The front and rear side lamps, along with
licence plate and side repeater lamps*,
illuminate when the lamps master switch is
turned to positions ‘2’ or ‘3’, regardless of the
H6073L position of the starter switch.
The rotary master switch has a maximum of Automatic control lamps*
four positions and three detent positions. If a With the rotary master switch in position ‘4’ and
vehicle is not fitted with all options, the number starter switch in position ‘II’, the side lamps,
of switch positions will be reduced accordingly. low beam headlamps and licence plate lamps
The positions are: will illuminate automatically when the ambient
1. Off light falls below a pre-defined level.
2. Side lamps All of the lamps will go out when the ambient
light rises above that level.
3. Low beam headlamps
4. Automatic control lamps*
104
R

High beam
AUTO
H6076G
With the rotary master lighting switch in

position ‘3’ and starter switch in position ‘ll’,
push the column lighting switch lever away
AUTO
from the steering wheel as far as it will go to
select high beam, and release it.
To cancel high beam, pull the lever towards the
steering wheel again and release it.
While high beam is selected, a blue indicator
will be illuminated in the instrument pack.
H6077L
Headlamp high beam flash With the headlamps turned on, rotate the
To flash the headlamps on high beam, pull the thumbwheel up or down to adjust the vertical
lever towards the steering wheel and release it. aim of the beams.
The blue indicator in the instrument pack
illuminates when the headlamps are flashed. SWITCH POSITIONS
0 Driver only or driver and front seat
Manual headlamp levelling* passenger.
This facility is to compensate for any uneven 0.5 All seats occupied in a 5-seat vehicle or
loading of the vehicle. If, for instance, the rear all seats in front and third rows for
is heavily laden, the resulting tilt of the vehicle 7-seat vehicle.
may bring the low headlamps beam up to a level 1 All seats occupied in a 7-seat vehicle.
unacceptable to other road users. 1.5 All seats occupied in a vehicle loaded to
its Gross Vehicle Weight.
2 Driver only in a vehicle loaded to its
Gross Vehicle Weight.
105
L

Headlamp beam adjustment - xenon Dimmer Control
Position of the lever will vary depending on type Rotate the dimmer control to vary the level of
of headlamps and side of vehicle. instrument pack illumination.
When touring in right-hand-drive countries, use
the beam adjustment mechanism located
within each headlamp unit to alter the beam
pattern accordingly.
When this is moved it enables the vehicle to be AUTO
driven in opposite-hand-drive markets without

having to stick blanking decals onto the
headlamp lens.
AUTO
H6079L
H6339G Headlamp courtesy delay

As a driver convenience feature the headlamps
Follow the process shown in HEADLAMP UNIT,
can be kept on for a short time after the vehicle
296 to gain access to the inside of the headlamp
is parked. Turn the starter switch off with the
unit. Move the lever to adjust the beam.
headlamps still switched on. The lamps master
Lever default position switch can be in positions ‘2’, or ‘3’. With the
switch in position ‘4’ the Headlamp delay works
Halogen Bi-Xenon in automatic mode.
Right hand Down Up Remove the key from the starter switch and
side lamp turn lamps master switch fully anticlockwise to
Left hand Up Up the Off position. The headlamps will remain
side lamp illuminated for up to 240 seconds. This
automatic time delay is configurable (see
SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 81).
106
R

The courtesy delay may be cancelled at any Front fog lamps*
time by turning the starter switch to position ‘l’
or ‘II’ or the lamps master switch from position WARNING
‘1’ to ‘2’. Fog lamps should ONLY be used when
visibility is severely restricted - as soon as
Note: If Automatic Control Lamps* are
conditions clear, switch off fog lamps to
switched on, the headlamp courtesy delay will
prevent dazzling of other road users.
operate automatically.
Headlamp courtesy delay can be With the lamps master switch in positions ‘2’ or
enabled or disabled by a Land Rover ‘3’, pull out the switch to its first-out position to
Dealer/Authorised Repairer or by the operate the front fog lamps.
driver.
An indicator will illuminate in the instrument
Cornering lamps* pack.
The cornering lamps produce an angled beam Rear fog guard lamps (with front fog lamps
on the relevant side of the vehicle at speeds fitted)
below 40 km/h (25 mph) when the headlamps
With the lamps master switch in positions ‘2’ or
are on and the turn indicator stalk is moved to
‘3’, pull out the switch to its fully extended
indicate a turn.
position.
Daytime running lamps* An indicator will illuminate in the instrument
In certain markets, with the engine running and pack.
the main lighting switch turned off, the front
Rear fog guard lamps (without front fog lamps
and rear side lamps, the licence plate lamps and
fitted)
the headlamp low beams will illuminate. The
instrument pack illumination remains off. With the lamps master switch in position ‘3’ ,
pull out the switch to its fully extended position.
Unless they are required or prohibited
by law, daytime running lamps can be An indicator will illuminate in the instrument
disabled/enabled by a Land Rover pack.
Dealer/Authorised Repairer. ALWAYS remember to switch the fog lamps off
Note: The following lamps operate only with as soon as visibility permits.
the starter switch in position ‘ll’.
Stop lamps
The stop lamps will illuminate when the brake
pedal is pressed and will remain on while the
brake pedal is pressed.
The stop lamps also illuminate when Hill
Descent Control is braking the vehicle or during
Electronic Parkbrake dynamic deceleration.
Reversing lamps
Selection of reverse gear will operate the
reversing lamps.
107
L

HAZARD WARNING LAMPS DIRECTION INDICATORS
1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
H6082G
With the starter switch in position ‘II’, the

H6081G left-hand steering column lever will operate the
direction indicators (a GREEN warning
indicator on the instrument pack will flash in
Press the switch to operate the hazard warning
time with the direction indicators).
lamps. All of the direction indicator lamps
(including the instrument pack warning Hold the lever partially up or down against
indicators and those fitted to a trailer) will flash spring pressure to indicate a lane change.
together. Bulb failure of any front or rear direction
Use ONLY in an emergency to warn other road indicator lamp (not side repeaters) will cause
users when your stationary vehicle is causing the instrument pack warning indicator to flash
an obstruction, or is in a hazardous situation. rapidly and the audible indicator signal to
Remember to switch off before moving away. double in speed.
108
R
Wipers and Washers

Wipers and Washers
OPERATING THE WIPERS AND WINDSCREEN WIPERS

WASHERS
The wipers and washers will only operate when 3
the starter switch is turned to position ‘I’ or ‘II’.
Note: 2
• DO NOT operate the wipers on a dry screen.
1
• In freezing or very hot conditions, ensure
that the blades are not stuck to the glass.
• In winter, remove any snow or ice from
around the arms and blades, including the
wiped area of the windscreen and the
heater air intakes. H6083G
Note: If the wiper blades have stuck to the
glass, an electronic cut-out may temporarily Intermittent variable delay
prevent the wiper motor from operating. If this Push the lever up to position ‘1’.
is the case, switch the wipers off and turn the
starter switch off. Clear the obstruction and try Normal speed wipe
again. Push the lever up to position ‘2’.
Semi-automatic operation of the wiper blades is Fast speed wipe
possible by setting the wiper lever to the rain Push the lever up to position ‘3’.
sensor variable delay* mode. In this mode, the
wipers operate only when the rain sensor Single wipe
detects moisture on windscreen and remain Pull the lever down and release immediately.
inactive whilst the screen is dry. Note: With the lever held down, the wipers will
operate at fast speed until the lever is released.
109
L
Wipers and Washers

Intermittent variable delay Rain sensor variable delay*
WARNING
BEFORE entering an automatic car wash,
ensure that the wipers are switched off-
otherwise, they could operate during the car
wash programme and be damaged.
H6084G
With the lever in position ‘1’, rotate the delay

switch clockwise to increase (a wipe will occur
immediately), and anticlockwise to decrease,
the frequency of the intermittent wipe.
Speed-dependant mode*
H6085G
When speed dependant mode is configured, the
operation of all wiper modes will be affected by The rain sensor is fitted to the inside of the
vehicle speed. windscreen, immediately ahead of the rear view
mirror. The sensor is able to detect varying
If the vehicle’s speed drops below 3 km/h
amounts of dirt or water on the outside of the
(2 mph) with the wipers operating, the wiper
screen.
frequency automatically reduces. The wipers
will switch to the next lowest operating speed. With the wiper switch in position ‘1’, the
When the vehicle’s speed increases to over variable delay automatically adjusts the
3 km/h (2 mph), the original wiper speed frequency of the wiper operation according to
setting is restored automatically. the information supplied by the rain sensor.
This setting can be configured by a Land You can increase (a wipe will occur
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer. immediately) or decrease the sensitivity of the
rain sensor, and therefore the frequency of
Speed-dependant-intermittent mode* wiper operation, by rotating the delay switch-
The frequency of intermittent variable delay is either clockwise or anticlockwise.
also adjusted automatically according to road If the sensor detects constant rain, the wipers
speed on those vehicles not equipped with a will operate continuously.
rain sensor.
Auto park
The intermittent period can be adjusted for each
of the speed-dependant modes by rotating the If the starter switch is turned to the Off position
delay switch either clockwise or anticlockwise. while the wipers are operating, they will
continue to the Park position and stop.
This setting can be configured by a Land
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
110
R
Wipers and Washers

FRONT WINDSCREEN WASHER HEADLAMP POWER WASH
If the headlamps are on, and there is sufficient
liquid in the washer reservoir, operating the
screen washer will also power-wash the
headlamps.
The headlamp power wash will operate on
every fifth operation of the screen washer,
provided that the headlamps are still switched
on and 10 minutes have elapsed since the last
headlamp wash.
H6086G Switching the headlamps off and back on again
will reset the cycle.
Push the wiper stalk button to operate the front
screen washer. If the button is pressed for more The headlamp wash will operate every third
than 0.5 seconds, the washer will continue to operation of the screen washer in all Special
operate while the button is pressed. When the Programs (see Terrain Response, 200).
button is released, the wipers will complete the Note: In the screen washer reservoir, if the fluid
current stroke and then complete two further level sensor detects a low level, the headlamp
strokes before parking automatically. power wash is inhibited.
If the button is pressed for less than 0.5
seconds, only the washer will operate. Heated washer jets
If the ambient temperature falls to a point where
icing of the washer jets could occur, power is
applied to heat the jets provided that the starter
switch is in position ‘II’.
An approved screenwash is necessary to
prevent freezing in very cold weather, see
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 307.
111
L
Wipers and Washers

REAR WINDOW WIPER If reverse gear is selected while the rain
AND WASHER sensor* is operational and the front windscreen
wipers are in use, the rear wiper will operate
accordingly.
‘Tailgate open’ disable
If the rear wiper is switched on or already
running and the tailgate is opened, the wiper
will:
• stop immediately
• not start to move if it is already stationary
1 If the tailgate is subsequently closed, the wiper
will resume its normal operation after a delay of
H6087G
2 three seconds.
If the tailgate is open and the vehicle’s speed is
Wiper - intermittent operation above 3 km/h (2 mph), the wiper will operate as
Pull the lever position ‘1’. The intermittent delay if the tailgate were closed.
period will vary according to the delay switch
setting and with the vehicle’s speed, if Auto park
speed-dependant-intermittent mode has been If the starter switch is turned to the Off position
enabled (see Speed-dependant-intermittent while the wiper is operating, it will continue to
mode*, 110). the Park position and stop.
Wiper - continuous operation

If preferred the rear wiper operation can be
configured by a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer to operate continuously.
Washer
Pull the lever to position ‘2’ and hold it there.
The wiper and washer will both operate. When
the lever is released, the washer will stop and
the wiper will complete a further two wipe
cycles and then return to intermittent operation,
provided that the continuous function has not
been set.
Reverse gear input
If reverse gear is selected while the front wipers
are operating, the rear wiper will operate
accordingly.
112
R
Horn
Horn
HORN
AUTO
H6088L
To operate, press either of the horn switches.
113
L
Electric Windows
Electric Windows
ELECTRIC WINDOWS WARNING

Closing of an electrically operated window on
fingers, hands or any vulnerable part of the
2 body, can result in serious injury. Always
4 observe the following precautions:
5
ISOLATE the rear window switches when
carrying children.
1 ENSURE that children are kept clear whilst

raising or lowering windows.
3 ENSURE that all adult passengers are familiar
with the controls and the potential dangers of
electrically operated windows.
DO NOT allow passengers to extend any part
of their bodies through a window aperture
while the vehicle is moving - injury from
flying debris, branches of trees or other
obstructions could occur.
It is recommended that the starter key be
removed when leaving the vehicle.
Operating the windows

H6090L
The electric windows can be operated when the
starter switch is at position ‘I’ or ‘II’ and for up
Switch operation to 40 seconds after the starter switch is turned
1. Right-hand front window. to position ‘0’ (provided a front door is not
2. Left-hand front window. opened).
3. Right-hand rear window. If a front door is opened, the windows become
inoperable.
4. Left-hand rear window.
Press lightly and hold the top of a switch to
5. Isolating switch for rear door window
lower the window and lift lightly and hold the
switches.
top of a switch to raise the window. The window
will stop moving as soon as the switch is
released.
‘One touch’ operation (driver’s door only)
By pressing firmly (and then releasing) the
switch, a window will open or close fully at a
single touch. Window movement can be
stopped at any time by BRIEFLY pressing the
switch again.
114
R
Electric Windows
To stop window movement during a Anti-trap mechanism (driver’s door only)
‘one-touch’ open or close operation, operate If the anti-trap sensor detects an obstruction
the switch in the opposite direction to which the during window closing, the closing operation is
window is travelling. interrupted and the window backs off.
Resetting ‘One touch’ operation This is a safety feature designed to prevent
Disconnecting the power when the window is inadvertent closing of a window on vulnerable
moving will cause memory loss. To reset the parts of the body or other obstructions.
memory, drive the window to the top and keep Remove any obstruction and then close the
the switch pressed for one second. window.
If, for any reason, it is required to override the
Rear window isolation switch
anti-trap mechanism the following procedure
should be used:
After the initial attempt to close the window,
attempt it twice more with less than 10 seconds
between switch presses.
On the next (fourth attempt) the window will
move up a short distance with increased force
to override the blockage.
If this fails to move the blockage the anti-trap
feature will be lost and must be reset, see
Resetting ‘One touch’ operation, 115.
H6093L
Press the right-hand side of the switch to

isolate the window switches in the rear doors;
press the left-hand side to restore independent
control.
115
L
Electric Windows
Rear window operation
H6092G
The rear windows can also be operated from

the switches on the rear passenger doors. The
rear door window switches will not operate if
the isolating switch in the driver’s door has
been activated, see Rear window isolation
switch, 115.
116
R
Sunroof
Sunroof
SUNROOF OPERATION • To close the roof: With the roof open or in

the tilt position, press the front of the
switch momentarily. If the starter key is not
in position ‘lI’, the switch will have to be
held pressed.
Note: At any time while the sunroof is moving,
a further press of the switch will stop the
movement.
Caution: ALWAYS close the roof when the
vehicle is unattended.
Anti-trap mechanism
If the roof encounters resistance while
travelling anywhere between the fully open and
the tilted positions, the closing operation is
interrupted and the roof opens slightly. This is
a safety feature designed to prevent inadvertent
closing of the roof on vulnerable parts of the
body or other obstructions. Remove any
obstruction and then close the roof.
This anti-trap feature does not apply while the
roof is closing from the tilted position.
WARNING
H6095L
It is possible to override the anti-trap
The electric sunroof can be operated when the mechanism by pressing and holding the front
starter switch is at positions ‘l’ or ‘II’ and for 40 of the switch whilst the roof is closing.
seconds after position ‘0’ has been selected, Extreme care must be taken to ensure that
provided that neither front door has been none of the vehicles occupants have any part
opened. of their body in a position where it can be
• To tilt the roof: With the roof closed, press trapped by the roof.
the front of the switch momentarily. The The override allows the roof to be closed
roof will move to its fully tilted position. If when movement is restricted by ice or dirt.
the starter key is not in position ‘II’, the
switch will have to be held pressed.
• To open the roof: With the roof in the tilted
or closed position, press the rear of the
switch momentarily. If the starter key is not
in position ‘II’, the switch will have to be
held pressed.
117
L
Sunroof
WARNING Front sunroof blind
Accidental closure of a sunroof on fingers,
hands or any vulnerable part of the body, can
result in serious personal injury. Always
observe the following precautions:
ENSURE that children are kept clear and that
the sunroof is not obstructed when opening or
closing.
ENSURE that all adult passengers are familiar
with the controls and the potential dangers of
operating an electrically operated sunroof.
DO NOT allow passengers to extend any part
of their bodies through the sunroof aperture H6097L
while the vehicle is moving - injury from Pull the sunroof blind, across the sunroof
flying debris, branches of trees or other aperture to open and close.
obstructions could occur.
Note: The sunroof blind can be opened and
closed manually, but will retract automatically
Operation after power supply interruption when the sunroof is opened, and will open
Under certain unusual circumstances, the roof slightly if the roof is tilted.
may lose its calibration which will render it
inoperable. If this happens, it needs to be
recalibrated as follows:
• WIth the power supply reconnected, turn
the ignition switch to position ‘ll’.
• Depress the front of the switch for 20
seconds. The sunroof will start to move.
Continue to hold the switch until the
sunroof completes one full open and
closing cycle. When the roof stops moving,
release the switch.
The sunroof can then be operated as normal.
Note: Calibration will not function if the battery
voltage is low.
118
R
Heating and Ventilation

TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
12 3 1 2 3 12
11
4 10
9
5 6 7 8
5
H6099G
The Air conditioning system features automatic OPERATION OF CONTROLS

temperature and air distribution control and is
programmed to maintain optimum levels of 1. Auto mode
comfort within the vehicle in all but the most Allowing the system to function automatically is
severe climatic conditions. by far the simplest method of operation for the
The configuration of controls may vary owner and is preferable in most operating
depending on the specification of your system. conditions.
The variants are shown as insets to the main • Press ‘AUTO’ ‘1’ for fully automatic
illustration. operation.
The system may be fitted with the options of • Rotate the temperature controls ‘3’ to
seat heating and front screen heating. select the required temperature.
Note: The indicators in the switches illuminate • Let the automatic temperature control
when that feature is operational. system do the rest.
In Auto mode, air conditioning, air distribution,
blower speeds and air recirculation are adjusted
automatically to achieve, and then maintain, a
thermal environment consistent with prevailing
conditions.
The air distribution and blower controls can be
operated independently to override the
automatic setting.
119
L

In this case, the appropriate indicator in the 4. Air distribution control
‘AUTO’ switch extinguishes. The circular Press to select the desired distribution setting:
indicator represents the blower, the rectangular
Windscreen and side window
indicator represents air distribution.
vents
Press ‘AUTO’ again to re-establish automatic
operation. Face level vents
Note: If the air distribution and blower controls
are operated independently, the system may Foot level vents
not be able to achieve or maintain the required
temperature settings.
2. Blower control More than one setting can be selected to
Rotate the blower control ‘2’ to adjust airflow achieve the desired distribution.
through the vents.
5. Air recirculation - manual
3. Temperature controls Press the button ‘5’ once to
Rotate the controls ‘3’ to set the required activate air recirculation. Press the
temperature for the corresponding side of the button a second time to deactivate
passenger compartment. air recirculation.
Temperatures within the range 16°C (60°F) to Air recirculation prohibits the entry of air from
28°C (83°F) can be set. The blue dot gives outside the vehicle, recirculating the air inside
maximum cooling and the red dot maximum the vehicle instead. This is useful to prevent the
heating (depending on prevailing conditions). entry of traffic fumes.
Note: Because of the mixing of air within the Air recirculation also significantly influences
vehicle, the system will not achieve a the dehumidifying and cooling performance of
temperature differential from left to right of the air-conditioning system.
more than 4°C (7°F). Note: Prolonged recirculation at low ambient
To obtain maximum air conditioning, rotate the temperatures may cause the windows to mist.
temperature controls fully anticlockwise.
6. Air recirculation - auto*
This mode automatically activates the air
Press the button ‘6’ once to
conditioning and air recirculation, and sets the
activate manual air recirculation.
blower speed at maximum and the air
Press the button a second time to
distribution to the face-level vents.
activate automatic air recirculation. Press the
Note: Rotating the temperature controls fully button a third time to switch the system off.
clockwise provides maximum heating to the
In Auto mode, air recirculation is regulated
foot/screen vents.
automatically to enable the air-conditioning
When in stationary traffic, select ‘P’ or ‘N’ in an system to achieve its optimum performance.
automatic transmission vehicle to maximise air
Air recirculation prohibits the entry of air from
conditioning efficiency.
outside the vehicle, recirculating the air inside
the vehicle instead. This is useful to prevent the
entry of traffic fumes.
120
R

Air recirculation also significantly influences 11. Defrost mode
the dehumidifying and cooling performance of If the windscreen is misting or
the air-conditioning system. In Auto mode, air covered in ice, press button ‘12’ to
recirculation is regulated automatically to activate the automatic defrost
enable the air-conditioning system to achieve programme; the system will immediately direct
its optimum performance. its output to achieve maximum screen clearing
Note: Prolonged recirculation at low ambient by:
temperatures may cause the windows to mist. • setting the blower speed to an appropriate
7. Off level.
Press to switch the system off; the • distributing air flow to the screen only.
indicator in the switch will • deactivating air recirculation (in certain
illuminate to show this condition. circumstances).
Pressing the button again returns the system to In addition, the rear and front* screen heaters
its previous mode. will be switched on (or their timed operating
8. Economy mode cycle will recommence if they are already
switched on).
With the engine running, press the
button ‘8’ to put the air Press the button a second time (or select
conditioning system into ‘AUTO’ or any air distribution control) to leave
‘Economy’ mode. This reduces the power the Defrost mode. Heated screens will remain
consumed by the system. on until their time-out period has expired.
9. Heated rear screen 12. Front seat heaters*

Press to operate. Press the left or right button once
to operate the relevant seat heater
Note: Heated front and rear screen
at a high level, press twice to heat
functions are only available while
the seat at a lower level. For further information
engine is running.
concerning the operation of both front and rear
WARNING seat heaters, please refer to SEAT HEATERS*,
DO NOT stick labels over the heating 123.
elements on the rear screen, and DO NOT Note: If the vehicle is not fitted with front seat
scrape or use abrasive materials to clean the heaters, these buttons will be blank.
inside of the rear screen.
10. Heated front screen*

Press to operate. If the vehicle is
not fitted with a heated front
screen, this button will be blank.
121
L

General Notes
• For optimum operating efficiency, ensure
all the air vents (including those in the rear
of the vehicle) are open.
• For the automatic temperature control
system to function efficiently, all windows
(and the sunroof) should be closed, and the
air intake vents free from ice, snow, leaves
or other debris.
• In very humid conditions, slight screen
misting may be experienced when the air
conditioning system is turned on. This is a
natural occurrence on most automotive air
conditioning systems. It is not a fault and
misting will clear after a few seconds once
the air conditioning system is operating.
• The air conditioning compressor will not
function unless the engine is running.
• Surplus water produced by the
dehumidifying process is expelled from the
system via drain tubes beneath the vehicle.
This may result in a small pool of water
forming on the road when the vehicle is
stationary and is not a cause for concern.
122
R

SEAT HEATERS* With the starter switch turned on, the seat
cushion and seat back can be heated at two
different levels.
• Press once to operate at a high level (both
indicators illuminate).
After a period based on cabin temperature,
the high level will end and one light will
extinguish.
• Press twice to heat the seats at a lower level
(right-hand indicator extinguishes).
AUTO
1
4
2
ABC
5
3
DEF
6
6CD-465
• Press the switch a third time to turn off the
heater manually (both indicators will
GHI JKL MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
extinguish).
The seat heaters are thermostatically controlled
and will operate to maintain a factory-set
H6101L
temperature. The indicators in the switches will
Front seat heaters remain illuminated until the heaters are
manually turned off, the high level has timed
out, or the engine is turned off.
Caution: The seat heaters consume
considerable power from the battery. For this
reason, they should ONLY be operated while
the engine is running.
H6104G
Rear seat heaters
123
L

VENTILATION
AUTO
1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
H6105L
The ventilation system provides fresh, Particulate Air Filter

conditioned and/or heated air to the interior of The ventilation system is fitted with a
the vehicle from the air intake grille in front of particulate air filter to remove most potentially
the windscreen. harmful particles such as pollen, industrial
Note: Always keep the air intake grille clear of fall-out and road dust from the air entering the
obstructions such as leaves, snow or ice. vehicle's interior.
Air outlets are provided to the windscreen, face, Combined Filter*
lap (driver only) and feet - the location of these Vehicles fitted with automatic temperature
vents is shown in the illustration above. The control have a combined carbon and particulate
temperature of the air supplied to the vents is air filter.
controlled by the heater.
The carbon layer reduces the level of odours
coming through the heater system from
outside.
124
R

Air Vents Driver’s Lap Vent
Air temperature from all vents is controlled by
the temperature settings of the heater.
Face level vents
H6108L
H6107G
Airflow can be directed to the driver’s lap via an
Direct the air flow by moving the control in the outlet located below the steering wheel. Control
centre of the louvres. Rotate the thumbwheel the airflow by adjusting the louvres.
towards the right to fully open, or the left to fully
close the vents.
To ensure best ventilation and minimum noise,
the vents should be fully open when the air
distribution control is set to face level.
125
L

Centre console rear vent controls
H6110G
Move the louvres to adjust the direction and
volume of airflow. Rotate the bezel to direct the
air flow.
Note: The temperature cannot be set by thr
occupants.
126
R
Interior lamps
Interior lamps
LAMP TYPES Automatic activation

The vehicle’s interior lighting falls into two All of the courtesy lighting comes on when:
categories: • The position of the starter switch is
• Courtesy lighting consists of approach changed to ‘0’, from ‘I’ or ‘II’.
lamps*, dome lamps, footwell lamps, • Any door, including the upper tailgate is
puddle lamps, starter switch glow ring and ajar.
loadspace lamps. They enable safe entry • The vehicle receives an Unlock signal.
into, or exit from the vehicle in low light
conditions without the need to switch on • Row 1 dome lamp button is pressed.
individual lamps. The courtesy lamp feature automatically turns
• Demand lighting consists of interior lamps, off these lamps if:
dome lamps, map lamps, glovebox and • 60 seconds (customer adjustable) have
vanity mirror lamps. They offer lighting at elapsed since the courtesy lamps were
the touch of a switch, usually part of the activated.
lamp fitting. • 60 seconds (customer adjustable) have
Courtesy lighting elapsed since the last door was closed.
Front footwell lamps* • the starter switch is switched to ‘II’ with all
doors closed.
These illuminate the front footwell areas of the
vehicle. • the last door is closed after the car is
externally locked.
Starter switch glow ring
A battery-saving feature turns off all interior
This surrounds and illuminates the starter key
lamps 15 minutes after the starter switch has
slot.
been turned from ‘II’ or ‘I’ to ‘0’. This timing
Loadspace lamp feature will be restarted if any of the automatic
These illuminate the rear loadspace area during switch-on criteria occur.
entry to and exit from the vehicle, also when the Collision illumination
tailgate is opened.
In the event of a collision occurring at a speed
of less than 5 km/h (3 mph), all of the courtesy
lamps (except approach lamps) will be turned
on.
127
L
Interior lamps
Interior lamps Rear interior lamps
H6111G
H6112G
The front interior lamps are grouped together
centrally above the front windscreen. Dome lamps
Any of the interior lamps can be switched on or The dome lamps (centre) are both courtesy and
off by pressing the switch adjacent to the lamp demand lamps. Pressing the centre front
required. switch brings on both front and rear dome
It is possible to de-activate the courtesy lamps lamps, regardless of starter switch position.
automatic mode by pressing the centre switch. Map lamp operation
The message ‘INTERIOR LIGHTS OFF’ will flash
Press the required map lamp switch (outer
in the Message Centre.
lamps) to turn on and off.
To switch the lamps off without disabling
automatic mode briefly press the centre switch. Glovebox lamp
To enable automatic mode press the front Illuminates automatically whenever the
centre switch for more than three seconds. The glovebox is opened and extinguishes when the
message ‘INTERIOR LIGHTS AUTOMATIC ’ will glovebox is closed.
flash in the Message Centre.
128
R
Interior lamps
Vanity mirror lamps*
The vanity mirror lamps are turned on when the
corresponding vanity mirror cover is opened
and turned off when it is closed.
H6113G
Pivot the sun visor downward and raise the

cover on the vanity mirror to illuminate the
mirror. Close the cover to extinguish the lamps.
Note: Map lamps, glovebox lamps and vanity
mirror lamps will extinguish automatically after
15 minutes to prevent battery drain provided
that the starter switch is in position ‘0’.
Low-level Night-time Illumination*
With the main lighting switch turned to
sidelamps or headlamps, LEDs in the front
interior lamps provides very low level
illumination. The level of illumination can be
adjusted using the instrument pack illumination
dimmer switch.
Low level lighting provides very limited
illumination for the interior of the vehicle, whilst
the vehicle is being driven, without affecting the
driver’s night vision.
129
L
Interior Equipment
Interior Equipment
130
R
Interior Equipment
CLOCK To adjust the time:
1. Switch on the radio and press the ‘MENU’
Setting the time
button.
1 2. Rotate the rotary control clockwise until the

word ‘Clock’ appears. Press the control
again.
3. Rotate the control and then press it to
select the 12 or 24 hour scale or to ‘Set’ the
time.
2 4. After selecting ‘Set’ the display shows the
News hour setting. Rotate the control to change
Clock
the hour setting, or press it to accept it.
1 2 3 4 5 6
5. The display then shows the minute setting.

3 Rotate the control to change the minute
12 24 setting, or press it to accept it.
Note: The clock will remain illuminated for ten
Time minutes after the starter key is turned to
12/24 12 position ‘0’.
1 2 3 4 5 6
4
09
Time
Set AM 09
1 2 3 4 5 6
5
32
Time
Set AM 09 32
1 2 3 4 5 6
H6116G
131
L
Interior Equipment
SMOKERS’ EQUIPMENT Ashtrays*
To remove the ashtray, open fully, then pull the
Cigar Lighter*
ashtray upwards.
WARNING
DO NOT use the ashtrays for disposing of
waste paper or other combustible items.
H6117L
With the starter switch turned on, press the

lighter in to heat up. When it has reached the
correct temperature it will partially eject and
can then be withdrawn for use.
• ONLY hold the cigar lighter by the handle.
After use, push the lighter back in to the first
position.
132
R
Interior Equipment
REAR AUXILIARY POWER SOCKETS Loadspace auxiliary power socket
H6121G H6122G
Another power socket is located on the rear A third power socket is fitted in the
face of the cubby box. left-hand-side trim in the loadspace area.
Using a power socket
The power sockets can be used to power Land
Rover approved accessories that use a
maximum of 180 Watts.
Always run the engine during prolonged use of
electrical accessories, otherwise the battery
may become discharged.
Caution: NEVER plug non-approved
accessories into a power socket - damage to
the vehicle's electrical systems could occur.
Always run the engine during prolonged use
of electrical accessories, otherwise the
battery may become discharged.
133
L
Interior Equipment
CUP HOLDERS Second-row seats cup holders
Front seat cup holders*
H6367L
H6127G
The cup holders for the occupants of the

second-row seats are in the centre console. Pull
out the tray to gain access to the cup holders.
Press in again to close.
H6123L The inner cores of the cup holders can be lifted
The inner core of the front passenger’s cup out for cleaning or to make a holder for a larger
holder can be lifted out for cleaning or to make drinks container.
a holder for a larger drinks container.
134
R
Interior Equipment
WARNING
The driver should not drink and should not use
the cup holder while driving.
If the cup holder is retractable, it should be
kept closed when not in use.
Do not carry open-top drink containers in the
cup holders while the vehicle is in motion; a
spilled hot drink could cause personal injury.
Spilled drinks can also damage upholstery,
carpeting and electrical components.
Use only for soft containers. DO NOT use to
hold cups made of glass, china or hard
plastic, as these may cause injury in the event
of an accident or emergency manoeuvre.
Unopened, sealed containers (drinks cans,
for example) are hard objects and may also
cause injury.
135
L
Interior Equipment
CUBBY BOX On the front inside face of the cubby box is a
feature to hold a credit/toll card.
CD Storage
H6131L
Lift the catch at the front of the cubby box lid to

access the main cubby box.
Card Holder*
H6132L
A rubber mat in the bottom of the cubby box is

designed to hold CD cases and is removable for
cleaning.
H6133L
136
R
Interior Equipment
COOL BOX* The tray on top of the cool box should always
When fitted, the cool box replaces the cubby be in place to ensure maximum cooling
box. performance. This tray can be inverted to allow
for the storage of taller bottles while still
The cool box is switched on/off using the maintaining the sealing.
switch on the inside front lip of the cool box.
This switch has a built-in indicator which will The tray can be clipped onto the inside of the
illuminate to show that the cool box is main lid when not required.
operating. There is a short delay (1-2 seconds) The cool box is most effective when filled with
between pressing the switch, and illumination cold or pre-chilled items.
of the indicator. During this period the control The cool box must be cleaned regularly to
system checks the battery voltage. remove any condensation or contamination
If the indicator does not illuminate when the that could lead to odours.
cool box is switched on, or it goes out while the Note: The cool box will continue to operate for
cool box is operating, this means that the a short period after the starter switch is turned
battery voltage is low and the cool box has to position ‘0’.
switched itself off. This will only happen when
the engine is not running.
If the engine is started, the indicator will
illuminate and the cool box will continue to
operate.
The cool box should be left switched off when it
is not needed to protect the vehicle’s battery.
H6135G
H6134G
137
L
Interior Equipment
SUN VISOR TICKET HOLDER
H6136L
Pivot the sun visor downward to reduce sun

glare through the front windscreen. If required,
the visor can then be pivoted towards the side
window to reduce sun glare from that side of
the vehicle.
Vanity Mirror*
Lifting the cover of the vanity mirror switches
H6138L
on the lamp; closing the cover switches off the
lamp. At the lower edge of each side of the
windscreen is a clip to retain a car park ticket.
138
R
Interior Equipment
REAR-VIEW MIRRORS Manual rear-view mirror*
Auto-dim rear-view mirror*
H6142L
H6140L
Adjust the mirror manually to suit.
On some models, the vehicle is equipped with
Moving the lever at the bottom of the mirror
an electrochromatic dimming function that
forwards or backwards changes the mirror’s
‘dims’ the mirrors to reduce glare from the
position to and from dimmed.
headlamps of following vehicles at night.
This function does not operate when reverse
gear has been selected.
139
L
Interior Equipment
GLOVEBOX
H6149L
H6147L
Pull the release catch to open the lower
Lift the release catch to open the upper glovebox. Close the lid by pushing it until it
glovebox. The lid will naturally be returned by a clicks.
spring to its closed position. It should be
pushed fully closed.
140
R
Interior Equipment
CD storage* CD storage removal
If the optional cool box has been specified a CD

storage rack is available for the glove box.
H6379L
The rack can be removed by pressing down the

lock tab, and pulling the rack out of the glove
box.
141
L
Interior Equipment
LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS
H6151G
Four fixing points are provided in the rear

loadspace floor, to assist in safely securing
large items of luggage. Land Rover provide a
range of approved luggage retention
accessories.
WARNING
DO NOT carry unsecured equipment, tools or
luggage, which could move and cause
personal injury in the event of an accident or
emergency manoeuvre either on or off-road.
142
R
Loadspace Cover
Loadspace Cover
LOADSPACE COVER To operate the loadspace cover

1. Pull the rigid portion of the blind to unroll
the cover.
2. Engage the end pieces into the recessed
features moulded into the loadspace sides.
Caution: When retracting the cover ensure
that nothing is left on top. If any items a left
on top, including paper or fabrics, they may
be drawn into the mechanism and cause it to
jam.
Caution: If the cover is damaged in any way it
should not be used as the damaged area may
prevent the cover from operating correctly.
H6153G
The loadspace cover is a tray unit with a

roller-blind type of cover which can be
extended to cover the rear loadspace.
143
L
Loadspace Cover
To remove the deployed loadspace cover WARNING
When fitting the loadspace cover position
ensure that the location pegs on the left hand
side are fully engaged and the release button
on the right hand side has returned fully home
to ensure engagement. Failure to do so may
allow the cartridge to move when the vehicle
is in motion.
H6155G
1. Disengage the ends from the recess and

fully retract the cover into the cassette unit.
2. Push the release button on the right hand
side of the cassette housing and lift to
release the right hand side of the cassette
from the loadspace trim.
3. Manoeuvre the complete loadspace cover
to the right hand side to release the left
hand side location pegs and extract from
the vehicle.
4. Installation of the loadspace cover is the
reverse of the removal procedure above.
144
R
Audio System
Audio System
RADIO AERIAL 1. Audio Mode switch

The aerial is etched onto the surface of the glass Press to change audio modes (radio to CD for
of the left-hand rear side window. example).
No maintenance is possible; however it is 2. Volume increase control
important to ensure that the interior surface of Press to increase volume.
the glass is protected from possible damage
caused by contact with hard objects or from the 3. Volume decrease control
injurious effects of abrasive cleaners. Press to decrease volume.
AUDIO REMOTE CONTROLS* 4. Search forward/track select control

Press to change to the next radio station on the
selected waveband.
During CD play, press the control to move
forward to the beginning of the next track.
Operate the control repeatedly to move
1 forwards through several tracks at a time.
5. Search backward/track select control
2
Press to change to the previous radio station on
3
the selected waveband.
4 During CD play, press the control to move
5 backward to the beginning of the current track
on the disc. Operate the control repeatedly to
move backwards through several tracks at a
time.
AUTO
H6156L
145
L
Audio System
REAR AUDIO CONTROLS*
Audio system controls are available to the rear
seat passengers.
2 5 7
3 4 6
H6158G
1. Head phone jack.

2. Pre-set / Disc select.
3. Mode.
4. Seek down.
5. Seek up.
6. Volume decrease.
7. Volume increase.
Adjustments can only be made to parts of the
audio system not already controlled by the
main audio source, e.g., if the radio is selected
on the main audio source, a CD can also be
played and controlled by a passenger in the rear
seats.
146
R
In-Car Telephones
In-Car Telephones
IN-CAR TELEPHONES*
For your safety, always note the following
precautions before fitting an in-car telephone,
or any mobile communication equipment.
• Only use an installation kit incorporating an
aerial external to the vehicle.
• Ensure that the installation is carried out by
a competent installer and that the installer
is aware of the Airbag SRS System.
For your safety
WARNING
Using any hand-held appliance while driving
can be dangerous. Always stop the vehicle
before making a call and ensure that the
telephone is switched off while you are
driving.
147
L
Voice Recognition
Voice Recognition
VOICE RECOGNITION* Activating the system

Voice control provides a safe and convenient
way of operating the audio system without the
need to operate the controls manually. This
enables you to concentrate fully on driving the
vehicle, and removes the need to divert your
attention from the road ahead in order to
change settings, or receive feedback from the
system.
A number of voice commands are available, and
with a little experience you will find them easy
and convenient to use. Whenever you issue one
of the defined commands with the system
active, the voice control system converts your
command into a control signal for the audio
system. Your inputs take the form of dialogues
or commands. You are guided through these AUTO
dialogues by announcements or questions.
H6159L
To activate voice control:

• Briefly pull the control paddle (your Audio
will mute at this point). A brief acoustic
signal will be heard, and ‘LISTENING’ will
be displayed on the main message centre
to indicate that the system is now waiting
for a voice command.
Note: It is only necessary to use the steering
wheel voice control paddle at the beginning of
each voice session.
148
R
Voice Recognition
Defined voice commands
The voice control system understands
predefined commands which need to be quoted
word for word.
An audio feedback of voice commands is
available. To activate the feedback, pull the
voice control paddle briefly and give one of the
following commands:
General commands
• Voice help To list all commands.
• Notepad Help To list Notepad commands.
Audio commands
• Radio help To list Radio commands.
• CD help To list CD commands.
Please refer to the Audio System Handbook
for full operating instructions.
Navigation & Telephone commands
• Phone help To list telephone commands.
• Navigation help To list Navigation
commands.
Please refer to the Navigation, TV &
Telephone Handbook for full operating
instructions.
149
L
Voice Recognition
Using Notepad Pull the voice paddle towards the steering
Notepad is a feature for recording short wheel, wait for ‘LISTENING’ to appear in the
messages as memory aids or reminders. message centre, then give the Notepad
command.
You can record up to 10 notes for up to 30
seconds each in length. The voice recording will automatically be
stopped if the note is longer than 30 seconds.
To stop voice recording at any time, pull the
voice button towards the steering wheel.
Command System response Action

Record note or Notepad The system gives a beep to You may start your recording
record. indicate the start of recording. after the beep. To stop
recording, pull and hold in the
steering wheel voice paddle.
Play notepad or Read notepad. Notepad audio will read out Saying Replay will replay the
each note in turn. You can say previous message.
Replay, Delete or Cancel after Saying Delete will delete the
each beep, or remain silent to previous message.
hear the next note. Saying Cancel will end the
Notepad session.
Clear Notepad or Notepad Do you want to clear the Say YES to delete all stored
delete. notepad? notes. Say NO to cancel the
command.
Notepad help. The system will read out
Notepad information and all
the commonly used
commands.
150
R
Starting and Driving

Driving and Operating
STEERING COLUMN LOCK Caution: On vehicles with automatic

transmission, the gear selector MUST be in
the ‘P’ (park) position, before the starter key
can be removed. If the starter key is left in
place, a continuous battery drain occurs
which could completely discharge the
AUTO
battery.
WARNING
Once the steering lock is engaged, it is
impossible to steer the vehicle. DO NOT
remove the key while the vehicle is in motion.
H6161L
The starter switch and steering column lock are

located in the side of the steering column cover.
To unlock the steering column
Insert the key into the starter switch and rotate
key to position ‘l’. If the key will not rotate, turn
the steering wheel left or right while rotating the
key.
To lock the steering column
Remove the key from the starter switch.
The lock is now set to operate. Rotate the
steering wheel until the lock operates.
151
L

STARTER SWITCH STARTING - Petrol models
The starter switch uses the following sequence
WARNING
of key positions to operate the steering lock,
Never start or leave the engine running in an
electrical circuits and starter motor:
unventilated building - exhaust gases are
Position ‘0’ poisonous and contain carbon monoxide,
• Steering locked. which can cause unconsciousness and may
even be fatal.
• Some lighting circuits are operational,
including: sidelamps and hazard warning
Before starting the engine and driving, ENSURE
lamps.
that you are familiar with the precautions
• With the driver’s door open, seat memory shown under CATALYTIC CONVERTER, 157.
facility operational.
In particular, you should be aware that if the
Position ‘I’ engine fails to start, continued use of the starter
• Steering unlocked. may result in unburnt fuel damaging the
catalytic converter.
• Clock, audio system and cigar lighter can
now be operated. 1. Check that the parkbrake is applied and that
the gear selector on automatic
• Wipers/washers are operational. transmission vehicles is in the ‘P’ (Park) or
Position ‘II’ ‘N’ (Neutral) position.
• All instruments, warning indicators and 2. Switch off all unnecessary electrical
electrical circuits are operational. equipment.
3. Turn the starter switch to position ‘II’ and
Position ‘III’
then on to position ‘III’ and immediately
• The starting sequence is initiated. Note that release it. The starter will automatically
operation of position ‘I’ electrical functions switch off when the engine starts. DO NOT
will be interrupted during engine cranking. press the accelerator pedal while starting.
Note: On vehicles with automatic transmission, Note: The battery charging and oil pressure
the gear selector position ‘P’ or ‘N’ must be warning lights should extinguish as soon as the
selected before the engine can be started. engine is running.
Cold climates
In very cold climates the oil pressure warning
light may take several seconds to extinguish.
Similarly, engine cranking times will also
increase. At -25°C (-13°F) the starter motor
may require continuous operation for as long
as 30 seconds before the engine will start. For
this reason, ensure that all non-essential
electrical equipment is switched off to
maximise the available battery effort for
starting.
152
R

After starting STARTING - Diesel models
On automatic transmission vehicles ensure that
the parkbrake AND FOOTBRAKE are firmly WARNING
applied and the accelerator pedal is not Never start or leave the engine running in an
depressed while moving the gear selector lever unventilated building - exhaust gases are
from ‘N’ or ‘P’. An interlock will prevent this poisonous.
movement if the footbrake is not applied.
Before starting the engine and driving, ENSURE
that you are familiar with the precautions
shown under CATALYTIC CONVERTER, 157.
1. Check that the parkbrake is applied and that
the gear selector on automatic
transmission vehicles is in the ‘P’ (Park) or
‘N’ (Neutral) position.
2. Switch off all non-essential electrical
equipment.
3. Insert the starter key and turn the switch to
position ‘II’. Wait until the glow plug
warning light extinguishes.
4. Turn the key to position ‘III’ and
immediately release it. The starter will
automatically switch off when the engine
starts. DO NOT press the accelerator pedal
while starting.
Note: The waiting time will vary according to
the engine coolant temperature (when the
engine is hot, the glow plug warning light will
extinguish almost immediately, or may not
illuminate at all).
Note: Continued use of the starter will not only
discharge the battery, but may cause damage to
the starter motor.
In temperate climates DO NOT operate the
starter for longer than 10 seconds. If the engine
fails to start, switch off and wait 10 seconds
before re-using the starter.
Note: The battery charging and oil pressure
warning lights should extinguish as soon as the
engine is running.
153
L

WARNING DRIVING
The diesel engine must not be run above idle Vehicle stability
speed until the oil pressure warning light
extinguishes. This will ensure that the engine WARNING
and turbo-charger bearings are properly Your vehicle has a higher ground clearance
lubricated before being run at speed. and, hence, a higher centre of gravity than
Similarly, ALWAYS allow the engine to idle ordinary passenger cars to enable the vehicle
for 10 seconds before switching off. to perform in a wide variety of different
off-road applications. An advantage of the
higher ground clearance is a better view of
Cold climates
the road, allowing the driver to more easily
In very cold climates the oil pressure warning anticipate problems. Inexperienced drivers
light may take several seconds to extinguish. should take additional care, remembering
Similarly, engine cranking times will also that your vehicle is not designed for cornering
increase. At -25°C (-13°F) the starter motor at the same speeds as conventional
may require continuous operation for as long passenger cars, any more than a low-slung
as 30 seconds before the engine will start. For sports car is designed to perform
this reason, ensure that all non-essential satisfactorily in off-road conditions. As with
electrical equipment is switched off to other vehicles of this type, failure to operate
maximise the available battery effort for your vehicle correctly may result in loss of
starting. control or even vehicle rollover.
After starting
On automatic transmission vehicles ensure that Vehicle height
the parkbrake AND FOOTBRAKE are firmly Caution: The overall height of your vehicle
applied and the accelerator pedal is not exceeds that of ordinary passenger cars, see
depressed while moving the gear selector lever DIMENSIONS, 317. Always be aware of the
from ‘N’ or ‘P’. An interlock will prevent this height of your vehicle and check the available
movement if the footbrake is not applied. headroom before driving through low
entrances. This is particularly important if the
vehicle is fitted with a roof rack or if the
sunroof is tilted open.
Instruments and warning indicators
Before driving it is important to fully
understand the function of the instruments and
warning indicators (see INSTRUMENT PACK,
79).
154
R

Caution: Red warning indicators are of FUEL ECONOMY
particular importance, their illumination Fuel consumption is influenced by two major
indicating that a fault exists. If a red light factors:
illuminates, always stop the vehicle and seek
qualified assistance before continuing. • How your vehicle is maintained.
In the case of the parkbrake, the above only • How you drive your vehicle.
applies if the vehicle is moving when the To obtain optimum fuel economy, it is essential
indicator illuminates. that your vehicle is maintained in accordance
with the manufacturer's service schedule.
Warming-up
Items such as the condition of the air cleaner
DO NOT warm-up the engine by allowing it to
element, tyre pressures and wheel alignment
idle at a slow speed.
can significantly affect fuel consumption. But,
In the interests of fuel economy and of reducing above all, the way in which you drive is most
engine wear, it is advisable to drive the vehicle important. The following hints may help you to
straight away, remembering that harsh obtain better value from your motoring:
acceleration and labouring the engine before
• Avoid unnecessary, short, start-stop
the normal operating temperature has been
journeys.
reached can damage the engine.
• Avoid fast starts by accelerating gently and
Running-in smoothly from rest.
Proper running-in will have a direct bearing on • Do not drive in the lower gears for longer
the reliability and smooth running of your than necessary (in Manual mode).
vehicle throughout its life.
• Decelerate gently and avoid sudden and
In particular, the engine, gearbox, brakes and heavy braking.
tyres need time to ‘bed-in’ and adjust to the
• Anticipate obstructions and adjust your
demands of everyday motoring. During the first
speed accordingly well in advance.
800 km (500 miles), it is essential to drive with
consideration for the running-in process and • When stationary in traffic, select neutral
heed the following advice: (‘N’) in automatic gearbox vehicles to
improve fuel economy and air conditioning
• LIMIT maximum road speed to 110 km/h
performance.
(68 mph) or 3,000 rev/min. Initially, drive
the vehicle on a light throttle and only
increase engine speeds gradually once the
running-in distance has been completed.
• DO NOT operate at full throttle or allow the
engine to labour in any gear. It is advisable
NOT to use Sport Mode when running in.
• AVOID fast acceleration and heavy braking
except in emergencies.
155
L

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING
Exhaust fumes contain poisonous substances
and inhalation can cause unconsciousness
and may even be fatal.
• DO NOT drive with the tailgate open.
• DO NOT modify the exhaust system from
the original design.
• ALWAYS have exhaust system leaks
repaired immediately.
• If you think exhaust fumes are entering
the vehicle, have the cause determined
and corrected immediately.
Land Rover vehicles are fitted with emission

and evaporative control equipment necessary
to meet a number of territorial requirements.
In many countries it is against the law for
vehicle owners to modify or tamper with
emission control equipment, or to sanction the
unauthorised replacement or modification of
this equipment. In such cases the vehicle owner
and the repairer may both be liable for legal
penalties.
It is important to remember that all Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer are properly
equipped to perform repairs and to maintain the
emission control system on your vehicle.
156
R
Catalytic Converter
Catalytic Converter
CATALYTIC CONVERTER • NEVER allow the vehicle to run out of fuel

The exhaust system incorporates a catalytic (the resultant misfire could damage the
converter, which converts most harmful catalyst).
exhaust emissions from the engine into • Consult your Land Rover
environmentally less harmful gases. Dealer/Authorised Repairer if your vehicle
It can not, however, remove all harmful exhaust is burning excessive oil (blue smoke from
emissions. the exhaust), as this will progressively
reduce catalyst efficiency.
Caution: Catalytic converters can be easily
damaged through improper use, particularly • On rough terrain do not allow the underside
if the wrong fuel is used, or if an engine of the vehicle to be subjected to heavy
misfire occurs. For this reason it is VERY impacts which could damage the catalytic
IMPORTANT that you heed the precautions converter.
which follow. • DO NOT overload or excessively ‘rev’ the
engine.
Fuel
• DO NOT switch off the engine when the
ONLY use fuel recommended for your vehicle.
vehicle is in motion with a drive gear
Starting the engine selected.
• DO NOT continue to operate the starter WARNING
after a few failed attempts (unburnt fuel Exhaust system temperatures can be
may be drawn into the exhaust system, extremely high - DO NOT park on ground
thereby poisoning the catalyst), and do not where combustible materials such as dry
attempt to clear a misfire by pressing the grass or leaves could come into contact with
accelerator pedal - seek qualified the exhaust system - in dry weather a fire
assistance. could result.
• When starting the engine, DO NOT drive if
a misfire is suspected and do not attempt Vehicle maintenance
to clear a misfire by pressing the
accelerator - seek qualified assistance. • It is vital that unqualified persons do not
tamper with the engine, and that regular
• Do not attempt to push or tow-start the systematic maintenance is carried out by a
vehicle. Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
Driving • DO NOT run the engine with a spark plug or
• If a misfire is suspected, or the vehicle HT lead removed, or use any device that
lacks power while driving, provided the requires an insert into a spark plug.
engine has reached its normal operating
temperature, it may be driven SLOWLY (at
risk of catalyst damage) to a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for assistance.
157
L
Fuel Filling
Fuel Filling
SAFETY ON THE FORECOURT FUEL FILLER

The fuel filler is located behind the rear
WARNING
right-hand wheel arch. An arrow on the fuel
Petroleum gases are highly inflammable and,
gauge points to that side of the vehicle.
in confined spaces, are also extremely
explosive.
Always take sensible precautions when

refuelling:
• Switch off the engine.
• Switch off mobile phones.
• Do not smoke or use a naked flame or light.
• Take care not to spill fuel.
• Do not overfill the tank.
H6163G
158
R
Fuel Filling
With the vehicle fully unlocked (all doors and
tailgate), press the left side of the fuel filler flap
to open (shown in inset).
1 2
H6166G
Insert the pump nozzle (1) into the filler neck,

pushing aside the spring-loaded cover (2).
When delivery is complete, withdraw the nozzle
and replace the cap. Tighten the cap clockwise
H6164G until you hear it click three times.
The fuel filler flap springs out revealing the filler Caution: When replacing the fuel filler cap
cap. ensure that it is tightened until it ‘clicks’.
Failure to do so may result in the engine
warning light illuminating due to evaporative
emission levels increasing.
H6165G
Unscrew the filler cap and place it on the

projection on top of the hinge of the fuel filler
flap.
159
L
Fuel Filling
TYPE OF FUEL Fuel specification - diesel engines
Caution: This vehicle is NOT compatible with
Fuel specification - petrol engines
‘Bio-diesel’ fuel.
Caution: On petrol engine vehicles fitted with
See ENGINES, 310
a catalytic converter, serious damage to the
catalyst will occur if LEADED fuel is used! The quality of diesel fuel (Derv) can vary in
different countries and only clean, good quality
See ENGINES, 310
fuel should be used. It is important that the
The RON value (octane rating) and type of sulphur content of diesel fuel does not exceed
petroleum available at garage forecourts will 0.3%. In Europe all supplies should be within
vary in different parts of the world. this limit, but in other parts of the world, you
During manufacture, engines are tuned to suit should check with your supplier.
the fuel supplies commonly available in the In markets where the sulphur content exceeds
country for which the vehicle is destined. 0.3%, more frequent engine oil and filter
However, if a vehicle is later exported to a changes will be required.
different country, or is used to travel between
Caution: If the fuel tank is accidentally filled
different territories, the owner should be aware
with petrol, it is ESSENTIAL that you contact
that the available fuel supplies may not be
your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer
compatible with the engine specification.
BEFORE attempting to start the engine!
Your engine will run on a lower grade of fuel but
performance and fuel economy will be reduced.
Using petrol with a lower octane rating than 91
RON, however, can cause persistent, heavy
‘engine knock’ (a metallic rapping noise). If
severe, this can lead to engine damage.
If in doubt, seek advice from the territory
concerned.
If heavy engine knock is detected when using
the recommended octane rated fuel, or if steady
engine knocking is present while maintaining a
steady speed on level roads, contact your Land
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer for advice.
Note: An occasional, light, engine knock while
accelerating or climbing hills is acceptable.
160
R
Fuel Filling
FUEL FILLING FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM
In the event of an accident, the Supplementary
WARNING
Restraint System (airbag system) may stop the
DO NOT attempt to fill the tank beyond its
operation of the fuel pump, depending on the
maximum capacity. If the vehicle is to be
severity and type of the impact.
parked on a slope, in direct sunlight, or high
ambient temperature, expansion of the fuel If this happens, the system must be reset
could cause spillage. before attempting to restart the engine.
Resetting the Fuel Cut-off System
Filling station pumps are equipped with
automatic cut-off sensing to avoid fuel spillage. WARNING
Fill the tank until the filler nozzle automatically To avoid the possibility of fire or personal
cuts-off the supply. DO NOT attempt to fill the injury, do not reset the Fuel Cut-off System if
tank beyond this point. you see or smell fuel.
Diesel engine vehicles
If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the system as
The use of commercial vehicle diesel pumps follows:
with a higher fill rate, may result in premature
1. Turn the ignition switch to position ‘0’ and
pump cut-off and fuel spillage.
wait for 1 minute.
EMPTY FUEL TANK 2. Turn the ignition switch to position ‘ll’ and
Caution: DO NOT RUN THE FUEL TANK DRY. wait for 30 seconds.
Running the fuel tank dry could create an 3. Make a further check for fuel leaks.
engine misfire capable of damaging the 4. If no leak is found, start the engine as
engine, the catalytic converter or the fuel normal.
pump.
Note: Should the vehicle run out of fuel, it will
be necessary to add a minimum of 4 litres (0.8
gallons) of fuel in order to restart the vehicle. In
some circumstances it will be necessary to
drive a short distance, typically 1.6 - 5
kilometers (1 - 3 miles) in order for the vehicles
monitoring systems to register the additional
fuel.
161
L
Park Distance Control

USING PARK DISTANCE The vehicle is fitted with four ultrasonic sensors
CONTROL (PDC)* on each of the bumpers. (Some vehicles are
fitted with sensors only in the rear bumpers.)
The range of the front sensors, and the two
sensors on the corners of the rear bumper is
approximately 0.6 metres (2 feet). The two
centre rear sensors have a range of
approximately 1.5 metres (5 feet).
Caution: Keep the sensors free from dirt, ice
and snow. If deposits build up on the surface
of the sensors, their performance may be
impaired. When washing the vehicle, avoid
aiming high pressure jets directly at the
sensors at close range.
PDC in operation
WARNING
PDC is automatically switched off at the rear
when a trailer is attached to the vehicle.
The distance from an obstruction is identified

by an intermittent tone sounding (higher pitch
for the front sensors and a lower pitch for the
rear). As the vehicle moves closer to an
obstruction, the repetition frequency of the
H6167G
tones increases proportionally.
Caution: The parking aid is for guidance only. When the distance between the sensor and the
The sensors may not be able to detect certain obstruction is less than approximately 0.30
types of obstruction (narrow posts or small metres (1 foot), the tone becomes continuous.
narrow objects, small objects close to the
ground and some objects with dark,
non-reflective surfaces, for example).
The front PDC may sound spurious tones if it
detects a frequency tone using the same band
as the sensors.
Park Distance Control (PDC) is a system that
assists the driver when manoeuvring the
vehicle into a parking space, or anywhere that
there are obstacles that need to be avoided,
warning the driver accordingly.
162
R

Activating PDC The system can be disabled by pressing the
When the starter switch is turned on, engaging switch (illustrated) on the centre front
Drive on automatic transmission vehicles and instrument pack. The indicator light in the
switching the Electronic Parkbrake (EPB) off switch goes out. A second press of the switch
will automatically activate the front PDC re-enables the system. The system is reset if
sensors. The indicator light in the switch will the ignition is turned off and on again.
illuminate to indicate this. Depending on the system condition, the
The front sensors remain active until the speed indicator light may illuminate and a short tone
exceeds 15 km/h (10 mph). They then sounds as confirmation.
de-activate. Note: The confirmation tone only sounds when
When the vehicle’s speed drops below 10 km/h the rear PDC is activated by selecting reverse,
(6 mph), the front sensors are re-activated. If or when the system is re-activated by pressing
the vehicle stops and Neutral is selected, the the switch when in reverse.
sensors remain active. If a long, high-pitched tone sounds and the
If Reverse is selected, both front and rear sets switch indicator light flashes when PDC is
of sensors become activated and a short activated, then a fault in the system has been
confirmation tone sounds after one second. detected - contact your Land Rover
They remain so regardless of speed. Dealer/Authorised Repairer for assistance.
If the driver selects Neutral from Reverse, both
sets of sensors remain active.
Selection of Park, or turning on the EPB while
the vehicle is stationary, will override other
inputs and turn off the PDC system.
1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
1 ABC
2 3
DEF
H6168G
163
L
Automatic Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION USE • ALWAYS keep the brakes applied until you
The following information is particularly are ready to move off - remember, once a
important for drivers who are unfamiliar with drive gear has been selected, an
the techniques required to drive vehicles with ‘automatic’ vehicle will tend to creep
automatic transmission. forward (or backward if reverse is
selected).
Hill Descent Control • DO NOT allow the vehicle to remain
In HIGH range Hill Descent Control is fully stationary for any length of time with a
functional and should only be used when the drive gear selected and the engine running
vehicle is in first or reverse gear. In LOW range, (always select ‘N’ if the engine is to idle for
HDC can be selected in any gear. HDC is not a prolonged period).
fully active in neutral.
Caution: Vehicles fitted with automatic
For further information, see HILL DESCENT transmission can NOT be ‘push’ or ‘tow’
CONTROL, 189. started.
Starting
The engine can only be started with the selector
lever in the ‘P’ (Park) or ‘N’ (Neutral) positions.
• ALWAYS apply the parkbrake and foot
brake before starting the engine.
• KEEP THE BRAKES APPLIED while moving
AUTO
1 2 3
the selector lever into a drive position (the

ABC DEF
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
selector lever cannot be moved from the ‘P’

or ‘N’ position unless the foot brake is
applied).
Note: If rearward pressure is applied to the
selector lever before the footbrake is applied,
any gear selected may not be available
irrespective of the lever position. In this
situation, return the lever to its previous
position, ensure that the footbrake is applied,
and select the required gear.
• The selector release button (see inset)
must be pressed while selecting ‘P’ and ‘R’,
and also to enable the lever to be moved H6171L
between the ‘P’ and ‘R’ positions.
Note: The gear selector lever MUST be in the ‘P’
• DO NOT ‘rev’ the engine or allow it to run
position before the starter key can be removed.
above normal idle speed while selecting ‘D’
or ‘R’, or while the vehicle is stationary with Note: For maximum air conditioning
any gear selected. performance while stationary, select ‘P’ or ‘N’.
164
R
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Before selecting Reverse, ensure that the
Selector lever positions vehicle is stationary, with the brakes applied.
An LED indicator on the selector panel and a The selector release button MUST be pressed
number or letter on the gear selector display in before moving the selector lever into Reverse
the instrument pack, identify the selected gear position.
position. ‘N’ - Neutral:
Select Neutral when the vehicle is stationary
and the engine is required to idle for a brief
period (at traffic lights, for example). In Neutral,
the transmission is not locked, so the parkbrake
must be applied whenever ‘N’ is selected.
If the vehicle remains stationary, the selector
lever becomes locked in Neutral and it is then
necessary to depress the brake pedal in order to
release the selector lever.
Press the selector release button and foot brake
to move from Neutral to Reverse or Drive.
‘D’ - Drive:
Select for all normal driving; full automatic gear
changing occurs on all six forward gears,
according to road speed and accelerator
position.
Caution: DO NOT select ‘P’ or ‘R’ if the vehicle
is moving.
DO NOT select a forward drive gear when the
vehicle is moving backwards.
H6173G Do not select reverse gear when the vehicle is
‘P’ - Park: moving forwards.
This position locks the transmission and should ‘Kick-down’ in automatic mode
be selected before switching the engine off. To
To provide rapid acceleration for overtaking,
avoid transmission damage, ensure that the
push the accelerator pedal to the full extent of
vehicle is completely stationary, with the
its travel (this is known as ‘kick-down’), a ‘click’
parkbrake applied, before selecting ‘P’.
will be felt through the accelerator pedal. Up to
The selector release button MUST be pressed a certain speed, this will cause an immediate
before moving the selector lever into, or out of, downshift to the lowest appropriate gear,
the Park position. followed by rapid acceleration. Once the pedal
‘R’ - Reverse: is relaxed, normal gear change speeds will
resume (dependent upon road speed and
accelerator pedal position).
165
L
Note: Moderate accelerator pressure may also To return to Sport mode after CommandShift
result in a downshift in the transmission, has been selected move the selector into the ‘D’
depending on vehicle speed. position. Then move it back into Sport mode.
Sport mode CommandShift TM
In Sport mode, full automatic progression CommandShift gear selection can be used as
through the gear ratios is retained and the an alternative to fully automatic transmission
transmission will stay in the lower gears for and is particularly effective when rapid
longer. This improves mid-range performance acceleration or engine braking are required.
with downshifts occurring more readily.
H6177G
H6175G
To select Sport mode, move the gear lever from 1. With ‘D’ (Drive) selected, move the gear
the ‘D’ position towards the left hand side of the selector from the ‘D’ position towards the
vehicle (see illustration). The word SPORT will left-hand side of the vehicle (this is the
appear in the gear selector display in the same as selecting Sport mode).
instrument pack (for approximately 6 seconds)
and the LED in the selector display to the side
of the selector lever (arrowed in inset)
illuminates.
Sport mode can be deselected at any time, by
returning the lever to the ‘D’ position.
166
R
2. The transmission then automatically ‘Kick-down’ in CommandShift
selects the ratio most appropriate to the When in CommandShift, kick-down overrides
vehicle's road speed and accelerator the manual gear selection, to provide increased
depression. Move the selector forward or acceleration.
backward will manually select a higher or
In HIGH range, with CommandShift selected,
lower gear (when available). The message
kick-down will cause a downshift to the lowest
TRANSMISSION COMMANDSHIFT
gear possible for the current speed.
SELECTED appears in the main message
centre.
3. A single forward (+) movement of the
selector lever will change the transmission
to a higher gear, while rearward (-)
movement of the lever will change down to
a lower gear. The selected gear will be
indicated in the digital display in the
instrument pack (see inset).
4. To deselect CommandShift, simply move
the selector lever sideways, back to the ‘D’
position. Automatic gear changing will then
resume.
Note: In CommandShift, ‘kick-down’ is still
available for increased acceleration. See
‘Kick-down’ in automatic mode, 165, for more
information.
Note: When the Terrain Response is selected,
the automatic transmission will go straight into
CommandShift if the lever is moved into
sport/CommandShift in any Special Program.
Using CommandShift in HIGH range
If CommandShift is selected in HIGH range, 1st
gear must be selected to move off from
stationary. Normal sequential gear changing
can be utilised once the vehicle is moving.
Using CommandShift in LOW range
If CommandShift is selected in LOW range, the
vehicle can move off from stationary in 1st, 2nd
or 3rd gear - this is particularly useful to
improve traction when driving off-road. See the
‘Off-road Driving’ section of this handbook, for
further details.
167
L
ELECTRONICALLY SELECTED
AUTOMATIC MODES
In all fully automatic modes (Drive, Sport and
Cruise Control) the transmission control
system will electronically adjust gear change
points to suit a variety of driving conditions.
Hill ascent, trailer and high altitude mode
A suitable gear change pattern is selected to
retain lower gears for longer. This is to counter
momentum loss caused by more frequent gear
changing during hill ascent or when towing.
This gear change pattern is also selected at high
altitudes to combat reduced engine torque.
Hill descent mode
When in manual CommandShiftTM mode, with
the optimum gear for engine braking selected,
the selector lever can then be moved across to
the ‘D’ position. The transmission will retain the
previously selected ‘manual’ gear until the
descent is completed, then the transmission
will automatically change to ‘D’.
High coolant temperature mode
In high ambient temperatures during extreme
load conditions, it is possible for the engine and
the gearbox to overheat. At a certain
temperature the transmission will select a gear
change pattern designed to aid the cooling
process, whilst enabling the gearbox to
continue performing normally in high
temperatures.
Note: Automatic transmission change
points/patterns will change depending on
which mode has been selected.
Limp-Home mode
Should the transmission develop a fault, ‘F’ is
displayed in the gear position display and only
limited gears are available.
168
R
Transfer Gearbox
Transfer Gearbox
TRANSFER GEARBOX USING THE TRANSFER GEARBOX

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronically The recommended method of changing range
controlled transfer gearbox allowing the driver is with the vehicle stationary. For vehicles
to select HIGH or LOW range driving gears. equipped with a message centre, the messages
displayed will assist the experienced driver in
HIGH range
carrying out a range change ‘on-the-move’.
HIGH range should be used for all normal road
driving and also for off-road driving across dry, Stationary method
level terrain. With the vehicle stationary and the engine
running, apply the foot brake and move the
LOW range
automatic gearbox selector to the ‘N’ (neutral)
LOW range should ONLY be used in situations position before moving the transfer gear switch
where low speed manoeuvring is necessary, towards the range required (HIGH or LOW).
such as reversing a trailer or negotiating a When the switch is released, it returns to the
boulder-strewn river bed, or when moving off central position.
while heavily loaded or towing.
Also use LOW range for more extreme off-road
conditions, such as steep ascents and
descents. DO NOT attempt to use the LOW
range for normal road driving. AUTO
1 2
ABC
3
DEF
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
While the vehicle is in HIGH range, the range

indicator light in the instrument pack display is
extinguished and the HIGH range indicator light
at the switch is illuminated.
169
L
Transfer Gearbox
The range indicator light in the instrument pack
display illuminates continuously to act as a
reminder that LOW range is engaged. It flashes
to indicate a range change in progress and
extinguishes once the vehicle is in HIGH range.
H6195G
While a LOW to HIGH range change is in

progress, the LOW range indicator light at the
switch will remain illuminated. The HIGH range
indicator lights at both the switch and the
H6194G
instrument pack display will flash.
While a HIGH to LOW range change is in When the range change is complete, the LOW
progress, the HIGH range indicator light at the range indicator light at both the switch and the
switch will remain illuminated. The LOW range instrument pack display extinguishes. The
indicator lights at both the switch and the HIGH range indicator light at the switch will
instrument pack display will flash. illuminate constantly.
When the range change is complete, the HIGH A warning chime will sound, and ‘HIGH RANGE
range indicator light at the switch extinguishes. ENGAGED’ is displayed in the message centre
The LOW range indicator lights at both the (if fitted) for a few seconds.
switch and the instrument pack display will
illuminate constantly.
A warning chime will sound, and ‘LOW RANGE
ENGAGED’ is displayed in the message centre
(if fitted) for a few seconds.
170
R
Transfer Gearbox
Range changing on the move Drive-line fault lamp
Note: If the vehicle speed is too high when a If a fault occurs within the drive line, a lamp will
range change is requested, a warning chime illuminate in the instrument pack display. The
sounds and ‘SPEED TOO HIGH FOR RANGE colour of that lamp will indicate what criteria
CHANGE’ appears in the message centre. apply to driving the vehicle, see Warning
If ‘N’ is not selected before using the transfer Indicators, 97.
gear switch, the message ‘SELECT NEUTRAL AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
FOR RANGE CHANGE’ is displayed and a
warning chime sounds. Caution: DO NOT use auxiliary equipment,
such as roller generators, that are driven by
Note: Do not attempt to make moving range only one or two wheels of the vehicle, as they
changes at speeds of 3 km/h (2 mph) or less. will cause failure of the transfer gearbox.
Changing from HIGH to LOW on the move
With the vehicle slowing down and travelling
NO FASTER THAN 40 km/h (24 mph), first
select ‘N’ in the main gearbox. Push the transfer
gear switch rearwards to the ‘LOW’ position
and release it (the switch returns to the centre
position when released).
Indication of the range change status is the
same as for the Stationary method.
Now select ‘D’ or manual CommandShiftTM
mode. The transmission interlock prevents the
engagement of a drive gear until the range
change is complete.
Changing from LOW to HIGH on the move
With the vehicle travelling NO FASTER THAN 60
km/h (38 mph), select ‘N’ in the main gearbox.
Push the transfer gear switch forwards to the
‘HIGH’ position and release it.
Indication of the range change status is the
same as for the stationary method.
Now select ‘D’ (drive). The transmission
interlock prevents the engagement of a drive
gear until the range change is complete.
Caution: If the range change indicator light
still flashes when the starter key is turned
from position ‘ll’ to position ‘l’, apply the
parkbrake.
171
L
Cruise Control
Cruise Control
CRUISE CONTROL • DO NOT use Cruise Control in traffic

Cruise Control enables the driver to maintain a conditions where a constant speed cannot
constant road speed without using the easily be maintained.
accelerator pedal. This is particularly useful for • DO NOT use Cruise Control on winding or
motorway cruising or for any journey where a slippery road surfaces, or in off-road
constant speed can be maintained for a lengthy conditions such as rough tracks or on
period. sand.
• Use of Sport mode is not recommended
when Cruise Control is selected.
4 Note: Cruise Control is NOT available when the
vehicle is being driven in LOW range gears.
3
It is also not available when Mud Ruts, Sand or
Rock Crawl is selected in the Terrain Response
2
system.
1
To operate
Accelerate until the desired cruising speed is
reached. This must be above the system's
operational minimum speed of 30 km/h
(18 mph).
Press the ‘+’ switch (4) to set the vehicle speed
AUTO
in the system's memory. Cruise Control will
now maintain that road speed.
The warning indicator in the
instrument pack illuminates. With
Cruise Control operating, speed
can be increased by normal use of the
H6183L
accelerator e.g. for overtaking. When the
The steering wheel switches operate as follows: accelerator is released, road speed will return to
the previously set cruising speed.
1. CANCEL: Cancels without erasing
memorised speed. A speed can be set and stored whilst the vehicle
speed is below 30 km/h (18 mph), or the
2. RESUME: Resume set speed.
vehicle is stationary but the gear selector is in
3. SET -: Set the speed (-) or decrease. ‘D’ or ‘N’. Once the vehicle speed exceeds 30
4. SET +: Set the speed (+) or increase. km/h (18 mph) the set speed can be achieved
Caution: Always observe the following by pressing the resume switch (2).
precautions:
• DO NOT use Cruise Control when using
reverse gear.
172
R
Cruise Control
Suspending Cruise Control To increase the set cruising speed:
Cruise Control can be suspended by a single Press and hold the ‘+’ switch (4); the vehicle
press of the ‘CANCEL’ switch (1). The warning will accelerate. Release the switch as soon as
indicator in the instrument pack extinguishes. the desired speed is reached.
Cruise Control will also suspend when the The vehicle speed at the point of switch release
brake pedal is pressed, when the gear selector becomes the new set speed.
is moved into neutral or if HDC or DSC becomes Alternatively, the set speed can be increased
active. incrementally by tapping the ‘+’ switch (4).
To resume Cruise Control at the previously set Each press of the switch will increase the speed
speed, press the ‘RESUME’ switch (2). by 2 km/h (1 mph).
Note: The set speed will NOT be erased by A further alternative is to increase speed by
pressing the ‘CANCEL’ switch (1). The set normal use of the accelerator. When the desired
speed will only be erased when the starter speed is reached, press the ‘+’ switch (4) to set
switch is turned to position ‘0’. the Cruise Control.
To reduce the cruising speed: Note: If the accelerator pedal is pressed to
Press and hold the ‘-’ switch (3); the vehicle will increase speed, but the ‘+’ switch (4) is not
decelerate. Release the switch as soon as the pressed, Cruise Control will be cancelled after a
desired speed is reached. The vehicle speed at set period.
the point of switch release becomes the new set
WARNING
speed.
When setting Cruise Control to the speed limit
Alternatively, the set speed can be decreased it is important to remember that it is possible
incrementally by tapping the ‘-’ switch (3). Each for the vehicle speed to increase when
press of the switch will decrease the speed by 2 travelling downhill. This may result in the
km/h (1 mph). vehicle speed exceeding the speed limit.
Note: Cruise Control will not operate at speeds The driver must ALWAYS ensure that a safe
below 30 km/h (18 mph). speed is maintained below the speed limit,
taking account of traffic and road conditions.
173
L
Adaptive Cruise Control

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL* The radar sensor is mounted behind a cover on

The Adaptive Cruise Control system is designed the left-hand side of the lower cooling aperture,
to aid the driver to maintain a gap from the to provide a clear ‘view’ forward for the radar
vehicle ahead or a set road speed if there is no beam.
slower vehicle ahead. The system is intended to • Only use Adaptive Cruise Control when
provide enhanced operation of the vehicle when conditions are favourable, that is, straight,
following other vehicles which are in the same dry, open roads with light traffic.
lane and travelling in the same direction. • Do not use in poor visibility, specifically
fog, heavy rain, spray or snow.
WARNING
Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision • Do not use on icy or slippery roads.
warning or avoidance system. Additionally, • It is the drivers responsibility to stay alert,
Adaptive Cruise Control will not detect: drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
• Stationary or slow moving vehicles below at all times.
10 km/h (6 mph). • Keep the front of the vehicle free from dirt,
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway. metal badges or objects, including vehicle
front protectors, which may prevent the
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
sensor from operating.
The Adaptive Cruise Control system is based on • Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control when
the use of a radar sensor which projects a beam entering or leaving a motorway.
directly forward of the vehicle so as to detect
objects ahead.
H6344G
174
R

Steering wheel switches Setting a speed
The system is operated by switches mounted Accelerate as normal until the required speed is
on the steering wheel. The driver can also reached.
intervene at any time by use of the brake or Press the ‘SET’ + button (4) briefly and the
accelerator pedals. vehicle speed will then be stored in the memory
and the system engaged. The set speed will be
displayed on the message centre, ‘SETSPEED
6 80KM/H 50MPH’
5 Entering the follow mode
WARNING
4
When in follow mode the vehicle will not
3
decelerate automatically to a stop, nor will
the vehicle always decelerate quickly enough
2 to avoid a collision without driver
1 intervention.
Once a set speed has been selected, the driver

can release the accelerator and the set road
speed will be maintained.
When a vehicle ahead enters the same lane or a
slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane, the
AUTO
vehicle speed will be adjusted automatically
until the gap to the vehicle ahead corresponds
to the preset gap. The vehicle is now in ‘follow
mode’.
The warning light in the instrument
cluster will be illuminated.
H6345L
The steering wheel switches operate as follows: ‘CRUISE GAP’ The message centre will
1. CANCEL: Cancels without erasing <-->
display the gap set.
memorised speed.
2. RESUME: Resume set speed.
3. SET -: Set the speed (-) or decrease.
4. SET +: Set the speed (+) or increase.
5. GAP: Gap increase.
6. GAP: Gap decrease.
175
L

The vehicle will then maintain the constant time Low speed automatic switch off
gap to the vehicle ahead until: If the speed of the vehicle decreases below
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed 30 km/h (18 mph), the Adaptive Cruise Control
above the set speed. system will be automatically switched OFF and
• The vehicle ahead moves out of lane or out the instrument warning light will go out.
of view. If the brakes were being applied by the Adaptive
• The vehicle ahead slows so that ‘low speed Cruise Control system, they will be slowly
automatic switch off’ occurs. released.
• A new gap distance is set. This will be accompanied by an audible
warning, and ‘DRIVER INTERVENE’ will be
If necessary, the vehicle brakes will be displayed on the message centre. The driver
automatically applied to slow the vehicle to must take control.
maintain the gap to the vehicle in front.
The maximum braking which is applied by the Overriding the set speed/follow mode
Adaptive Cruise Control system is limited and WARNING
can be overridden by the driver applying the Whenever the driver is overriding the
brakes, if required. Adaptive Cruise Control by depressing the
Note: Driver braking will cancel Adaptive Cruise accelerator pedal, the Adaptive Cruise
Control. Control will not automatically apply the
If the Adaptive Cruise Control system predicts brakes to maintain separation from any
that its maximum braking level will not be vehicle ahead.
sufficient, then an audible warning will sound
while the Adaptive Cruise Control continues to The set speed and gap can be overridden by
brake. ‘DRIVER INTERVENE’ will be displayed pressing the accelerator pedal when cruising at
on the message centre. The driver should take constant speed or in follow mode. If the vehicle
IMMEDIATE action. is in follow mode, the instrument warning light
will go out when the Adaptive Cruise Control is
When in follow mode the vehicle will
overridden by the driver using the accelerator
automatically return to the set speed when the
and ‘CRUISE OVERRIDE’ will be displayed on
road ahead is clear, for instance when:
the message centre. When the accelerator is
• The vehicle in front accelerates or changes released the Adaptive Cruise Control function
lane. will operate again and vehicle speed will
• The driver changes lane to either side or decrease to the set speed, or a lower speed if
enters an exit lane. follow mode is active.
The driver should intervene if appropriate.
176
R

Changing the gap The gap from the vehicle ahead can be
decreased or increased by pressing the rocker
switch (5) or (6), on the steering wheel.
Four gaps are available and the selected gap
setting will be displayed on the message centre
when either button is pressed. After the ignition
is switched ON the default gap will be
automatically selected ready for Adaptive
Cruise Control operation.
Note: It is the driver’s responsibility to select a
gap appropriate to the driving conditions.
Changing the set speed
There are three ways to change the set speed:
AUTO
• Accelerate or brake to the required speed
and press the ‘SET’ + button (4).
• Increase or decrease the speed by pressing
and holding either the ‘SET’ + or - button
(4) or (3) until the required set speed is
shown on the message centre. The vehicle
H6351L speed will gradually change to the selected
speed.
CRUISE GAP
• Increase or decrease the speed in steps of
<-> 2 km/h (1 mph) by briefly pressing the
‘SET’ + or - button (4) or (3).
CRUISE GAP Adaptive Cruise Control operates between
<--> approximately 30 km/h and 180 km/h (18 mph
and 110 mph) dependent on the country
CRUISE GAP specification.
<--->
Set speeds outside this range will not be
captured.
CRUISE GAP
<----> The Adaptive Cruise Control may apply the
brakes to slow down the vehicle to the new set
speed. The new set speed will be displayed on
EXT 23 C the message centre for four seconds after it has
been changed.
TRIP 274.5 km
H6386L
177
L

Adaptive Cruise Control automatic switch off Forward alert
Adaptive Cruise Control will disengage, but not
clear the memory when:
• The ‘CANCEL’ button (1), is pressed.
• The brake pedal is pressed.
• The vehicle speed falls below 30 km/h (18
1 2 3
mph).
ABC DEF 6CD-465
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
•
1 2 3 4 5 6
Neutral, Park or Reverse gear positions are

0
selected.
• Dynamic stability control activates.
Adaptive Cruise Control will disengage, and
clear the memory when:
• The ignition switch is set to position ‘0’.
• Maximum vehicle speed is reached.
6CD-465
• A fault occurs in the Adaptive Cruise
H6347G
Control system.
Limited warning of vehicles ahead is provided
Resuming the set speed/follow mode during Adaptive Cruise Control operation by the
By pressing the resume button (2), after Adaptive Cruise Control ‘DRIVER INTERVENE’
Adaptive Cruise Control has been cancelled, for warning. The forward alert feature additionally
example, after braking, the Adaptive Cruise provides warnings whilst Adaptive Cruise
Control will become active again provided that Control is not engaged; if a vehicle is detected
the set speed memory has not been erased. The close ahead, then the warning tone and
set speed will be displayed for four seconds and message will be issued. The brakes will not be
the original set speed will be resumed, unless a applied.
vehicle ahead causes the follow mode to This additional feature may be switched on or
become active. off using the forward alert switch in the lower
Caution: ‘RESUME’ should only be used if the outboard knee bolster switchpack.
driver is aware of the set speed and intends to When the indicator light in the switch is on,
return to it. forward alert is active.
The sensitivity of the warning may be changed:
• Press the gap decrease button when
Adaptive Cruise Control is disengaged to
display and then decrease the sensitivity of
the alert.
• Press the gap increase button to display
and then increase the sensitivity of the
alert.
178
R

Both of these alerts are accompanied by the An audible alarm will sound, accompanied by
‘FWD ALERT’ message on the message centre. the message ‘DRIVER INTERVENE’ if the
Adaptive Cruise Control detects:
FWD ALERT • A failure has occurred whilst the system is
<-> active.
• That using maximum Adaptive Cruise
FWD ALERT Control braking only is not sufficient.
<-->
• That the vehicle speed has decreased
below the minimum for Adaptive Cruise
FWD ALERT
Control operation.
<--->
Note:
FWD ALERT • Adaptive Cruise Control operates when the
<----> gear selector lever is in position ‘D’.
• When engaged, the accelerator pedal rests
EXT 23 C in the raised position. Fully release the
pedal to allow normal Adaptive Cruise
Control operation.
TRIP 274.5 km • When braking is applied by the Adaptive
Cruise Control the brake pedal will move
H6407L down and up as braking is applied or
removed. The vehicle brake lights will be
Driving with Adaptive Cruise Control active switched on while braking is applied.
WARNING
The driver must not rest a foot under the brake
pedal, as it may become trapped.
The system acts by regulating the speed of the

vehicle using engine control and the brakes.
Gear changes may occur in response to
deceleration or acceleration whilst in Adaptive
Cruise Control.
Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision
avoidance system, however, during some
situations the system may provide the driver
with an indication that intervention is required.
179
L

Detection issues Adaptive Cruise Control failure
If a fault occurs during operation of the system
A in cruise or follow modes, the Adaptive Cruise
Control system will switch OFF and cannot be
used until the fault is cleared. The message
‘DRIVER INTERVENE’ appears briefly, and is
then replaced by the message ‘CRUISE NOT
AVAILABLE’.
B
If failure of the Adaptive Cruise Control or any
related system occurs at any other time the
message ‘CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE’ will be
displayed. It will not be possible to activate the
Adaptive Cruise Control system in any mode.
C Accumulations of dirt, snow or ice on the
sensor or cover may inhibit Adaptive Cruise
Control operation. Fitting of a vehicle front
protector or metallised badges may also affect
Adaptive Cruise Control operation.
If this occurs in Adaptive Cruise Control
H6181L
cruise/follow mode, the audible alarm sounds
Detection issues can occur: and the message ‘DRIVER INTERVENE’
• When driving on a different line to the appears briefly. The message ‘ADAPTIVE
vehicle in front (A). CRUISE CONTROL SENSOR BLOCKED’ is then
displayed. The system is no longer active.
• With vehicles which edge into your lane
which can only be detected once they have Clearing the obstruction allows the system to
moved fully into your lane (B). return to normal operation. If the obstruction is
present when Adaptive Cruise Control is
• There may be issues with the detection of
inactive, e.g. on initial starting or with the
vehicles in front when going into and
Adaptive Cruise Control system switched off,
coming out of a bend (C).
the message ‘ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
In these cases Adaptive Cruise Control may SENSOR BLOCKED’ will be displayed.
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver should
Tyres other than those recommended may have
stay alert and intervene if necessary.
different sizes. This can affect the correct
operation of the Adaptive Cruise Control.
180
R
Brakes
Brakes
FOOT BRAKE WARNING

For your safety, the hydraulic braking system DO NOT rest your foot on the brake pedal
operates through dual circuits. If one circuit while travelling as this may overheat the
should fail, the other will continue to function. brakes, reduce their efficiency and cause
However, in the event of brake failure where excessive wear.
only one circuit is operational, the vehicle NEVER allow the vehicle to freewheel with the
should only be driven at slow speed to the engine turned off as braking assistance will
nearest qualified Land Rover Dealer/Authorised not be available. The pedal brakes will still
Repairer. function, but more pressure will be required
In these circumstances, exercise extreme to operate them.
caution and be aware that increased brake If the RED brake warning indicator should
pedal travel, greater pedal pressure, and longer illuminate while the vehicle is in motion,
stopping distances will be experienced. bring the vehicle to a halt as quickly as traffic
conditions and safety allow and seek
Servo assistance
qualified assistance before continuing, see
The braking system is servo assisted, but ONLY Warning Indicators, 97.
when the engine is running. Without this
assistance greater braking effort is necessary to
safely control the vehicle, resulting in longer Wet conditions
stopping distances. Always observe the Driving through water or even very heavy rain
following precautions: may adversely affect braking efficiency. Always
dry the braking surfaces by intermittent light
• ALWAYS take particular care when being
application of the brakes, first ensuring that you
towed with the engine turned off.
are at a safe distance from other road users.
• If the engine should stop for any reason
while the vehicle is in motion, bring the
vehicle to a halt as quickly as traffic
conditions safely allow, and DO NOT pump
the brake pedal as the braking system may
lose any remaining assistance available.
Brake pads
Brake pads require a period of bedding in. For
the first 800 km (500 miles), you should avoid
situations where heavy braking is required.
Remember! Regular servicing is vital to ensure
that the brake pads are examined for wear and
changed periodically to ensure long term safety
and optimum performance.
181
L
Brakes
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES WARNING
The purpose of the anti-lock braking system ABS cannot overcome the physical limitations
(ABS) is to allow efficient braking without wheel of braking distance, or the danger of
locking - thereby allowing the driver to retain aquaplaning, i.e. where a layer of water
steering control of the vehicle. prevents adequate contact between the tyres
Under normal braking conditions, where and the road surface.
sufficient road surface friction exists to slow The fact that a vehicle is fitted with ABS must
the vehicle without the wheels locking, ABS will never tempt the driver into taking risks that
not be activated. However, if the wheels begin could affect safety. In all cases, it remains the
to lock under braking, then ABS will driver's responsibility to drive within normal
automatically come into operation. This will be safety margins, having due consideration for
recognisable by a rapid pulsation felt through prevailing weather and traffic conditions.
the brake pedal. The driver should always take account of the
In an emergency situation, ABS functions most surface to be travelled over and the fact that
effectively when full braking effort is applied brake pedal reactions will be different to
even when the road surface is slippery. The ABS those experienced on a non-ABS vehicle.
system constantly monitors the speed of each
wheel and varies the brake pressure to each, Warning indicator
according to the available grip.
A fault with the ABS system is
No matter how hard you brake, you should be indicated by illumination of the
able to continue steering the vehicle as normal. amber ABS warning indicator. If
• DO NOT pump the brake pedal at any time; the indicator illuminates, drive with care,
this will interrupt operation of the system avoiding heavy brake applications and seek
and may increase the stopping distance. qualified assistance urgently. For further
• NEVER place additional floor matting or information on the functionality of the ABS
any other obstruction under the brake warning indicator, see Anti-lock braking
pedal. This restricts pedal travel and may system - AMBER, 101.
impair brake efficiency.
182
R
Brakes
Off-road driving Emergency Brake Assist (EBA)
While anti-lock braking will operate in ‘off-road’ If rapid full brake application is made, EBA
driving conditions, on certain surfaces total automatically boosts the braking force to the
reliance on the system may be unwise. It cannot maximum and helps to stop the vehicle. Also, if
reliably compensate for driver error or the driver brakes more slowly, but with
inexperience on difficult off-road surfaces. sufficient brake pressure to activate ABS on
Note the following: both front wheels, the system automatically
increases the braking force so that all four
• On soft or deep surfaces such as powdery
wheels are in ABS control, optimising the
snow, sand or gravel, and on extremely
performance of the ABS system.
rough ground, the braking distance
required by the anti-lock braking system Pressure should be maintained on the brake
may be greater than for normal braking, pedal during the entire brake application. If the
even though improved steering would be brake pedal is released, EBA will cease
experienced. This is because the natural operation.
action of locked wheels on soft surfaces is A fault with the EBA system is indicated by
to build up a wedge of surface material in illumination of the amber brake warning
front which assists the wheels to stop. indicator, see Warning Indicators, 97.
• If the vehicle is stopped on a very steep In the event of a fault, the system should be
slope where little traction is available, it checked by a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
may slide with the wheels locked as there is Repairer at the earliest opportunity.
no wheel rotation to provide a signal to the
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
ABS. To counteract this, briefly release the
brakes to permit some wheel movement, Your vehicle is equipped with Electronic Brake
then re-apply the brakes to allow ABS to Force Distribution (EBD), which balances the
gain control. distribution of braking forces between front and
rear axles to maintain maximum braking
• Before driving off-road, read and
efficiency under all vehicle loading conditions.
thoroughly understand the ‘Off-road
driving’ section of this handbook. For example; under light loads EBD applies less
effort to the rear brakes to maintain vehicle
Cornering Brake Control (CBC) stability; conversely allowing full braking effort
Cornering Brake Control (CBC) is an advanced to the rear wheels when the vehicle is towing or
form of ABS, which maintains vehicle stability is heavily laden.
and steerability during braking whilst cornering A fault with the EBD system is indicated by
or changing lanes at speed. illumination of the red brake warning indicator.
If this illuminates while the vehicle is being
driven, gently stop the vehicle as soon as safety
permits and seek qualified assistance.
183
L
Brakes
PARKBRAKE It is important to confirm that the red indicator
Your vehicle is equipped with an electrically is continuously illuminated (not flashing). This
operated parkbrake (EPB). indicates that the parkbrake has been correctly
applied. If the lever is operated while the vehicle
is travelling at less than 3 km/h (2 mph), the
1 vehicle will be brought to a stop abruptly. The
stop lamps will not illuminate.
If the system detects a fault with the parkbrake,
the yellow parkbrake warning indicator will
illuminate and the message ‘Parkbrake fault’
will appear on the instrument pack. If a fault is
detected while EPB is operated, the red warning
indicator will flash and the yellow indicator will
2 illuminate. Also the message ‘Parkbrake fault.
System not functional.’ will appear on the
instrument pack. The red indicator will continue
to be illuminated for at least ten seconds after
the ignition has been switched off.
WARNING
DO NOT rely on the parkbrake system to hold
the vehicle stationary if the yellow parkbrake
warning indicator is illuminated and/or the
red warning indicator is flashing. Seek
Note: Text messages described within this

section are only available where a vehicle is
fitted with a driver information module.
Dynamic operation
H6185L
In an emergency, the parkbrake can be applied
Applying the parkbrake manually ‘dynamically’, i.e with the vehicle travelling at
more than 3 km/h (2 mph). Pulling up on the
With the vehicle stationary, pull up the lever (1)
lever and holding it up gives a gradual reduction
located alongside the gear selector, and release
in speed. The brake warning indicator will
it. The lever will return to the neutral position
illuminate accompanied by a harsh sound and
and the red parkbrake warning indicator in the
‘Caution! Parkbrake applied’ appears on the
instrument pack will illuminate.
message screen. The stop lamps will illuminate.
Releasing or depressing the lever will cancel the
parkbrake application.
184
R
Brakes
The parkbrake should not be used regularly to WARNING
decelerate the vehicle or to bring it to a
The parkbrake operates on the rear wheels of
standstill; this facility is intended for emergency
the vehicle and hence secure parking of the
use only.
vehicle is dependent on sufficient
Caution: Driving the vehicle with the tyre-to-road friction.
parkbrake applied (other than in the
DO NOT rely on the parkbrake to operate
emergency situation described above) or
effectively if the vehicle has been subjected
repeated use of the parkbrake to decelerate
to immersion in mud and water.
the vehicle may cause serious damage to the
brake system.
Applying the parkbrake automatically
Releasing the parkbrake manually This operation must only be carried out when
To disengage the parkbrake, the ignition must the vehicle is stationary. This feature can be
be on. Apply pressure to the footbrake or inhibited by pressing down on the lever while
accelerator pedal. removing the starter key.
It is not possible to manually release the
parkbrake without pressing: WARNING
DO NOT rely on the parkbrake system to hold
• footbrake or accelerator the vehicle stationary if the yellow parkbrake
warning indicator is illuminated and/or the
red warning indicator is flashing. Seek
Releasing the parkbrake automatically

If the vehicle is stationary with the parkbrake
applied, pressing the accelerator will release
the parkbrake and allow the vehicle to move off.
It is not possible to automatically release the
parkbrake without pressing the accelerator. If
you want to move the vehicle without pressing
the accelerator, then manual release should be
used. Automatic release is available in first,
second and reverse gears in HIGH range, and
first, second, third and reverse gears in LOW
range.
To delay the automatic release feature, hold the
lever in the ‘apply’ position, then at the desired
point, release it.
To assist in a smooth drive-away, the system
anticipates the requirement and reduces the
system load depending on the gradient. (It may
be possible to hear this ‘pre-arm’ operation).
185
L
Brakes
If the reduction in load causes the vehicle to
move before a valid gear is engaged, the full
system load will be re-applied to the parkbrake.
This may cause a small reduction in the
refinement of the subsequent drive-away. It is
also possible to override this load reduction by
lifting the parkbrake lever after gear
engagement.
In the event of a fault, ‘Parkbrake Fault. Auto
Release not functional’ will appear in the
instrument pack.
Under most conditions the EPB system will
release seamlessly as the accelerator is applied,
allowing the vehicle to move forward. However,
release times may be extended for an initial
time period at the start of a journey when
changing into gear from ‘P’ or ‘N’. This is
normal and is to allow for the extended gear
engagement times that may occur under certain
circumstances.
Fault management
If a fault is diagnosed by the system when the
ignition is on but the parkbrake is not in use, the
yellow parkbrake warning indicator will flash
and the message ‘Parkbrake fault’ will be
displayed.
186
R
Dynamic Stability and Traction Control

DYNAMIC STABILITY In some driving conditions, to maximise

CONTROL (DSC) traction, it may be beneficial to deactivate DSC.
Such conditions include:
DSC helps to optimise dynamic stability, even
in critical driving situations. The system • To ‘rock’ the vehicle out of a hollow or out
controls dynamic stability when accelerating. of a soft surface.
Additionally, it identifies unstable driving • Starting in deep snow or on a loose
behaviour, such as understeering and surface.
oversteering and helps to keep the vehicle • Driving in deep sand.
under control by manipulating the engine
• Driving on tracks with deep longitudinal
output and applying the brakes at individual
ruts.
wheels. Some noise may be generated when
the brakes are applied. The system is ready to • Driving through deep mud.
operate each time the engine is started.
WARNING
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is unable to
compensate for driver misjudgement. It
remains the driver’s responsibility to adopt a
suitable driving style in every driving 1
4
2
ABC
5
3
DEF
6
6CD-465
GHI JKL MNO
situation. Risks should never be taken on 7

PQRS
8
TUV
0
9
WXYZ
CD 3
Tr 1 5
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 : 43
14 : 54
account of the additional security afforded by

the DSC system.
Warning indicator
The indicator illuminates briefly as
a bulb and system check when the
starter switch is turned to
position ‘II’.
1 ABC
2 3
DEF
If the warning indicator flashes, the system is H6191G

active, regulating engine output and brake
To deactivate DSC, press and briefly hold the
forces.
DSC switch on the instrument panel (the DSC
If the indicator illuminates constantly, and does warning indicator will illuminate continuously).
not extinguish when the DSC switch is pressed, Deactivating DSC has no effect on traction
a fault has been detected in the system. Any control operation.
fault will deactivate DSC. Drive with care and
Note: Driving with DSC deactivated, may add
seek qualified assistance as soon as possible.
additional loads on the brakes - always drive
Deactivating DSC operation with DSC switched on if possible.
Land Rover recommend that DSC is operational
in all normal driving conditions.
187
L

Reactivating DSC ELECTRONIC TRACTION
To reactivate DSC, press and briefly hold the CONTROL (ETC)
DSC switch on the instrument panel. DSC will ETC is continuously available to boost vehicle
automatically reactivate when the engine is traction when one or more wheels has a
started. tendency to spin, while others do not. It
operates in conjunction with the DSC system.
If a wheel is spinning, ETC automatically brakes
that wheel until it regains grip. This braking
activity allows the engine power to be
transmitted to the remaining wheels. Some
noise may be generated when the brakes are
applied.
Warning indicator
A fault with the ETC system is
indicated by illumination of the
amber DSC warning indicator. This
could also indicate that the DSC has been
manually deactivated, see Warning Indicators,
97.
If the indicator illuminates constantly, and does
not extinguish when the DSC switch is pressed,
a fault has been detected in the system. Any
fault will deactivate ETC. Drive with care and
seek qualified assistance as soon as possible.
188
R
Hill Descent Control

HILL DESCENT CONTROL

Hill Descent Control (HDC) operates in
conjunction with the anti-lock braking system
to provide greater control in off-road situations
particularly when descending severe gradients.
AUTO
1 2
ABC
3
DEF
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3
HDC is fully functional and should only be used

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
in first and reverse gears in HIGH range and all

gears in LOW range.
HDC is fully functional and should only be used
in ‘D’, ‘R’ and CommandShift ‘1’ in HIGH range
and in ‘D’, ‘R’ and all CommandShift gears in
LOW range. When in ‘D’, the vehicle will
automatically select the most appropriate gear.
The vehicle should not be driven with the HDC
active in ‘N’ neutral.
Note: Some of the Terrain response
program/range combinations will activate HDC
automatically.
HDC can be selected at speeds below 80 km/h
(50 mph). Once the vehicle speed reduces H6192L
below 50 km/h (30 mph), the green lamp will
illuminate continuously, and full HDC function To select HDC
will be active. If the vehicle speed exceeds Press and release the switch (arrowed) to
80 km/h (50 mph), HDC will deselect and the select HDC. To deselect, press and release
green HDC indicator will extinguish. again.
If HDC is already selected and vehicle speed The green information indicator will extinguish.
rises above 50 km/h (30 mph) in HIGH range, If HDC is deselected when HDC is operating, the
HDC function is suspended and the green HDC system ‘fades out’, allowing the vehicle to
indicator will flash. A message will also appear gradually increase in speed.
in the message display centre. When used in LOW range, HDC controls the
vehicle speed more aggressively. Use LOW
range gears when steep descents are to be
attempted.
Note: HDC is automatically deselected if the
vehicle ignition is switched off for more than 6
hours.
189
L

Hill Descent Control in action To increase the descent speed, press and hold
HDC should be used in conjunction with an the ‘+’ switch. The vehicle speed at the point of
appropriate gear selection, see BASIC switch release will become the new descent
OFF-ROAD TECHNIQUES, 227. speed. Alternatively, the descent speed can be
adjusted by tapping the ‘+’ or ‘-’ switches. Each
During a hill descent, if engine braking is
press of the switch will adjust the descent
insufficient to control the vehicle speed, HDC
speed by approximately 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph).
automatically operates the brakes to slow the
vehicle and maintain a speed relative to the Note: Each gear has a pre-defined minimum
selected gear range and the accelerator pedal descent speed.
position. Note: The descent speed will only increase if
While HDC is controlling the vehicle speed, the gradient is sufficiently steep to cause the
descent speeds can be varied using the vehicle to accelerate as the braking effect is
steering-wheel-mounted Cruise Control (1) ‘+’ reduced. On a shallow slope, pressing the ‘+’
and (2) ‘-’ switches. To reduce the descent switch may result in no speed increase.
speed, press and hold the ‘-’ switch. The vehicle When driving off-road, HDC can be
speed at the point of switch release will become permanently selected to ensure that control is
the new descent speed. maintained. ABS and traction control are still
fully operational and will assist if the need
arises.
1 Note: With HDC selected, gear changes can be

carried out in the normal way.
2
If the brake pedal is depressed when HDC is
active, HDC is overridden and the brakes will
perform as normal (a pulsation might be felt
through the brake pedal). If the brake pedal is
then released, HDC will recommence operating
at the speed at which the brakes were released.
In extreme circumstances, the HDC system
may cause brake temperatures to exceed their
pre-set limits. If this occurs, ‘HDC
TEMPORARILY NOT AVAILABLE SYSTEM
AUTO
COOLING’ will be displayed in the message
centre. HDC will then fade out and become
temporarily inactive. HDC will not be available
until the brakes reach an acceptable
temperature, at which time the warning
message will disappear from the message
H6198L centre and HDC will, if required, resume
operating.
190
R

If a fault is detected in the HDC system, ‘HDC
FAULT SYSTEM NOT AVAILABLE’ will appear in
the display. If the fault is detected while the
system is active, HDC will fade out. Do not
attempt a steep descent when HDC is
unavailable or use a very low gear and/or the
footbrake. If a fault has been detected, consult
your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer at
the earliest opportunity.
HDC fade-out
HDC fade-out gradually decreases the HDC
function with the effect that the rate of hill
descent will increase. HDC will be disabled
completely once the descent is complete.
If required (e.g. the angle of the descent levels
out significantly), fade-out may be achieved
deliberately by deselecting HDC while the
system is operating.
HDC Information indicator - GREEN
If HDC is selected and the operating conditions
are met, the indicator will illuminate
continuously.
If the indicator flashes while HDC is active, HDC
operating conditions are not met.
191
L
Air Suspension
Air Suspension
AIR SUSPENSION
The air suspension system maintains the 55mm
correct vehicle height by controlling the
quantity of air in the vehicle’s air springs.
Unless stated otherwise, height changes may 0mm
only be made while the engine is running and
the driver and passenger doors are closed.
When the air suspension system lifts the
vehicle, it normally uses compressed air stored
in its reservoir. The suspension will rise much 50mm
H6206G
more slowly if this reservoir is depleted due to
repeated raising and lowering of the Access height can be selected at any time, but
suspension. the system response will depend on the
vehicle’s speed:
On-road Height
• If the vehicle speed is greater than 20 km/h
The normal height for the vehicle.
(12 mph), the suspension will wait for up to
Off-road Height one minute for the vehicle to slow down. If
This is 55 mm (2 in.) higher than On-road the vehicle does not slow down to below
height. It provides improved ground clearance 20 km/h (12 mph) within this time, the
and approach, departure and break-over Access height request will be cancelled.
angles, see DIMENSIONS, 317. • If the vehicle speed is less than 20 km/h
Off-road height can be selected at any speed up (12 mph), the suspension will move to a
to 40km/h (24 mph). When the system is at part-lowered height and remain at this
Off-road height, the system will automatically height for up to one minute. If the vehicle
select On-road height if the vehicle speed does not slow down to 8 km/h (5 mph)
exceeds 50 km/h (30 mph). within this time, the Access height request
will be cancelled.
Note: Some of its programs/range
combinations will adjust suspension height • If the vehicle speed is lower than 8 km/h
automatically (5 mph), the suspension will be lowered to
Access height immediately.
Access Height
Access height may be selected up to
This is 50 mm (1.9 in.) lower than On-road 40 seconds after the ignition is turned off,
height. It provides easier entry, exit and loading provided that the driver’s door has not been
of the vehicle. opened within this time.
192
R
Air Suspension
WARNING Remote Operation
The driver should ensure that the vehicle is The remote handset is programmable to give a
clear of obstacles and people before lowering range of functions, see ‘LAND ROVER’
the vehicle. Remember that, for example, the BUTTON, 26. If the vehicle’s remote handset
clearance under the floor and bumpers, and has been configured to operate the air
in the wheel arches, will be 105 mm (4.1 in.) suspension, height may be controlled remotely
less at Access height than at Off-road height. to assist in loading the vehicle or a trailer
attachment.
The suspension will automatically rise from The suspension height can be set anywhere
Access height when the vehicle speed exceeds between Off-road height and Access height.
10 km/h (6 mph). Normal height control will resume when the
If Access height was selected directly from vehicle is driven away.
Off-road height, the system will return to Note: Remote operation is disabled when the
Off-road height when the vehicle speed exceeds vehicle is moving.
10 km/h (6 mph). Otherwise the system will lift
the suspension to On-road height. WARNING
The handset will operate effectively from
High speed suspension height inside the vehicle. It is therefore important to
This vehicle has a feature that lowers the keep it out of reach of children at all times.
suspension ride height by 20mm if the vehicle When operating the handset from inside the
exceeds 160 km/h (100 mph), this happens passenger compartment, ensure that the
automatically. The driver has no control over underside of the vehicle has been checked for
this and is designed to improve high speed obstructions before lowering, and that a
stability. responsible adult has been posted outside the
Note: NEVER exceed the speed limits. vehicle to supervise the lowering process.
Crawl (Locked at Access Height) Care should be taken with all suspension
height changes when a trailer is attached to
This mode enables the vehicle to be driven at
the vehicle.
low speeds at Access height to give increased
roof clearance in low car parks, etc.
Messages
Crawl can be selected when the vehicle speed is
below 35 km/h (22 mph). When the vehicle is in When a message centre is fitted to the vehicle,
Crawl, On-road height will be selected messages relating to the air suspension system
automatically if the vehicle speed exceeds may be displayed.
40 km/h (24 mph). For an explanation of those messages, see
MAIN MESSAGE CENTRE, 84.
193
L
Air Suspension
Using the suspension control A flashing symbol (2) or (7) indicates that the
system is in a waiting state or shows that it will
2 automatically override the driver’s choice if
speed criteria are exceeded.
3 Selecting Access Height
If Access height is selected above 20 km/h
4 (12 mph), symbols (5) and (7) will flash while
1 the system waits for the vehicle to slow down.
5
When the vehicle slows down to 20 km/h
6 (12 mph), symbol (4) will extinguish as the
system goes to the part-lowered height.
Symbol (5) will be lit and symbol (7) will
continue to flash.
H6200G 7 When the vehicle slows down to 8 km/h
(5 mph), symbols (5) and (7) will be lit. When
1. Raise/lower Switch. Access height is reached, symbol (7) will
2. Raising Symbol. extinguish.
3. Off-road Symbol.
4. On-road Symbol.
5. Access Symbol.
6. Lock Symbol.
7. Lowering Symbol.
Suspension Heights
The raise/lower switch (1) is used to move up
or down through the suspension heights.
Symbols (3), (4) or (5) will be lit to show the
height selected. A symbol indicating the
suspension height will also be displayed in the
message centre when Off-road, Access or
Crawl is selected.
Symbols (2) or (7) will be lit to show the
direction of movement. They extinguish when
the height change movement is completed.
If a height change is requested that is not
allowed, such as attempting to raise the height
of the vehicle with the engine not running,
symbols (2) and (7) will flash twice and a chime
will sound. A message will be displayed on the
message centre.
194
R
Air Suspension
Selecting and Cancelling Crawl (Locked at Automatic Height Change Warnings
Access Height)
4
1
1
5
H6202G 7
H6201G
When the suspension is at Off-road height,
When the suspension is at On-road or Access Access or Crawl, the suspension height will
height and the vehicle speed is below 35 km/h change automatically when vehicle speed
(22 mph), press the raise/lower switch (1) in exceeds predetermined levels.
the down direction for one second. Symbols (5) When the suspension is at Off-road height or
and (6) will be lit to confirm the selection. Crawl, it warns the driver that the vehicle is
Crawl can be cancelled manually by pressing approaching a speed threshold. A chime will
the raise/lower switch in the up direction for sound, a message will be displayed on the
one second. Symbol (6) will extinguish. message centre and the On-road symbol (4)
Note: When Crawl is cancelled, the suspension and either (2) or (7) will flash.
will rise to On-road height if the vehicle speed is The Off-road height speed warning is shown
greater than 10 km/h (6 mph). above. If the vehicle slows down, the warning
will disappear.
Selecting Access Height Directly from
Off-road Height
When the suspension is at Off-road height,
press switch (1) down, then press it again
before symbol (7) goes out.
The system will remember to return the
suspension to Off-road height automatically if
the vehicle is driven above 10 km/h (6 mph).
195
L
Air Suspension
Door Open Override
If a door is opened during a height change while
the vehicle is at rest, the height change will
stop. 3
2 4
1
3 5
H6204G
When Extended mode is activated, symbol (3)

will flash if the suspension is above Off-road
height. Symbols (3) and (4) will flash if the
H6203G 7 suspension is between Off-road and On-road
The symbol for the target height (3, 4 or 5) will heights. Symbols (4) and (5) will flash if the
remain lit and the lifting symbol (2) or the suspension is between On-road and Access
lowering symbol (7) will flash. heights. A message will be displayed on the
message centre. Whilst the vehicle is being
The height change will resume if all of the doors
lifted the symbol (2) will be illuminated.
are closed within 90 seconds.
To exit Extended mode, either press the switch
Extended Mode (1) briefly up or down, or drive the vehicle at a
If the vehicle is grounded and traction control is speed greater than 5 km/h (3 mph) for 30
induced, the system automatically pumps air seconds.
into the air springs to raise the vehicle clear of
the obstruction. Extended mode is activated Additional lift whilst in extended mode
automatically and cannot be selected manually. When Extended Mode has been invoked and the
automatic lifting of the vehicle has been
completed, the driver can request an additional
lift of the vehicle. This can be particularly useful
when Extended Mode has been invoked on soft
surfaces.
To request additional lifting wait for Symbol (2)
to extinguish then press and hold the up switch
for 3 seconds whilst ALSO pressing the brake
pedal. A chime will sound to confirm that the
request has been accepted. Symbol (2) will be
illuminated while the vehicle is being lifted.
196
R
Air Suspension
Suspension Freeze Remote Handset Operation
If the system is attempting to change the
suspension height and it detects that the
suspension is prevented from moving, the
system will freeze all movements.
This can be caused by attempting to lower the
vehicle onto an obstacle or attempting to lift the
vehicle against an obstruction.
The symbols behave in the same way described 1
in Extended mode and the same message will
2
be displayed on the message centre. As in
Extended mode, to exit this freeze state, either
press the switch (1) up or down, or drive the 3
vehicle at a speed greater than 20 km/h
H6205G
(12 mph).
The handset can be configured to operate the
air suspension, see Customer programmable
button, 26. Remove the starter key, turn on the
hazard warning lamps and close all doors.
Remote operation is not possible unless this is
done.
Press and hold the Land Rover button (3), then
press the Lock button (1) to raise the vehicle, or
the Unlock button (2) to lower the vehicle.
Movement will stop when any button is
released.
The height will initially change slowly but, after
three seconds, the speed will increase. While
the height is changing, a symbol on the
raise/lower switch will be lit according to the
direction of movement.
If the starting height is above or below On-road
height, movement will stop when On-road
height is reached. Further movement can be
achieved by releasing the buttons and pressing
them again.
197
L
Dynamic Response
Dynamic Response
DYNAMIC RESPONSE*
H6366G
WARNING The system is entirely automatic in operation

and cannot be influenced by the driver in any
If the warning light illuminates RED a system
way. However, the functionality of the DR
fault has occurred that may result in serious
warning light in the instrument panel is very
damage to vehicle components. Stop the
important and drivers should be aware of the
vehicle and switch off the engine as soon as
following:
safety permits. Seek qualified assistance
immediately. Warning light
The warning light illuminates RED
Dynamic Response is a patented feature unique when the starter switch is turned
to Land Rover. The system is designed to on (to position 'II'). After two
eliminate vehicle body roll at low cornering seconds, the RED illumination changes to
speeds and reduce body roll at higher cornering AMBER and, after a further two seconds, the
speeds, while maintaining a soft, car-like, light extinguishes. This process is a system
suspension for straight line travelling. On check that takes place every time the vehicle is
uneven surfaces and rough tracks, the Dynamic used. Provided the Dynamic Response system
Response system will adjust the suspension and Air Suspension system are operating
according to the vehicle speed and roughness correctly, illumination will not occur at any
of the surface to provide improved passenger other time.
comfort.
At very low speeds the roll bars are effectively
decoupled, giving significant benefits in
off-road axle articulation and improved traction.
198
R
Dynamic Response
If illumination occurs while driving, a fault
with the system is indicated, as follows:
• If the light shows RED (a flashing red light,
which changes to constant illumination
after two minutes, and is accompanied by a
warning chime):
This indicates a system fault that may
result in serious damage to vehicle
components and reduced Dynamic
Response performance. You must stop the
vehicle as soon as safety permits and
switch off the engine. DO NOT CONTINUE
DRIVING! Seek qualified assistance
immediately
• If the light shows AMBER (constant
illumination):
This indicates a system fault that will result
in reduced Dynamic Response
performance, but will not leave the vehicle
in a dangerous condition. You may
continue driving, but reduce speed, take
additional care, and consult a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer at the earliest
opportunity.
199
L
Terrain Response
Terrain Response
TERRAIN RESPONSETM This allows the driver to ‘tell’ the vehicle what
SYSTEM sort of terrain is to be driven over. Based on the
selected special program, the system optimises
The Terrain Response system is permanently
the vehicle set-up for the prevailing conditions,
active, continuously providing benefits in
providing the optimum in traction, driveability
traction and driveability. These can be further
and vehicle ‘composure’.
enhanced for specific on- and off-road driving
conditions by the selection of special The Terrain Response special programs
programs, using one simple driver interface. automatically bring in changes in vehicle drive
and suspension systems that have until now
been only individually and manually
controllable by the driver.
The suspension and drive systems comprising
AUTO
Terrain Response are:

•
1 2 3
Engine management.
ABC DEF
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
• Gearbox management.
• Intelligent differential control.
• Dynamic stability, traction control and HDC
systems.
• Air suspension.
The system will provide a variable throttle
response, ranging from very cautious for
slippery conditions (where a large pedal
movement has only a small effect on engine
power) to very responsive, for example, for
sand, where engine power is allowed to rise
more quickly.
This further extends the breadth of off-road
capability of Land Rover vehicles. In addition,
Terrain Response offers control of systems that
have previously not been manually controllable.
Note: Since each Terrain Response special
program uses the optimum settings of each
drive component - throttle response,
H6207L suspension, transmission, etc. - relative to the
terrain being driven over, it follows that
changing from one special program to another
brings in a different set of criteria.
200
R
Terrain Response
This means that, for instance, the engine revs The amount of slip allowed in the electronically
produced by the current throttle position might controlled differentials will be optimised
increase or decrease slightly in the new continuously, both from the point of view of
program, or the suspension could change traction and vehicle stability.
height. The changes are not dramatic, but are Depending on the Terrain Response program
noticeable. selected, the control of the differentials will vary
To obtain the maximum benefits from the to provide the optimum settings.
system, it is suggested that you first try it out in Note: Special programs should be engaged
circumstances where any distraction will not pro-actively - before starting to drive in
affect other road users. particular conditions. They are not intended as
Terrain Response is designed to benefit the a means of extracting a vehicle that has been
driver, regardless of the level of off-road driving driven into difficulties.
experience. The enhanced traction system, with The system has been designed to instil
the control of many system parameters through confidence regarding choice of special
one simple driver input, coupled with specific program, despite the fact that conditions
advice from the message centre, will aid drivers associated with each program are distinctly
with limited off-road experience. Additionally, different. However, the vehicle will be very
the system can back-up the skills of capable under all circumstances, even when no
experienced drivers, who will also benefit from special program is selected, as some
the wider performance envelope available sub-systems will re-act to the conditions where
through the special programs. possible. In case of any uncertainties about the
Using Terrain Response most appropriate special program selection, it
will be best to leave the system in Terrain
The Terrain Response system is always active
Response General program until terrain
and can not be switched off. When the vehicle
conditions become more distinct and a
is started the system will normally start in its
program choice can be made with more
General program. Using the correct special
confidence.
program will provide benefits in how the vehicle
can be driven over different surfaces or The system is of particular use when driving
terrains. It is recommended that a special off-road, but, even here, it should be used
program be engaged whenever driving pro-actively and not be used as a means of
conditions could become difficult. retrieving control.
Depending on the terrain, it may be beneficial If a Terrain Response special program has been
for the automatic transmission to change gear selected, then the automatic transmission can
under different speed and load conditions. Each be left in ‘D’. If descending a slippery slope,
special program will provide the most CommandShift ‘1’ or ‘2’ should be considered.
appropriate gear-shift points for the terrain,
including the most appropriate gear to set off in
(i.e., second, HIGH range, or third, LOW range,
in Grass-Gravel-Snow or first, low range, when
in Rock Crawl).
201
L
Terrain Response
WARNING Whether the HDC or ride height options are
being brought in automatically by the system,
When towing, the automatic vehicle height
or manually by the driver, the changes of state
rise associated with using the system in low
will be confirmed through the message display
range will be automatically prevented by the
and by the individual system information
system. This will be indicated by a text
indicators. Use of the system in the special
message. However, this function relies on the
programs, particularly in low range, may
fitting of a Land-Rover approved towing
prompt some driving advice and warnings as
electrical socket. Failure to fit a Land-Rover
well as additional information to be displayed
approved towing electrical socket or to follow
on the message centre.
these guidelines may lead to the vehicle
being raised to off-road height even with a Note: Automatic gearbox gear selection can be
trailer attached. overridden by using the CommandShift
function on the gearbox to lock the vehicle in a
particular gear.
Driver over-ride options
All systems will be set to optimum parameters
for the terrain conditions reflected in the choice
of control program. Two of the systems
controlled by Terrain Response:
• Air Suspension.
• Hill Descent Control.
May also be operated independently by the
driver.
In some special programs, the Terrain
Response system will switch on HDC and in low
range the system will automatically move the
suspension to off-road height.
WARNING
This height increase will start regardless of
whether the vehicle is moving or not.
Both the HDC and ride height automatic

selections can be cancelled by the driver at any
time. Conversely, if HDC or a specific ride
height has not been automatically selected by
the system, the driver can always choose to
operate it as normal at any time.
202
R
Terrain Response
Operation
H6209G
A rotary knob just behind the gear lever is

rotated to select the required special program.
When the selector reaches either end of the
selection range, it can be turned further, but H6211G
doing so has no effect.
If the Mud-Ruts, Sand or Rock Crawl special
In addition to the Terrain Response General
programs are selected when the ignition is
setting, four special programs are available:
switched off, then the system will remember for
• Grass/gravel/snow (also includes ice). approximately six hours which program was
• Mud/ruts. selected, and return to that program once the
• Sand. ignition is switched back on.
• Rock Crawl. The system indicates, via the message centre,
that the previously selected special program is
When the ignition is turned on, the graphics
still selected. After more than six hours, the
around the control knob are illuminated, with
system will automatically revert back to the
the active program highlighted in amber. The
General program (Special programs off).
brightness of the graphics night illumination is
controlled as part of the instrument’s
illumination control; the brightness of the
amber lighting is high or low depending on the
use of the vehicle’s headlamps.
If a Special Program is active, the Special
Program symbol will also be displayed on the
instrument pack message centre.
203
L
Terrain Response
Terrain Response General Grass-Gravel-Snow
When the Terrain Response Use this program for surfaces
special programs are off, the where the underlying base is fairly
system will be in its General firm but a coating of other material
program. This will be indicated by the above gives a tendency to slip. The coating can be
symbol being displayed briefly on the message water, slime, grass, snow or loose gravel, shale
centre. Sub-systems will adapt to the prevailing or pebbles, or even a thin coating of sand. This
terrain conditions and select control settings program should also be selected in icy
based on the conditions sensed. conditions.
This program setting is compatible with all on- In this special program the Terrain Response
and off-road terrain conditions. Normal systems will select settings to give the best
conditions in which it is not necessary to select traction, handling and driveability for
a specific program include driving on surfaces predominantly slippery conditions. Hill Descent
that closely match a hard road surface. Dry Control (see HILL DESCENT CONTROL, 189)
cobbles, Tarmac or even wooden planks are all will be engaged automatically in low range, but
included in the scope which consists of hard can be manually de-selected.
supportive surfaces with no loose coating of In slippery conditions it is often beneficial to
water, dust or similar material. start off in a higher gear than usual, for
It is recommended that a special program be example, second gear in HIGH range or third
de-selected once the specific conditions for its gear in LOW range.
use no longer prevail. This is done by turning For use of the vehicle with snow chains fitted,
the selector knob back to the General program see SNOW CHAINS, 263.
position.
Note: When in deep snow, if the vehicle is
When a special program is de-selected, all struggling for forward traction or is stuck, then
vehicle systems will be returned to their normal switching off Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
control settings. The one exception is HDC, may be an advantage. If DSC is switched off,
which will remain active if it was manually then it must be switched back on as soon as the
selected previously. Also, as a precaution, the difficulty is overcome.
vehicle will change from raised to normal ride
height only when moving.
204
R
Terrain Response
Mud-Ruts Rock Crawl
Use this program when traversing Use this program to cross wet or
ground that is not only muddy or dry, solid, unyielding ground, such
deeply rutted but possibly soft and as clusters of boulders, which
uneven to the point of demanding maximum demands high levels of road-wheel
axle displacement. This unevenness can also be displacement and careful vehicle control. This
that brought about by sizeable wooden debris program would also be used for crossing river
in the form of roots, brushwood, small logs, beds strewn with large rock features
etc. submerged below water.
This acts like the previous program, except that Unlike the other options, Rock Crawl is only
it selects settings for the individual systems selectable in LOW range. If selection is
that optimise traction and driveability for attempted in HIGH range, the special program
muddy/rutted driving conditions, with driver selection will NOT be accepted and the driver
over-ride options as before. The program is will be prompted to select LOW range. This
available in HIGH and LOW range, but LOW special program will utilise system control
range is recommended. settings to optimise the vehicle suspension and
It is anticipated that this program will usually be traction system for the conditions, which are
used in low range. If not, the driver will be likely to require extreme suspension
prompted to consider selecting low range. If the articulation and good low-Speed Control.
Mud-Ruts program and low range are selected When a special program requires increased air
together, the vehicle’s ride height will be raised suspension height, the system will
automatically. automatically select it, unless it suspects that a
trailer is attached because an electric load is
Sand
seen on the trailer socket.
Use this program to drive on soft
and predominantly dry, yielding A message will be displayed on the message
sandy ground, such as dry centre.
beaches, dunes and sand deserts. Also Caution: Selection of a wholly inappropriate
consider using this program for deep gravel. special program for the prevailing terrain
The Sand special program uses the control conditions will not endanger the driver or
settings and software logic best suited to immediately damage the vehicle. However, if
driving on sand, with the driver-override option continued, such an action will impair the
as before. vehicle’s response to those conditions and
will reduce the durability of the suspension
In instances where the sand is damp or wet and and drive systems.
soggy, the conditions are better addressed by
the use of mud/ruts special program.
Where the sand is extremely soft and dry and of
a depth that allows the wheels to sink well into
it, there may be additional benefit in switching
off the Dynamic Stability Control, see
Deactivating DSC operation, 187.
205
L
Terrain Response
Inappropriate special program selection MESSAGES
If an inappropriate special program is Messages relating to the Terrain Response
attempted to be selected - such as choosing system are displayed on the vehicle’s message
Rock Crawl while in HIGH range - the symbol of centre.
that program will flash amber, an audio warning
For an explanation of those messages, see
will sound, and the instrument pack message
MAIN MESSAGE CENTRE, 84.
centre will advise that the chosen special
program is unavailable and will suggest
corrective action to be taken.
If, after 60 seconds, the requirements have not
been met, the warnings will cease and the
message centre will show which program
remains active.
Should the system become partly inoperable
for any reason, it may not be possible to select
certain special programs and a warning will be
given when selection of an affected program is
attempted. If the system should become totally
inoperable, all of the control program symbols
will be switched off and the message centre will
display a text message.
The air suspension system provides an
automatic levelling function (see AIR
SUSPENSION, 192). In circumstances where
the system is used in LOW range, it is most
likely that mobility and vehicle composure
would benefit from increased ground clearance.
206
R
Towing
Towing
H6213G
TOWING This is particularly important when towing twin

The torque ranges of Land Rover engines allow axle trailers!
maximum-weight loads to be pulled smoothly • The trailer should be level with the ground
from standstill and reduce gear changing on when loaded.
hills or rough terrain. The use of LOW range is • The height of the drawbar hitch point
recommended when manoeuvring heavy should be set so that the trailer is level
trailers, or performing hill starts, to avoid when connected to the loaded vehicle.
excessive clutch wear.
Note: Air suspension vehicles should be set
WARNING with the engine running.
It is recommended that you fit only towing Points to remember:
accessories approved by Land Rover.
• When calculating the laden weight of the
DO NOT use lashing eyes or vehicle recovery trailer, remember to include the weight of
towing eyes to tow a trailer or caravan. the trailer PLUS the load.
• The recommended trailer nose weight plus
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure that the
the combined weight of the vehicle's
towing vehicle and trailer/caravan are loaded
load-carrying area and rear seat
and balanced so that the combination is stable
passengers must never exceed the
when in motion. When preparing your vehicle
specified maximum rear axle load (see
for towing, pay attention to any instructions
TOWING WEIGHTS & DIMENSIONS, 318).
provided by the trailer/caravan manufacturer as
well as to the information that follows. • Before balancing the combination on
vehicles equipped with air suspension,
Balancing the combination ensure that:
To ensure optimum stability, it is essential that All doors are closed.
the trailer adopts a level aspect. In other words,
the trailer must be level with the ground, with The engine is running.
the towing hitch and trailer drawbar set at the On-road ride height is selected.
same height (note the illustration at the top of This ensures that the towing hitch is at the
the page). correct height.
207
L
Towing
• Where the load can be divided between Vehicle weights
trailer and tow vehicle, loading more When loading a vehicle to its maximum (gross
weight into the vehicle will generally vehicle weight), ensure that axle loadings do
improve the stability of the combination. not exceed the permitted maximum values. It is
• Towing regulations vary from country to your responsibility to limit the vehicle load in
country. Always ensure national such a way that neither the maximum axle loads
regulations governing towing weights and nor the gross vehicle weight are exceeded -
speed limits are observed (refer to the TOWING WEIGHTS & DIMENSIONS, 318.
relevant national motoring organisation for
information). The vehicle’s maximum
WARNING
permissible towed weight refers to its In the interest of safety, the gross vehicle
design limitations and NOT to any specific weight, maximum rear axle weight,
territorial restriction (see TOWING maximum trailer weight and tow hitch load
WEIGHTS & DIMENSIONS, 318). (nose weight) must not be exceeded.
Note: When towing do not exceed 100 km/h
(60 mph), or 80 km/h (50 mph) when the Trailer socket
temporary spare wheel* is in use, see WHEELS The vehicle’s electrical system is configured to
& TYRES, 313. support all towing requirements and the
electrical socket fitted will comply with legal
Gear range selection requirements for the specific territory.
To avoid overheating the gearbox, it is not All towing circuits are independently fused in a
advisable to tow heavy trailer loads at speeds of satellite fusebox located in the lower loadspace
less than 32 km/h (21 mph) using the main trim panel, see Tow hitch fuses, 294.
gearbox in HIGH range. Select LOW range
instead.
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Tyre pressures: Increase rear pressures of towing vehicle to those for ‘Maximum gross
vehicle weight’ conditions, see WHEELS & TYRES, 313. Ensure trailer/caravan
tyres are at recommended pressures.
Nose weight: If the vehicle is loaded to the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW), the nose weight is
limited to 150 kg (330 lb). If a greater nose weight is necessary (up to 250 kg
(550 lb) maximum), vehicle load should be reduced to ensure the GVW and
rear axle weights are not exceeded - see TOWING WEIGHTS & DIMENSIONS,
318, for further information.
Breakaway cable A breakaway cable or secondary coupling MUST be attached. If the
or secondary trailer/caravan is fitted with brakes, it is usual for an attached breakaway cable
coupling to operate the brakes in the event of the coupling becoming detached. See
your trailer manufacturer’s literature. If your trailer does not have a breakaway
cable, a secondary coupling must be attached. Use a suitable point on the
towing bracket to securely attach the coupling. It is not advisable to loop
cables or couplings around the neck of the tow ball as they could slide off.
208
R
Towing
TOW BAR Detachable tow bar stowage
Your vehicle is fitted with a towing housing The tow bar is stowed under an access hatch in
which will accept a detachable tow bar. the rear loadspace floor.
H6215G
H6218G
209
L
Towing
Detachable tow bar
1 4
2 3
H6220G
Fitting the detachable tow bar
WARNING 2. The tow bar can only be installed when the

green locking lever is in the unlocked
The tow bar is heavy. Care must be taken
position.
when handling it.
3. Insert the tow bar into the mounting and
1. Remove the protective cover from the tow push firmly upwards until the tow bar
bar mounting. ‘locks’ into position.
Note: The protective cover should be stowed in 4. The red marker should be completely
the tow bar stowage area, while the tow bar is covered by the green locking lever.
installed. 5. A key is provided to prevent theft from the
vehicle. Turn the key anticlockwise to lock
the tow bar. Remove the key and store in a
safe place.
210
R
Towing
WARNING
When handling the tow bar, hold the bottom of
the component. Locking into position occurs
automatically and causes the locking lever to
rotate under spring pressure.
The tow bar must be locked in position before

towing. The tow bar can only be locked if it is
installed correctly into the tow bar mounting.
It is advised that the tow bar be removed and
stored within the vehicle stowage when not in
use.
211
L
Towing
Removing the tow bar
2
3
H6222G
WARNING 3. Carefully lower the tow bar and place it in

its stowage area and fully secure it.
The tow bar is heavy. Care must be taken
when handling it. 4. Replace the protective towing cover in the
tow bar mounting. Press the bottom of the
1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to cover to fix it in position.
unlock the tow bar.
2. To remove the tow bar, pull the handle
outwards and rotate the handle
anticlockwise until a click is heard. The
marker on the handle should show red.
212
R
Towing Eyes
Towing Eyes
TOWING EYES
WARNING
The towing eyes at the front and rear of the
vehicle are designed for on-road vehicle
recovery purposes only and must NOT be used
to tow a trailer or caravan.
Front Towing Eye

A single towing eye, set behind a removable
panel in the lower front bumper, is provided for
on-road recovery.
Before driving off-road, remove the panel from
the lower front bumper as a precaution against
accidental loss.
Removing the panel
Rotate each of the nine fasteners through 90o
with a coin (or something similar) to loosen the
cover. Lower the top edge and then pull the
cover forward to remove it.
H6226G
213
L
Towing Eyes
Refitting the panel Rear Towing Eye
Offer up the panel and ensure that the two lugs The towing eye provided at the rear of the
on the bottom edge engage with the holes in the vehicle can be used to tow your vehicle, or for
body panel. you to tow another vehicle, in recovery
Tighten the nine fasteners by turning each situations.
clockwise through 90o.
H6231G
H6227G
214
R
Towing Eyes
Removing the rear cover Refitting the rear cover
Rotate each of the two fasteners through 90o Offer up the cover and ensure that the four lugs
with a coin (or something similar) to release the on the top edge engage with the holes in the
lower edge. The cover can then be rotated to body panel.
release the hooks at the top. Tighten the nine fasteners by turning each
clockwise through 90o.
H6230G
H6229G
215
L
Towing the Vehicle

TOWING FOR RECOVERY 1. Secure the towing attachment from the
Towing the Vehicle
recovery vehicle to the front towing eye

Caution: Under no circumstances must your
(see TOWING EYES, 213).
vehicle be towed with only two wheels in
contact with the ground. It must be towed with 2. With the parkbrake applied, insert the
all four wheels on the ground, recovered onto starter key and turn it to position ‘II’.
a trailer, or have a combined wheel lift and 3. Apply the foot brake and place the auto
towing dolly arrangement to lift it clear of the selector lever into the ‘neutral’ position.
ground. 4. Turn the starter switch to position ‘l’. Do
Most vehicle recovery specialists will load your not turn the starter switch to position ‘0’.
vehicle onto a trailer - this is the recommended 5. If required, the starter switch may be
method. However, if it is necessary to recover turned to position ‘II’, to operate the brake
the vehicle by towing with all four wheels on the lamps and direction indicators.
ground, use the following procedure:
6. Release the parkbrake before towing the
Towing the vehicle on four wheels vehicle.
Caution: ALWAYS adhere to the following
WARNING
procedure when towing the vehicle with all
DO NOT remove the key or turn the starter
four wheels on the ground. Failure to do so
switch to position ‘0’ while the vehicle is in
could result in unintended vehicle movement
motion.
or unanticipated vehicle conditions.
Without the engine running, the brake servo
When preparing to tow the vehicle on four
and power steering pump cannot provide
wheels, it is essential that neutral is selected
assistance; greater effort will therefore be
on the transmission. Before selecting neutral,
required to operate the brake pedal and turn
ensure that the parkbrake is applied and
the steering wheel. Longer stopping
properly secured.
distances will also be experienced.
Note: Your vehicle has permanent four-wheel
drive and is fitted with a steering lock. The If the above conditions are met, the vehicle may
following procedure must be carried out only be towed for a distance of 50 km (30
carefully to prevent damage to the vehicle. miles) at a maximum speed of 50 km/h (30
Leaving the starter switch in position ‘I’ or ‘II’ mph).
for extended periods may drain the vehicle If the gearbox cannot be set in neutral, the
battery. vehicle must not be towed under any
circumstances.
If the rear electronic differential has failed
locked, the vehicle must not be towed under
any circumstances.
216
R
Towing the Vehicle

After towing on four wheels LASHING EYES
After towing, perform the following steps: Pairs of lashing eyes are fixed to the underside
1. Apply the parkbrake. of the vehicle - at the front (to the rear of the
2. Turn the starter switch to position ‘ll’ and front wheels) and at the rear (either side of the
apply the foot brake. towbar attachment bracket). DO NOT secure
lashing hooks or trailer fixings to any other part
3. Place the auto selector lever in the Park of the vehicle.
position.
4. Turn the starter switch to position ‘0’.
5. Remove the towing attachment and replace
the panel in the front bumper.
H6232G
217
L
Towing the Vehicle

Caution: Once the vehicle is loaded onto the
trailer and if the vehicle electronics are
operational, the Electronic Air Suspension
(EAS) must be set to Access height. This
should be done BEFORE securing the vehicle
to the trailer.
H6233G
Note: The front and rear lashing eyes are for

lashing only and must NOT be used for towing.
218
R
Load Carrying
Load Carrying
ROOF RACKS
A range of roof rack systems are available as
Land Rover approved accessories. For further
information about roof rack systems approved
for use with your vehicle and advice as to which
system would suit your requirements best,
please consult your Land Rover
Always observe the following precautions:
• The MAXIMUM load for approved roof rack
systems is 75 kg (165 lb) for normal road
use and 50 kg (110 lb) off-road. The above
weights include the mass of the roof rack
system.
• Only fit a roof rack that have been designed
for your vehicle. If in doubt, consult your
• A loaded roof rack can reduce the stability
of the vehicle, particularly when cornering
and encountering cross winds.
• All loads should be evenly distributed, side
to side, with any weight bias towards the
front of the roof rack. system.
• Ensure all loads are secured within the
periphery of the roof rack system.
• Check to ensure the roof rack and load are
secure after 50 km (30 miles) of any
journey.
• Driving off-road with a loaded roof rack is
not recommended. If it is necessary to
stow luggage on the roof rack while driving
off-road, all loads must be removed before
traversing side slopes.
219
L
Front Lighting Systems

XENON/HALOGEN LIGHTING*
A
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
The headlamps can be either:
• a halogen high/low beam main lamp with a
‘fill-in’ high beam halogen lamp alongside
• a xenon bi-functional (high/low beam) with
a ‘fill-in’ high beam halogen lamp
alongside, or
• an Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
AFS is a new lighting system designed to give
the driver improved visibility under varying
driving conditions. It has two main
components: a position-controllable headlamp
unit and a static lamp.
A. shows the light spread of a vehicle not
fitted with AFS
B
B. shows the light spread of a vehicle fitted
with AFS
H6235L
220
R

Bi-functional xenon projector units
The main light source consists of bi-functional
(high and low beam) xenon projector units,
with a ‘fill-in’ high beam halogen lamp
alongside.
The projector units can be swivelled left or right
to improve light spread on bends in the road.
They also react dynamically in the vertical plane
to the vehicle’s braking or acceleration to
maximise headlamp performance.
These units operate when the engine is running
and the master lighting switch is in position 3.
They will also operate with the master lighting
switch in position 4 (Auto)*, if the ambient light
has fallen below a preset level.
The system takes inputs from the vehicle’s road
speed, steering angle, and direction indicators
to determine the amount of horizontal swivel.
The amount of swivel is highest at low -
manoeuvring - speeds, and reduces as speed
increases.
At speeds up to 30 km/h (18 mph), only the unit
on the inside of the turn swivels.
If reverse gear is selected, the lamps return to
the central position and the unit’s swivelling
capability is disabled unless the direction
indicators are operating.
When the engine is started, the headlamps can
be seen to swivel as they go through a
self-calibration for a few seconds.
221
L

Static bending lamps
Additional lighting comes from the A
cornering/static bending lamps which have a
beam set to 45o outward from the centre line of
the vehicle.
These lamps broaden the beam of the
headlamps when cornering during normal night
driving.
The system switches on the lamp if it has
received an input from the vehicle’s direction
indicator. As the system is ignition-based, the
lamps will not stay on even if the vehicle is
parked with the direction indicator lever in the
operating position.
Only the lamp on the same side as the operating
direction indicator comes on.
Operating the direction indicators will also
activate the relevant lamp. B
If reverse gear is selected, the lamps return to
the central position and the unit’s swivelling
capability is disabled unless the direction
indicators are operating.
A. shows the light spread of a vehicle not
fitted with AFS
B. shows the light spread of a vehicle fitted
with AFS
H6237L
222
R
On-road Driving
On-road Driving
WARNING POWER-ASSISTED STEERING

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher Note: Power assistance is dependent on the
roll-over rate than other types of vehicles. engine running. If the engine is not running, a
Since these vehicles are designed to be much greater effort will be required to steer the
operated off-road, these vehicles have a vehicle.
higher ground clearance and hence a higher
centre of gravity. Such a feature has been WARMING UP
associated with an increased risk of vehicle In the interests of fuel economy, it is advisable
roll-over. An advantage associated with to drive the vehicle straight away, remembering
higher ground clearance vehicles is a better that harsh acceleration or labouring the engine
view of the road, allowing the driver to before the normal operating temperature has
anticipate problems. Another factor shown to been reached can damage the engine.
significantly increase roll-over risk is When the engine is cold, engine idle speeds will
unauthorized vehicle modifications such as be faster than normal. Under these
fitting incorrect specification tyres (see circumstances, use the foot brake to control the
WHEELS & TYRES, 313), oversize tyres, body vehicle until the engine is warm and running at
lifting, incorrect springs/dampers, incorrect normal speed, and be aware of the need to take
vehicle loading/trailer towing. additional care when manoeuvring the vehicle.
However, on-road crash data also indicates
that driver behaviour is a greater factor than a
VEHICLE HEIGHT
high centre of gravity in determining a Caution: The overall height of your vehicle
vehicle's overall roll-over rate. The single exceeds that of ordinary passenger cars.
most effective driver behaviour that can Always be aware of the height of your vehicle
reduce the risk of injury or death in all crashes and check the available headroom before
including roll-over, is to ALWAYS WEAR driving through low entrances. This is
YOUR SEAT BELT and to properly restrain all particularly important if the vehicle is fitted
child passengers in the rear seat in an with a roof rack or if a sunroof is open.
appropriate child safety seat. In a rollover
crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a
seat belt.
223
L
On-road Driving
Other measures that can reduce the risk of • Many vehicle roll-overs occur when a
injury and death from vehicle crashes and driver attempts to bring a vehicle back onto
roll-over are: the road after some or all of the wheels drift
• Limit speed. Posted speed limits should onto the shoulder of the road, especially
never be exceeded, and you should always when the shoulder is unpaved. If you find
drive below these limits whenever traffic, yourself in such a situation, do not initiate
weather, road or other conditions dictate. any sharp or abrupt steering and/or braking
Always use your common sense and good manoeuvres to re-enter the roadway.
judgement. Instead, let the vehicle slow down as much
as safely possible before attempting to
• Take curves at reasonable speeds, avoiding
re-enter the roadway and keep your wheels
unnecessary braking.
as straight as possible while re-entering the
• Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic, road roadway.
and weather conditions. Avoid risk-taking
behaviour such as following too close,
rapid lane changing or abrupt manoeuvres.
• Assume that pedestrians or other drivers
are going to make mistakes. Anticipate
what they might do. Be ready for their
mistakes.
• Avoid distractions such as cellular phone
calling, reading, eating, drinking or
reaching for items on the floor.
• Before changing lanes, check your mirrors
and flash your turn signal lights.
• Always leave room for unexpected events
such as sudden braking.
• Never operate your vehicle when you have
consumed alcohol, are sleepy or fatigued
or have taken any medication that affects
judgement, reflexes or alertness.
224
R
On-road Driving
FUEL ECONOMY BREAKDOWN SAFETY
Fuel consumption is influenced by two major If a breakdown occurs while travelling:
factors: • Wherever possible, consistent with road
• How your vehicle is maintained. safety and traffic conditions, the vehicle
• How you drive your vehicle. should be moved off the main
thoroughfare, preferably onto the shoulder
To obtain optimum fuel economy, it is essential
as far as possible. If a breakdown occurs
that your vehicle is maintained in accordance
on a motorway, pull well over to the inside
with the manufacturer's service schedule.
of the hard shoulder.
Items such as the condition of the air cleaner
• Switch on hazard lights.
element, tyre pressures and wheel alignment
will have a significant effect on fuel • If possible, position a warning triangle or a
consumption. But, above all, the way in which flashing amber light at an appropriate
you drive is most important. The following hints distance from the vehicle to warn other
may help you to obtain better value from your traffic of the breakdown, (note the legal
motoring: requirements of some countries).
• Avoid unnecessary, short, start-stop • Consider evacuating passengers through
journeys. the doors facing away from traffic, to a safe
area away from the vehicle, as a precaution
• Avoid fast starts by accelerating gently and
in case your vehicle is accidentally struck
smoothly from rest.
by another one.
• Do not drive in the lower gears for longer
than necessary.
• Decelerate gently and avoid sudden and
heavy braking.
• Anticipate obstructions and adjust your
speed accordingly well in advance.
• When stationary in traffic, select neutral to
improve fuel economy and air conditioning
performance.
225
L
226
R
Off-road Driving
BASIC OFF-ROAD TECHNIQUES Safety Tips
Off-road Driving
These basic driving techniques are an • Always wear a seat belt for personal
introduction to the art of off-road driving and do protection in all driving situations.
not necessarily provide the information needed • Keep all windows closed during off-road
to successfully cope with every single off-road driving to prevent ingress of dirt and water
situation, including off-road recovery and to prevent tree branches from injuring
techniques. occupants.
We strongly recommend that owners who • DO NOT drive if the fuel level is low -
intend to drive off-road frequently should seek undulating ground and steep inclines could
as much additional information and practical cause fuel starvation to the engine and
experience as possible. consequent damage to the catalytic
Before driving off-road it is important that you converter and fuel pump.
check the condition of the wheels and tyres and • As a precaution against accidental loss,
that the tyre pressures are correct. Worn or remove the front and rear towing eye cover
incorrectly inflated tyres will adversely affect panels before driving off-road, see
the performance, stability and safety of the TOWING EYES, 213.
vehicle.
• To prevent damage, and improve departure
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with a angles, remove and stow any towing
temporary spare wheel* and you need to fit it equipment fitted to the vehicle, see TOW
while driving off-road, then you must proceed BAR, 209.
with extra caution.
• If the vehicle is fitted with a full-size spare
It is good practice to anticipate possible wheel, remove it from its underbody
problems and be prepared for them. Extra mounting position and secure it in the
equipment should include, at the very least, a loadspace area
shovel, a tow rope, local maps and a torch.
WARNING
Off-road driving can be hazardous.
• DO NOT take unnecessary risks and be
prepared for emergencies at all times.
• Familiarise yourself with the
recommended driving techniques in
order to minimise risks to yourself, your
vehicle AND your passengers.
227
L
Off-road Driving
Gear selection These gears are also the most appropriate for
For automatic transmission vehicles with the manual transmission when negotiating severe
main selector lever set at ‘D’, the gearbox descents.
automatically provides the correct gear for the While descending a slope (either forwards or in
appropriate gear range selected (HIGH or ‘R’ - reverse) it should be remembered that
LOW). For greater vehicle control through gear HDC and the engine will aim to provide
selection, manual CommandShift mode is sufficient braking effort to control the rate of
recommended. descent, and that the brakes should not
For manual transmission vehicles, select the normally need to be applied.
most appropriate combination of main gearbox Accelerating
and transfer gear ratios to allow smooth and
Use the accelerator with care - any sudden
controlled progress without the need to slip the
surge of power may induce wheel spin and,
clutch.
therefore, invoke unnecessary operation of
HIGH range gears should be used whenever traction control, or in extreme conditions could
possible - only change to LOW range when lead to loss of control of the vehicle.
ground conditions become very difficult.
Survey the ground before driving
Braking
Before negotiating difficult terrain, it is wise to
As far as possible, vehicle speed should be carry out a preliminary survey on foot. This will
controlled through correct gear selection and minimise the risk of your vehicle getting into
the use of Hill Descent Control (HDC). difficulty through a previously unnoticed
Application of the brake pedal should be kept to hazard.
a minimum. In fact, if the correct gear and HDC
Caution: Do not attempt to drive the vehicle
have been selected, braking will be largely
continuously at angles greater than 35o nose
unnecessary.
up or down, or 35o side to side. It is
If the brake pedal is depressed when HDC is acceptable to drive up or down at angles
active, HDC is overridden and the brakes will between 35o and 45o but only momentarily.
perform as normal. If the brake pedal is then
released, HDC will recommence operating, at
reduced speed as long as there is wheel
rotation.
Use of engine for braking
Before descending steep slopes, stop the
vehicle at least its length before the descent,
engage LOW range and then select HDC. Use of
manual CommandShift gear selection to limit
the transmission to lower gears will also
increase engine braking. Select ‘1’ or ‘2’ LOW
range, depending on the severity of the
descent.
228
R
Off-road Driving
Steering Electronic air suspension
Select ‘Off-road height’, to increase
approach/departure angles and ground
clearance (see AIR SUSPENSION, 192).
Loss of traction
If the vehicle is immobilised due to loss of
wheel grip, the following hints could be of
value:
• Remove obstacles rather than forcing the
vehicle to cross them.
• Clear clogged tyre treads.
• Reverse as far as possible, then attempt an
increased speed approach - additional
momentum may overcome the obstacle.
• Brushwood, sacking or any similar material
placed in front of the tyres may improve
H6239L tyre grip.
CD Autochanger
WARNING
Playing CDs while negotiating arduous off-road
DO NOT hold the steering wheel with your
terrain is not recommended. Severe jolting of
thumbs inside the rim - a sudden ‘Kick’ of the
the vehicle may disturb the operation of the
wheel as the vehicle negotiates a rut or
autochanger, causing the disc to ‘jump’ or
boulder could seriously injure them. ALWAYS
‘skip’.
grip the wheel on the outside of the rim (as
shown) when traversing uneven ground.
Ground clearance
Don't forget to allow for ground clearance
beneath the vehicle suspension components
and under the front and rear bumpers. Note
also that there are other parts of the vehicle
which may come into contact with the ground -
take care not to ground the vehicle.
Ground clearance is particularly important at
the bottom of steep slopes, or where wheel ruts
are unusually deep and where sudden changes
in the slope of the ground are experienced.
ALWAYS attempt to avoid obstacles that may
foul the vehicle.
229
L
Off-road Driving Techniques

BEFORE DRIVING OFF ROAD • In CommandShift ‘automatic’ mode select

Before venturing off-road, it is absolutely ‘D’.
essential that inexperienced drivers become In ‘manual’ mode, select the highest
fully familiar with the vehicle's controls, in practical gear.
particular the transfer gear switch, • To avoid wheelspin, use the MINIMUM
CommandShift, Hill Descent Control (HDC) and throttle necessary to get the vehicle
the Terrain Response system, and also study moving.
the off-road driving techniques described on
• Starting on an incline or in soft ground or
this and the following pages.
sand may be difficult. Always park on a firm
It is advisable to carry out a visual inspection of level area, or with the vehicle facing
the vehicle (tyres, underside etc) prior to going downhill.
off road. Ensure that all of the fluid levels are
• If forward motion is lost, avoid excessive
correct, see Maintenance, 239.
use of the throttle - this may dig the vehicle
Driving on Soft Surfaces & Soft Sand into the sand. Clear sand from around the
The ideal technique for driving on soft surfaces tyres and ensure that the vehicle underside
(dry sand for example) requires the vehicle to is not bearing on the sand before again
be kept moving at all times - soft sand causes attempting to move.
excessive drag on the wheels resulting in a • If the wheels have sunk, use an air bag
rapid loss of motion once driving momentum is lifting device to raise the vehicle, and then
lost. For this reason, gear changing (especially build up sand under the tyres so that the
on manual transmission vehicles) should be vehicle is again on level ground. If a restart
avoided. is still not possible, place sand mats or
It is generally advisable to de-activate DSC (see ladders beneath the tyres.
DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC), 187),
then select the highest practical gear (using
CommandShift in ‘automatic’ vehicles) to
reduce the risk of wheelspin and remain in that
gear until a firm surface is reached. It is
generally advisable to use LOW range, as this
will enable you to accelerate through worsening
conditions without the risk of being unable to
restart.
In some conditions, to maximise traction, it
may be beneficial to de-activate DSC, see
DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC), 187.
Stopping the vehicle on soft ground, in sand
or on an incline
If you do stop the vehicle, remember:
• Engage the Sand special program and
ensure that the gearshift is in ‘D’.
230
R

Driving on Slippery Surfaces Climbing Steep Slopes
• Drive away using the MINIMUM throttle ALWAYS follow the fall line of the slope -
possible. travelling diagonally could encourage the
• In CommandShift, select the highest vehicle to slide broadside down the slope.
practical gear. Caution: Do not attempt to drive the vehicle
• Use the appropriate Special Program in continuously at angles greater than 35o nose
Terrain Response system. up or down, or 35o side to side. It is
acceptable to drive up or down at angles
• Drive slowly at all times, keeping braking to between 35o and 45o but only momentarily.
a minimum and avoiding violent
movements of the steering wheel. • In Terrain Response, use an appropriate
special program depending upon the type
Driving on Rough Tracks of surface.
Although rough tracks can sometimes be • Steep climbs will usually require LOW gear
negotiated in HIGH range, on very rough tracks, range and the highest practical gear,
engage LOW range to enable a steady, low selected with CommandShift in automatic
speed to be maintained without constant use of transmission vehicles.
the brake pedal, or slipping the clutch on
• In Terrain Response special program has
vehicles with manual transmission.
been selected, then the transmission can
Use the appropriate Special Program in Terrain be left in ‘D’.
Response system.
• Select HDC, if not already selected, in case
there is a need to reverse down the slope.
• Use sufficient speed in the highest practical
gear to take advantage of the vehicle’s
momentum. However. too high a speed
over a bumpy surface may result in a wheel
lifting, causing the vehicle to lose traction
and stability. In this case, try a slower
approach.
• Traction can also be improved by easing off
the accelerator just before loss of forward
motion.
If the vehicle is unable to complete the climb,
do not attempt to turn it around while on the
slope. Instead, adopt the following procedure to
reverse downhill to the foot of the slope.
231
L

Automatic transmission Descending Steep Slopes
1. Hold the vehicle stationary using the foot
brake.
2. Select ‘N’ (neutral) and restart the engine if
necessary.
3. Select LOW range, if not already selected,
then select ‘R’ (reverse).
4. Slowly release the foot brake and allow the
vehicle to reverse down the slope using
engine braking and HDC to control the rate
of descent.
5. Unless it is necessary to stop the vehicle in
order to negotiate obstructions, DO NOT H6241G
touch the brake pedal during the descent.
6. If the vehicle begins to slide, the limits of WARNING
adhesion have been reached, and it may be Failure to follow these instructions may cause
impossible to maintain the minimum the vehicle to rollover.
speed. Gently press the accelerator pedal
to allow the tyres to regain grip, then gently • Bring the vehicle to a stop at least one
release the accelerator pedal vehicle’s length before the start of the
When the vehicle is back on level ground and slope.
safety permits, a faster approach may enable • In Terrain Response, use an appropriate
the slope to be climbed. However, DO NOT take special program depending upon the type
unnecessary risks, if the slope is too difficult to of surface.
climb, find an alternative route. • Select either ‘1’ or ‘2’ (use CommandShift
WARNING on automatic transmissions), depending
DO NOT attempt to reverse down a slope on the severity of the slope. If a Terrain
without the engine running and ensure that Response special program has been
‘R’ (reverse) is selected. Otherwise, HDC and selected, then the automatic transmission
the braking effect of the gearbox will be lost. can be left in ‘D’. If the slope is slippery,
CommandShift ‘1’ or ‘2’ should be
considered.
• Ensure that HDC is selected and drive
forward as slowly as possible.
• Unless it is necessary to stop the vehicle in
order to negotiate obstructions, DO NOT
touch the brake pedal during the descent -
the engine braking and HDC will limit the
speed.
232
R

• If the vehicle begins to slide, the limits of Traversing a Slope
adhesion have been reached, and it may be
impossible to maintain the minimum
speed. Gently press the accelerator pedal
to allow the tyres to regain grip, then gently
release the accelerator pedal.
For vehicles with automatic transmission:
• Once level ground is reached, higher gears
or ‘D’ can be selected as required.
Caution: Do not attempt to drive the vehicle
continuously at angles greater than 35o nose
up or down, or 35o side to side. It is
H6242G
acceptable to drive up or down at angles
between 35o and 45o but only momentarily.
WARNING
Failure to follow these instructions may cause
the vehicle to rollover.
Before crossing a slope ALWAYS observe the

following precautions:
• Check that the ground is firm and not
slippery.
• Check that the wheels on the downhill side
of the vehicle are not likely to drop into
depressions in the ground and that the
‘uphill’ wheels will not run over rocks, tree
roots, or similar obstacles that could
suddenly increase the angle of tilt.
• Ensure that passenger weight is evenly
distributed, that all roof rack luggage is
removed and that all other luggage is
properly secured and stowed as low as
possible. Always remember; any sudden
movement of the load could cause the
vehicle to overturn.
• Rear seat passengers should sit on the
uphill side of the vehicle or, in extreme
conditions, should vacate the vehicle until
the sloping ground has been safely
negotiated.
233
L

Negotiating a ‘V’ Shaped Gully Crossing a Ridge
Observe extreme caution! Steering up either of
the gully walls could cause the side of the
vehicle to be trapped against the opposite gully
wall.
Driving in Existing Wheel Tracks
As far as possible allow the vehicle to steer
itself along the bottom of the ruts and always
keep a light hold of the steering wheel to
prevent it from spinning free. Deactivation of
DSC may help in deep ruts.
Particularly in wet conditions, if the steering H6244G
wheel is allowed to spin free, the vehicle may
Approach at right angles so that both front
appear to be driving straight ahead in the ruts,
wheels cross the ridge together - an angled
but in actual fact (due to the lack of traction
approach could cause stability to be lost
caused by the wet ground) is unknowingly on
through diagonally opposite wheels lifting from
full right or left lock. Then, when level ground is
the ground at the same time.
reached, or if a dry patch of ground is
encountered, the wheels will find traction and
cause the vehicle to suddenly veer to left or
right.
The Terrain Response system displays steering
information while in LOW range and all
programs except General.
234
R

Crossing a Ditch Wading
H6245G
Caution: The maximum advisable wading

depth is normally 600 mm (24 in.), but can be
700 mm (27 in.) (where the vehicle is fitted
with air suspension and operated at Off-road
H6243G Height). Wading at a depth greater than the
Cross ditches at an angle so that three wheels maximum advisable wading depth regularly
always maintain contact with the ground. If a is not recommended.
ditch is approached head on, both front wheels Severe electrical damage may occur if the
will drop into the ditch together, possibly vehicle remains stationary for any length of
resulting in the chassis and front bumper being time when the water level is above the door
trapped on opposite sides of the ditch. If the sills.
severity of terrain makes this inevitable, Before wading, ensure the electronic air
selecting ‘Off-road’ height with the Air suspension* is set to off-road height.
Suspension* to increase clearance between the
ground and the bottom of the vehicle may help. If the water is likely to exceed the maximum
wading depths given above, the following
precautions should be observed:
• Fix a plastic sheet in front of the radiator
grille to prevent water from soaking the
engine and mud from blocking the radiator.
• Ensure that the silt bed beneath the water is
free of obstacles and firm enough to
support the vehicle's weight and provide
sufficient traction.
• Ensure that the engine air intake (located
on the front wings) is clear of the water
level.
• Drive slowly into the water and accelerate
to a speed which causes a bow wave to
form; then maintain that speed.
At all times, keep all the doors fully closed.
235
L

Caution: Do not switch off the engine during After wading
wading. If the engine stalls during wading, • Drive the vehicle a short distance and apply
restart it immediately and, as soon as the foot brake to check that the brakes are
possible, get the vehicle checked by a Land fully effective.
• DO NOT rely on the handbrake to hold the
If, during wading, it is thought that water may vehicle stationary until the brakes have
have entered the engine air intake, switch off thoroughly dried out; in the meantime,
the engine immediately, have the vehicle leave the vehicle parked in ‘P’ (automatic
towed out and delivered to a Land Rover gearboxes) or in gear (manual gearboxes).
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for checking.
• Remove any protective covering from in
Note: If deep wading is to be carried out front of the radiator grille.
regularly, contact your Land Rover
• If the water was particularly muddy, check
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for advice.
any radiator matrix for debris (mud and
leaves) to reduce the risk of overheating.
• If deep water is regularly negotiated, check
all oils for signs of water contamination -
contaminated oil can be identified through
its ‘milky’ appearance. In addition, check
the air filter element for water ingress and
replace if wet - consult a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer if necessary.
• If salt water is frequently negotiated,
thoroughly wash the underbody
components and exposed body panels with
fresh water.
236
R

AFTER DRIVING OFF-ROAD If the vehicle is used regularly in arduous
Before rejoining the public highway, or driving conditions - wading, deep mud, abrasive grit,
at speeds above 40 km/h (24 mph), slurry, etc - the following checks should be
consideration should be given to the following: made:
• Wheels and tyres must be cleaned of mud • Inspect, clean and adjust the park brake
and inspected for damage. after 80 km (50 miles).
• If wheels and tyres are not cleaned • Inspect the park brake pads for wear every
properly, damage to the wheels, tyres, 1500 km (1000 miles) or 100 hours.
braking system and suspension • Check the road wheel speed sensors, brake
components could occur. pads and calipers for abrasive wear every
• Brake discs and calipers should be 1500 km (1000 miles).
examined and any stones or grit removed The air suspension* compressor inlet filter will
that may affect braking or parkbrake need to be replaced more often.
efficiency. If you have any doubts about the condition of
• Inspect the drive belts and pulleys at the any of the above items, consult your Land
front of the engine for damage. Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
• The underside of the vehicle should be Cleaning after off-road driving
checked for damage, especially the Ensure that the vehicle and underside is
suspension air springs, dampers and cleaned soon after off-road driving, taking
drive-shaft boots. particular care to clean areas where mud and
Any debris, packed mud, etc should be debris has compacted.
cleared from the areas around the drive
shaft boots, including the chassis Servicing Requirements
‘potholes’. All rubber components such as Vehicles operated in arduous conditions,
drive shaft boots, steering boots, air particularly on dusty, muddy or wet terrain, and
springs etc should be checked for splits, vehicles undergoing frequent or deep wading
punctures and deformities. conditions will require more frequent servicing.
Contact a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
• Any damage to paint or protective coatings,
Repairer for advice.
should be rectified by a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer as soon as After wading in salt water or driving on sandy
possible. beaches, use a hose to wash the underbody
components and any exposed body panels with
If you have any doubt whether the vehicle has
fresh water. This will help to protect the
been damaged, have the vehicle inspected by a
vehicle's cosmetic appearance and prevent
impairment of park brake efficiency.
237
L
238
R
Maintenance
Maintenance
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE OWNER MAINTENANCE

Regular systematic maintenance is the key to In addition to the routine services and
ensuring the continued reliability and efficiency inspections referred to previously, a number of
of your vehicle. simple checks must be carried out more
Maintenance is the owner's responsibility and frequently. You can carry out these checks
you must ensure that owner maintenance yourself and advice is given on the pages that
operations, oil services, inspections and brake follow.
fluid and coolant changes are carried out when Any significant or sudden drop in fluid levels,
required and according to the manufacturer's or uneven tyre wear, should be reported to a
recommendations. Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer
The routine maintenance requirements for your without delay.
vehicle are shown in the Service Portfolio book. Daily checks
Most of this necessary workshop maintenance
• Operation of lamps, horn, direction
requires specialised knowledge and equipment,
indicators, wipers, washers and warning
and should preferably be entrusted to a Land
indicators.
• Operation of seat belts and brakes.
Service Portfolio
• Look for fluid deposits underneath the
The Service Portfolio book includes a Service vehicle that might indicate a leak.
Record section, which enables a record to be
kept of all the oil services and inspections that Weekly checks
are carried out on the vehicle. This section of • Engine oil level.
the book also provides a facility for the Land
Note: The engine oil level should be checked
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer to record
more frequently if the vehicle is driven for
brake fluid changes.
prolonged periods at high speeds.
Ensure your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
• Brake fluid level.
Repairer signs and stamps the book after each
oil service and inspection. • Power steering fluid level.
• Dynamic Response fluid level.
Brake fluid/component replacement
• Screen washer fluid level.
Brake fluid must be completely renewed every
2 years, regardless of distance travelled. After • Tyre pressures and condition.
6 years (144 000 km) (90 000 miles), all brake • Operate air conditioning*.
hoses should be replaced. All fluid specifications and capacities are shown
Coolant replacement in LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 307.
The engine coolant (antifreeze and water
solution) needs to be replaced every 10 years,
regardless of distance travelled. Your Land
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer will replace
the coolant at the scheduled oil service.
239
L
Maintenance
SAFETY IN THE GARAGE WARNING
Poisonous fluids Under no circumstances should any part of
Fluids used in motor vehicles are poisonous the fuel system be dismantled or replaced by
and should not be consumed or brought into anyone other than a suitably qualified motor
contact with open wounds. These include; vehicle technician. Failure to comply with this
battery acid, antifreeze, brake and power instruction may result in fuel spillage with a
steering fluid, petrol, diesel, engine oil and consequent serious risk of fire.
windscreen washer additives. • DO NOT work beneath the vehicle with the
For your own safety, ALWAYS read and obey all wheel changing jack as the only means of
instructions printed on labels and containers. support.
Used engine oil • Ensure sparks and naked lights are kept
Prolonged contact with engine oil may cause away from the engine compartment.
serious skin disorders, including dermatitis and • Wear protective clothing, including,
cancer of the skin. ALWAYS wash thoroughly where practicable, gloves made from an
after contact. impervious material.
It is illegal to pollute drains, water • Remove metal wrist bands and jewellery
courses or soil. Use authorised waste before working in the engine
disposal sites to dispose of used oil and compartment.
toxic chemicals. • DO NOT allow tools or metal parts of the
vehicle to make contact with the battery
WARNING
leads or terminals.
Cooling fans may continue to operate after the
engine is switched off. When the engine is • NEVER leave the engine running in an
hot, the cooling fans may also COMMENCE unventilated area - exhaust gases are
operating after the engine is switched off and poisonous and extremely dangerous.
continue operating for up to 10 minutes. Keep
clear of all fans while working in the engine
compartment.
• Keep your hands and clothing away from
drive belts and pulleys.
• If the vehicle has been driven recently,
DO NOT touch exhaust and cooling
system components until the engine has
cooled.
• DO NOT touch electrical leads or
components while the engine is running,
or with the starter switch turned on.
240
R
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL DRIVING IN ARDUOUS CONDITIONS
Your vehicle is fitted with various items of Special operation conditions
emission and evaporative control equipment
When a vehicle is operated in extremely
designed to meet specific territorial
arduous conditions, more frequent attention
requirements. You should be aware that
must be paid to servicing requirements.
unauthorised replacement, modification or
tampering with this equipment by an owner or For example: if your vehicle experiences deep
repair shop may be unlawful and subject to wading conditions, even DAILY servicing could
legal penalties. be necessary to ensure the continued safe and
reliable operation of the vehicle.
In addition, engine settings must not be
tampered with. These have been established to Arduous driving conditions include:
ensure that your vehicle complies with • Driving in dusty and/or sandy conditions.
stringent exhaust emission regulations. • Driving on rough and/or muddy roads
Incorrect engine settings may adversely affect and/or wading.
exhaust emissions, engine performance and
fuel consumption, as well as causing high • Driving in extremely hot conditions.
temperatures, which will result in damage to • Towing a trailer or driving in mountainous
the catalytic converter and the vehicle. conditions.
Contact a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
ROAD TESTING DYNAMOMETERS
Repairer for advice.
(‘rolling roads’)
Because your vehicle is equipped with anti-lock
brakes and permanent four-wheel drive, it is
essential that any dynamometer testing is
carried out ONLY by a qualified person familiar
with the dynamometer testing and safety
procedures practised by Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairers. Contact your
Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer for
further information.
241
L
Bonnet Opening
Bonnet Opening
BONNET OPENING Closing the bonnet

Lower the bonnet until the safety catch
engages. Using both hands, press the bonnet
down until the locking catches click.
WARNING
DO NOT drive with the bonnet retained by the
safety catch alone.
After closing the bonnet, check that the lock is

fully engaged by attempting to lift the front edge
of the bonnet. This should be free from all
movement.
H6246L
1. From inside the vehicle on the driver’s side,

pull the bonnet release handle (see upper
inset).
2. Lift the bonnet safety catch lever located
below the centre point of the words “LAND
ROVER” (lower inset) Whilst holding the
lever raise the bonnet.
242
R
Under-bonnet Covers
Under-bonnet Covers
REMOVING UNDER-BONNET REPLACING UNDER-BONNET

COVERS COVERS
H6248G H6249G
Press the two forward tabs and lift the front Caution: Ensure that no pipes, cables, or
edge of the cover. Once the front edge of the other items have been trapped between the
cover is free, slide the cover towards the front cover and casing.
of the vehicle.
Slide the rear edge of the cover under the
rubber trim fitted to the scuttle panel. Once the
front edge of the cover is aligned with the front
edge of the casing, press the front of the cover
down until the two tabs click into place.
243
L
Engine Compartment
Engine Compartment
V8 PETROL ENGINE
2 1 3
4 5 6
H6373L
1. Engine oil filler cap. WARNING

2. Engine oil dipstick. While working in the engine compartment,
3. Brake fluid reservoir. ALWAYS observe the safety precautions
4. Power steering reservoir. listed under SAFETY IN THE GARAGE, 240.
5. Cooling system reservoir.
6. Washer reservoir.
7. Dynamic Response reservoir*.
244
R
Engine Compartment
V8 SUPERCHARGED PETROL ENGINE
2 1 3
4 5 6
H6252L

4. Power steering reservoir. listed under SAFETY IN THE GARAGE, 240.
245
L
Engine Compartment
Engine Compartment
V6 DIESEL ENGINE
1 2 3
4 5 6
H6254L

4. Power steering reservoir. listed under SAFETY IN THE GARAGE, 240
246
R
Engine Oil
Engine Oil
CHECK & TOP-UP Checking Oil Level

The oil consumption of your engine is 1. Withdraw the dipstick and wipe the blade
influenced by many factors. New engines reach clean.
the normal value only after 5000 km 2. Fully re-insert the dipstick and withdraw
(3000 miles). Diesel engines consume slightly again to check the level, which should
more oil than petrol engines. Under high loads NEVER be allowed to fall below the lower
your engine will also consume more oil. mark or hole on the dipstick.
Check the oil level at least every 400 km 3. To top-up, unscrew the oil filler cap and
(250 miles), when the engine is COLD and with add oil to maintain the level between the
the vehicle resting on level ground. UPPER and LOWER marks or holes on the
Note: If it is necessary to check the oil level dipstick.
when the engine is hot, switch off the engine DO NOT OVERFILL! Clean up any oil
and let the vehicle stand for five minutes to spillage incurred when topping-up.
allow the oil to drain back into the sump. DO
4. Check the oil level again.
NOT start the engine.
As a general guide, if the level on the dipstick:
• is nearer to the upper mark or hole than the
lower, add no oil.
• is nearer to the lower mark or hole than the
upper, add half a litre (one pint) of oil.
MAX
• is below the lower mark or hole, add one MIN
litre (two pints) of oil and re-check the level
after a further five minutes.
Oil specification
It is essential to use an oil suitable for the MAX
climatic conditions in which the vehicle is to be
operated. Precise specifications are shown in MIN
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 307. If in doubt, H6371G
contact your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.
247
L
Cooling System
Cooling System
ENGINE COOLANT TOP-UP

WARNING
NEVER remove the filler cap when the engine
is hot - escaping steam or scalding water
could cause serious personal injury.
Unscrew the filler cap slowly, allowing the
pressure to escape before removing
completely.
Avoid spilling antifreeze onto a hot engine - a
fire may result.
Caution: NEVER run the engine without

coolant.
Antifreeze will damage painted surfaces;
soak up any spillage with an absorbent cloth
immediately and wash the area with a
mixture of car shampoo and water.
NEVER top-up with salt water. When
travelling in territories where the water
supply contains salt, always ensure you carry
a supply of fresh (rain or distilled) water. H6263G
The coolant level in the expansion tank should Top-up with a 50% mixture of antifreeze and
be checked at least weekly (more frequently in water, see LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 307, up
high mileage or arduous operating conditions). to the upper level indicator mark located above
Always check the level WHEN THE SYSTEM IS the COLD FILL LEVEL text on the side of the
COLD. expansion tank. This should be viewed from
If it is necessary to remove the filler cap before standing in front of the vehicle. Ignore any
the system has fully cooled, loosen the cap coolant visible in the top section of the tank.
slowly, allowing the air pressure to escape Ensure the cap is tightened fully after top-up is
gradually. completed by turning the cap until the ratchet
cap clicks.
If the level has fallen appreciably, suspect
leakage or overheating and arrange for your
Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer to
examine the vehicle.
248
R
Cooling System
ANTIFREEZE
WARNING
Antifreeze is poisonous and can be fatal if
swallowed - keep containers sealed and out
of the reach of children. If accidental
consumption is suspected, seek medical
attention immediately.
If the fluid comes into contact with the skin or
eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of water.
Antifreeze contains important corrosion

inhibitors. The antifreeze content of the coolant
must be maintained at 50% ± 5% all year round
(not just in cold conditions). To ensure that the
anti-corrosion properties of the coolant are
retained, the antifreeze content should be
checked once a year and completely renewed
every ten years, regardless of distance
travelled. Failure to do so may cause corrosion
of the radiator and engine components.
The specific gravity of a 50% antifreeze solution
at 20°C (68°F) is 1.075 and protects against
frost down to -36°C (-33°F).
Coolant specification
Use ONLY a 50% mix of water and an approved
antifreeze, see LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS,
307.
In an emergency - and only if this type of
antifreeze is unavailable - top-up the cooling
system with clean water, but be aware of the
resultant reduction in frost protection. DO NOT
top-up or refill with conventional antifreeze
formulations. If in doubt consult a Land Rover
249
L
Brakes
Brakes
BRAKE FLUID Top-up
WARNING
Brake fluid is highly toxic - keep containers
sealed and out of the reach of children. If
accidental consumption of fluid is suspected,
seek medical attention immediately.
Take care not to spill the fluid onto a hot
engine - a fire may result.
DO NOT drive the vehicle with the fluid level
below the ‘MIN’ mark.
Caution: Brake fluid will damage painted

surfaces; soak up any spillage with an H6264G
absorbent cloth immediately and wash the Wipe the filler cap clean before removing to
area with a mixture of car shampoo and prevent dirt from entering the reservoir.
water.
Disconnect the electrical lead.
The fluid level may fall slightly during normal
Unscrew the cap (1/8 turn) and top-up the
use as a result of brake pad wear but should not
reservoir to the ‘MAX’ mark using a specified
be allowed to fall below the ‘MIN’ mark. Any
brake fluid, see LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS,
substantial drop in fluid indicates a leak in the
307.
system, in which case the vehicle must NOT be
driven and you should contact your Land Rover Use only new fluid from an airtight container
Dealer/Authorised Repairer. (old fluid from opened containers or fluid
previously bled from the system will have
WARNING absorbed moisture, which will adversely affect
Contact your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised performance, and must NOT be used). DO NOT
Repairer immediately if brake pedal travel is OVERFILL!
unusually long or if there is any appreciable Replace the cap and reconnect the electrical
drop in brake fluid level. lead, ensuring that the lead points to the
centre-line of the vehicle.
With the vehicle on level ground, check the fluid
Brake fluid must be completely renewed every
level at least every week (more frequently in
two years regardless of distance travelled.
high mileage or arduous operating conditions).
Check the level visually through the side of the
transparent reservoir without removing the
filler cap.
250
R
Power Steering
Power Steering
POWER STEERING FLUID

WARNING
Power steering fluid is highly toxic - keep
containers sealed and out of reach of
children. If accidental consumption of fluid is
suspected, seek medical attention
immediately.
Do not spill the fluid onto a hot engine - a fire
may result.
Caution: Power steering fluid will damage

painted surfaces: Soak up any spillage with H6265G
an absorbent cloth immediately and wash the
area with a mixture of car shampoo and The level of fluid can be seen through the
water. translucent body of the reservoir which has two
marks on it to indicate maximum and minimum
Any large or sudden drop in the fluid level must
levels.
be investigated by a qualified Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer. If necessary, add fluid to the reservoir until the
level is between the upper and the lower marks.
If it can be established that fluid loss is slow,
DO NOT fill above the upper mark. See
then the reservoir may be topped-up to the
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 307.
upper level mark to enable the vehicle to be
driven to the nearest qualified Land Rover Caution: The engine must NOT be started if
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for examination. the fluid level has dropped below the lower
mark - severe damage to the steering pump
Driving of the vehicle to repair should not be
could result.
attempted if there is danger that the leaked fluid
will come into contact with a hot surface such
as the exhaust.
If the fluid level has dropped below the lower
level mark, top-up the reservoir before starting
the engine, or damage to the steering pump
could result.
Check and Top-up
Check and top-up the fluid level ONLY with the
engine switched off and the system cold, and
ensure that the steering wheel is not turned
after stopping the engine.
251
L
Dynamic Response
Dynamic Response
DYNAMIC RESPONSE FLUID*

WARNING
Dynamic Response fluid is highly toxic - keep
containers sealed and out of reach of
children. If accidental consumption of fluid is
suspected, seek medical attention
immediately.
Do not spill the fluid onto a hot engine - a fire
may result.
Caution: Dynamic Response fluid will

damage painted surfaces: Soak up any
spillage with an absorbent cloth immediately
and wash the area with a mixture of car H6404G
shampoo and water.
The level of fluid can be seen through the
Any large or sudden drop in the fluid level must translucent body of the reservoir which has two
be investigated by a qualified Land Rover marks on it to indicate maximum and minimum
Dealer/Authorised Repairer. levels.
If it can be established that fluid loss is slow, If more fluid is needed, first wipe the filler cap
then the reservoir may be topped-up to the clean to prevent dirt from entering the
upper level mark to enable the vehicle to be reservoir, then twist the cap a quarter turn
driven to the nearest qualified Land Rover anti-clockwise and pull to remove. Add fluid to
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for examination. the reservoir until the level is between the upper
Driving of the vehicle to repair should not be and the lower marks. DO NOT fill above the
attempted if there is danger that the leaked fluid upper mark. See LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS,
will come into contact with a hot surface such 307.
as the exhaust. Caution: The engine must NOT be started if
If the fluid level has dropped below the lower the fluid level has dropped below the lower
level mark, top-up the reservoir before starting mark - severe damage to the Dynamic
the engine, or damage to the Dynamic Response system result.
Response pump could result.
Check and Top-up
Check and top-up the fluid level ONLY with the
engine switched off and the system cold.
252
R
Washers
Washers
WINDSCREEN WASHER TOP-UP WARNING

DO NOT use an antifreeze or vinegar/water
solution in the washer reservoir - antifreeze
will damage painted surfaces, while vinegar
can damage the windscreen washer pump.
Some screenwash products are inflammable,
particularly if high or undiluted
concentrations are exposed to sparking. DO
NOT allow screenwash to come into contact
with naked flames or sources of ignition.
Caution: Body panels may suffer

discolouration as a result of screenwash
spillage. Take care to avoid spillage,
particularly if an undiluted or high
concentration is being used. If spillage
H6266G
occurs, wash the affected area immediately
The windscreen washer reservoir supplies both with water.
front and rear screen washer jets and headlamp
washer jets*.
Check the reservoir level at least every week
and top-up with a mixture of water and Land
Rover Parts STC 8249 Screenwash. Preferably
mix the recommended quantities of water and
screenwash in a separate container before
topping-up, and always follow the instructions
on the container. Note that an approved
screenwash is necessary to prevent freezing in
very cold weather.
Operate the washer switches periodically to
check that the nozzles are clear and properly
directed.
Note: Ensure an approved screen washer
solvent is used in the windscreen washer
reservoir to prevent freezing.
253
L
Washers
WASHER JETS Rear
Front
The windscreen washer jets are set during
manufacture and should not need adjusting.
However, if adjustment is ever necessary, insert
a needle into the jet orifice and lever gently to
position each jet so that the spray is directed
towards the centre of the windscreen.
H6269G
Headlamp*
The spray jets are set during manufacture and
should not need to be adjusted.
H6267L
Should any jet become obstructed, insert a

needle or thin strand of wire into the orifice to
clear the blockage.
254
R
Wiper Blades
Wiper Blades
WIPER BLADE REPLACEMENT Lift the wiper arm away from the screen and
pivot the blade assembly away from the arm.
Front Press the tab (arrowed in inset), to release the
blade assembly and slide the assembly off the
end of the wiper arm. Carefully replace the arm
to its stowed position.
To replace, position the wiper arm into the
aperture in the middle of the blade assembly
and push firmly into position until the blade
clips into place.
H6270L
255
L
Wiper Blades
Rear Lift the wiper arm away from the rear window.
Press the tab (arrowed in inset), to release the
blade assembly and slide the assembly off the
end of the wiper arm. Carefully replace the arm
to its stowed position.
To replace, position the blade assembly onto
the inside of the wiper arm and push firmly into
position until the blade clips into place.
Only fit replacement wiper blades that are
identical to the original specification.
Grease, silicone and petrol-based products
impair the blade's wiping capability. Wash the
wiper blades in warm soapy water and
periodically check their condition.
If signs of hardness or cracking in the rubber
are found, or if the wipers leave streaks or
unwiped areas on the windscreen during use,
then the wiper blades should be replaced.
Clean the windscreen regularly with an
approved glass cleaner and ensure the screen is
thoroughly cleaned before fitting replacement
H6272G wiper blades.
256
R
Battery
Battery
BATTERY MAINTENANCE Disconnect ONLY the negative (-) terminal of

The battery is designed to be maintenance free, the battery.
so topping-up is unnecessary. WARNING
Batteries contain acid, which is both
corrosive and poisonous. If spillage occurs:
• On clothing or the skin - remove any
contaminated clothing immediately,
flush the skin with large amounts of
water, and seek medical attention
urgently.
• In the eyes - flush with clean water
immediately for at least 15 minutes. Seek
medical attention urgently.
Swallowing battery acid can be fatal unless
IMMEDIATE action is taken - seek medical
attention urgently.
During normal operation batteries emit
explosive hydrogen gas - ensure sparks and
naked lights are kept away from the engine
compartment.
0
1
BAC 001131
For your safety, remove all metal wrist bands

L7MTA
2
3
1205
H6273L and jewellery before working in the engine

compartment and NEVER allow the battery
Disconnecting the battery terminals or vehicle leads to make contact
with tools or metal parts of the vehicle.
If the vehicle is already locked and alarmed, you
will first have to unlock and disarm it using the Battery posts, terminals and related
remote handset, LOCKING/UNLOCKING, 33. accessories contain harmful lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Note: If the battery is flat and the vehicle is
locked and alarmed, you will first have to unlock
the left-side front door using the starter key.
Insert the starter key and turn it to position ‘ll’.
Engage the Electric Park Brake (EPB), see
PARKBRAKE, 184, or fit wheel chocks, see
Using wheel chocks, 274.
Remove the starter key, and wait two minutes
for the engine management system to power
down.
Open the bonnet, see BONNET OPENING, 242.
257
L
Battery
Reconnecting the battery To remove: disconnect the negative (-) cable
Ensure that everything requiring power from first and then the positive (+) cable. When
the battery - lights, audio, etc - is switched off. reconnecting, connect the positive cable first
and then the negative cable. Do not allow the
Reconnect the battery leads.
battery terminals to make contact with metal
Note: If the battery was disconnected while it parts of the vehicle.
had an insufficient charge to disarm the alarm,
To release the battery from the vehicle, undo
the alarm could sound on reconnection.
the nuts securing the battery clamping plate
Operating the remote handset or inserting the
and remove the clamping plate.
key into the starter switch will disarm the alarm.
When replacing, ensure that the battery is fitted
Insert the starter key and turn to position ‘ll’.
the right way round (terminal posts towards the
Operate the EPB to extinguish the amber rear of the vehicle) and that the clamping plate
warning lamp. is secure. Tighten the clamping plate nuts until
Effects of battery disconnection the clamping plate is free from movement, but
do not overtighten.
Following disconnection and subsequent
reconnection of the vehicle battery, a number of Replacement batteries
the vehicle systems will be reset automatically. Only fit a replacement battery of the same type
This may take a few minutes and with some and specification as the original - other
systems, sensors have to detect certain actions batteries could cause a fire hazard when
whilst driving before full operability returns. connected to the vehicle’s electrical system.
This in no way affects the safe operation of the
vehicle. Battery disposal
Used batteries should be recycled.
Battery removal and replacement
However, batteries are hazardous - you
WARNING should seek advice about disposal from
ALWAYS remove the starter key before a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer or
disconnecting the battery. Failure to do this your local authority.
may cause a failure of the airbag SRS.
Do not reverse the polarity of the battery - the
electrical system may be damaged if the
battery leads are connected to the wrong
terminals.
Caution: Keep the battery upright at all times

- damage will be caused if the battery is tilted
more than 45 degrees.
DO NOT run the engine with the battery
disconnected; or disconnect the battery with
the engine running.
258
R
Battery
Battery charging
WARNING
Batteries generate explosive gases, contain
corrosive acid, and produce levels of electric
current sufficient to cause serious injury.
While charging, always heed the following

precautions:
• Before charging, disconnect and remove
the battery from the vehicle - charging the
battery with the cables connected may
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
• Make sure the battery charger leads are
securely clamped to the battery terminals
BEFORE switching on the battery charger.
Do not move the leads once the charger is
switched on.
• While charging, shield your eyes or avoid
leaning over the battery and keep the area
around the top of the battery well
ventilated.
• Do not allow naked lights near the battery
(batteries generate inflammable hydrogen
during and after charging).
• The battery will be charged sufficiently
once the battery condition indicator shows
GREEN. When charging is finished, switch
off the battery charger BEFORE
disconnecting the leads from the battery
terminals.
Note: Be aware that a battery will take longer to
charge in a cold environment.
After charging, leave the battery for an hour
BEFORE reconnection to the vehicle - this will
allow time for explosive gases to disperse,
thereby minimising the risk of fire or explosion.
259
L
Tyres
Tyres
CARING FOR YOUR TYRES Tyre pressures

Correctly inflated tyres will ensure that you
WARNING enjoy the best combination of tyre life, ride
DEFECTIVE TYRES ARE DANGEROUS. Do not comfort, fuel economy and road handling.
drive if any tyre is damaged, is excessively
Under-inflated tyres wear more rapidly, can
worn, or is inflated to an incorrect pressure.
seriously affect the vehicle's road handling
characteristics and fuel consumption, as well
Always drive with consideration for the
as increasing the risk of tyre failure.
condition of the tyres, and regularly inspect the
Over-inflated tyres give a harsher ride, wear
tread and side walls for any sign of distortion
unevenly and are more prone to damage.
(bulges), cuts or wear.
Tyre pressures should be checked at least once
The way you drive has a great influence on your
a week with normal road use, but should be
tyre mileage and safety. Cultivate good driving
checked DAILY if the vehicle is used off-road.
habits for your own benefit:
Check the pressures (including the spare
• Observe posted speed limits.
wheel) when the tyres are cold - be aware that
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns. it only takes 5 km (3 miles) of driving to warm
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road. up the tyres sufficiently to affect the tyre
• Do not run over kerbs or hit the tyre against pressures.
the kerb when parking. Air pressure naturally increases in warm tyres;
Caution: If possible, protect tyres from if it is necessary to check the tyres when they
contamination by oil, grease, fuel and other are warm (after the vehicle has been driven for
automotive fluids. a while), you should expect the pressures to
have increased by up to 40 kPa (0.4 bar)
WARNING (6 lbf/in2). In this circumstance, NEVER let air
If your vehicle becomes stuck: out of the tyres in order to match the
• Avoid spinning the tyre. The forces recommended cold tyre pressures.
created by rapidly spinning a tyre can WARNING
cause damage to, and failure of, the tyre
If the vehicle has been parked in strong
structure.
sunlight or used in high ambient
• Never exceed the 50 km/h (30 mph) point temperatures, DO NOT reduce tyre pressures;
indicated on the speedometer. instead, move the vehicle into the shade and
• Do not allow anyone to stand near to, or allow the tyres to cool before checking.
directly behind, a tyre that might spin.
The recommended pressures for cold tyres are
shown in WHEELS & TYRES, 313.
WARNING
A hot tyre at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure is dangerously
under-inflated.
260
R
Tyres
Tyre wear Punctured tyres
Tyres fitted as original equipment have wear No matter how carefully you drive, there is
indicators moulded into the tread pattern. always the possibility of a puncture. Your
When the tread has been worn down to 1.6 mm vehicle is fitted with tubeless tyres, which may
(1/16 in.) the indicators start appearing at the not leak if penetrated by a sharp object,
surface of the tread pattern, producing the provided the object remains in the tyre.
effect of a continuous band of rubber across the If, however, you feel a sudden vibration or ride
width of the tyre. disturbance while driving, or you suspect your
tyre or vehicle has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive slowly, while avoiding
heavy braking or sharp steering inputs, to the
closest safe area out of the traffic. This may
further damage the flat tyre but your safety is
more important.
Stop and inspect the tyres for damage. If a tyre
H6275G
is under-inflated or damaged, remove the tyre
A tyre MUST be replaced as soon as an and wheel and replace it with the spare wheel.
indicator band becomes visible or the tread If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle
depth reaches the minimum permitted by towed to the nearest vehicle or tyre dealer to
legislation. have the vehicle inspected.
Tread depth must be checked regularly (at A puncture will eventually cause the tyre to lose
every maintenance service, or more pressure, which is why frequent checking of
frequently). tyre pressures is important. Punctured or
Note: After off-road use, check to make sure damaged tyres must be permanently repaired
there are no lumps or bulges in the tyres or or replaced as soon as possible. DO NOT DRIVE
exposure of the ply or cord structure. WITH A PUNCTURED TYRE!
WARNING Valves
Always replace a tyre before the tread Keep the valve caps screwed down firmly - they
reaches a remaining depth of 1.6 mm (1/16 prevent dirt from entering the valve. Check the
in.). DO NOT drive with tyres worn to this valve for leaks (listen for a tell-tale hissing)
limit; the safety of the vehicle and occupants when you check the tyre pressure.
will be adversely affected.
Following any off-road use, check the tyres to
make sure there are no lumps, cuts, bulges,
or exposure of the ply/cord structure.
261
L
Tyres
Replacement tyres Directional Tyres*
Wheel rims and tyres are matched to suit the Directional tyres give greater benefit when they
handling characteristics of the vehicle. For rotate in a forward direction, i.e., when the
safety, ALWAYS check that replacement tyres vehicle is moving forward. They give enhanced
comply with the original specification (see levels of deep-water grip while still maintaining
WHEELS & TYRES, 313) and that the load and low tyre noise generation.
speed ratings shown on the side wall are the Should a tyre be fitted to a vehicle in the wrong
same as that of the original equipment. Contact directional sense, these benefits will only be
your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer maintained if the tyre is remounted to the rim so
for further information or assistance. that it rotates in the direction indicated on the
WARNING sidewall.
ALWAYS use the same make and type of Typical direction indicators are shown in the
radial-ply tyres front and rear. DO NOT use illustration below.
cross-ply tyres, or interchange tyres from
front to rear.
A
Your vehicle is fitted with road wheels that
will NOT accept inner tubes. DO NOT fit a
tubed tyre.
DO NOT replace wheels with any type other
than genuine Land Rover parts. Wheels and
tyres are designed for both off-road and
B
on-road use and have a very important
influence on vehicle handling. Alternative
wheels which do not meet original equipment
specifications should not be fitted.
Always have replacement wheels and tyres
(except a temporary spare wheel) balanced
before use.
NEVER drive your vehicle if the tyres are badly
worn, cut or damaged, or if the pressures are
incorrect.
Incorrectly inflated tyres wear rapidly and can
seriously affect the vehicle's safety and road
handling characteristics.
H6276G
262
R
Tyres
SNOW CHAINS
Snow chains are designed for use on
hard-surface roads in extreme snow conditions
only, and are not recommended for off-road
use. If it is necessary to fit snow chains to your
vehicle, ALWAYS observe the following:
• Front wheels: Snow chains can only be
fitted to the front wheels of vehicles
equipped with 17, 18 and 19 x 8 inch
wheels.
• Rear wheels: Snow chains MUST NOT be
fitted to the rear wheels of any vehicle.
• Snow chains MUST NOT be fitted to a
temporary spare wheel.
• ONLY Land Rover approved chains should
be used. These are designed for your
vehicle and will eliminate any risk of
damage to other components. Approved
snow chains are only available from a Land
• Always adhere to the snow chain fitting and
retensioning instructions and the speed
limitations recommended for varying road
conditions. NEVER exceed 50 km/h
(30 mph).
• ONLY fit snow chains in pairs.
• Avoid tyre damage by removing the chains
as soon as the road is free from snow.
• In some driving conditions, it may be
beneficial to deactivate DSC in order to
maximise traction.
WARNING
DO NOT fit unapproved snow chains - this
could damage tyres, wheels, suspension and
brake components and could result in damage
to the bodywork of the vehicle.
263
L
Tyres
TYRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM*
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tyre
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) which
monitors pressure in each pneumatic tyre,
including a full-size spare tyre. Temporary CHECK ALL
spare tyres are not fitted with sensors and are TYRE PRESSURES
consequently not monitored.
WARNING
The Tyre Pressure Monitoring System is NOT
a substitute for manually checking tyre
pressures. The tyre pressure should be
checked regularly using a pressure gauge.
Failure to properly maintain your tyre
pressures could increase the risk of tyre
1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
failure, with consequential loss of vehicle Tr 1 5 2 : 43

PQRS TUV WXYZ
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
control and personal injury.

The Tyre Pressure Monitoring System can
NOT register damage to a tyre. Regularly
check the condition of your tyres, especially if
the vehicle is driven off-road.
TPMS operation 1 2 3
ABC DEF
The system monitors the pressure of the tyres
H6277G
via sensors located in each wheel and a receiver
located within the vehicle. Communication A secondary warning comprises an additional
between sensor and receiver is via radio red warning light within the instrument cluster
Frequency (RF) signals. or an associated message within the message
It provides two levels of warning when the centre. A secondary warning requires
pressure has fallen below pre-set levels. immediate determination of the cause of
The initial warning comprises a yellow warning pressure loss and its rectification.
light within the instrument cluster and an
associated message within the message centre.
If a warning appears, then the pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the proper level. If
warnings recur frequently, the cause must be
determined and rectified.
264
R
Tyres
Should it be necessary to fit the spare wheel to The indicator will cease to be illuminated, and a
the vehicle, the system will automatically start message ‘TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SET
to monitor its pressure. If, however, the spare FOR HEAVY LOAD’ will appear in the message
wheel is a temporary spare wheel, the yellow centre to show that the system has now
warning light will illuminate after ten minutes of switched to heavily laden mode.
driving above 25 km/h (18 mph). In addition, an Note: Changing from one mode to another can
associated message will appear in the message only be achieved with the starter switch in
centre indicating where the spare wheel is fitted position ‘ll’ and the engine NOT running.
and showing that its pressure is not being
monitored. Tyre replacement
Secondary warnings continue to operate as It is recommended that you always have your
before. tyres serviced by a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer or qualified
Warning lights and messages will show if there
technician.
is a fault in the system or if more than one
wheel NOT equipped with a sensor is fitted to In order to avoid damage to the TPMS sensor,
the vehicle. a tyre must be removed and refitted to the road
wheel in a specific manner, preventing contact
Tyre pressures between the bead of the tyre and the sensor.
The pressure in each tyre is dependant on Sensors can be removed from the wheel by
several factors, see Tyre pressures, 260. unscrewing the valve retention nut.
Vehicle loading Valve stem seal, washer, nut, valve core and
Tyre pressures must be adjusted to cater for cap should be replaced at every tyre change.
different vehicle loading conditions, see TYRE
WARNING
PRESSURE LABEL, 22. When this is done, the
A new valve stem seal, washer and nut must
TPMS status must be changed to correspond to
be fitted whenever the valve stem nut has
the new condition.
been loosened. Sensor units and nuts must be
The indicator on the TPMS button displays this refitted using correct torques.
status; illuminated for lightly laden and not
illuminated for heavily laden or towing. Note: When a new sensor is fitted to a vehicle,
When, for instance, you have been using the it will be registered by the system when the
vehicle in a lightly laden mode and you wish to vehicle is driven above 25 km/h (18 mph) for
use the vehicle for towing or fully laden, you approximately 10 minutes.
must adjust the tyre pressures accordingly, see
Replacement tyres
Vehicle weights, 208, WHEELS & TYRES, 313.
Tyres may affect the performance of the Tyre
You must then change the TPMS status. With
Pressure Monitoring System. Always replace
the starter switch in position ‘ll’ and the engine
tyres in accordance with recommendations, see
NOT running, press the TPMS button for at
WHEELS & TYRES, 313.
least four seconds.
265
L
Tyres
TYRE INFORMATION LABELS
Tyre pressure and loading label
The tyre pressure and loading information label
is located behind the drivers door (also known
as the ‘B’ pillar).
RANGE ROVER
MAX. 230 2.3 33 250 2.5 36

235/65R17
255/55R18 (kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
255/50R19
L7MTA
275/40R20 260 2.6 38(PSI) 290 2.9 42

(kpa) (BAR) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
MAX. 420 4.2 60 420 4.2 60
T175/80R19
RTC500340
420 4.2 60 420 4.2 60

H5955L
266
R
Cleaning and Vehicle Care

WASHING YOUR VEHICLE Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for snow and ice
removal and dust control can collect on
underbody parts. If these materials are not
removed, accelerated rusting can occur. Use a
hose to regularly flush the underbody with plain
water, taking particular care to thoroughly clean
those areas where mud and other debris can
easily collect.
Similarly, after off-road driving or wading in
muddy or salt water conditions, use a hose to
wash underbody components and other
exposed parts of the vehicle.
When using a hose, do not direct the jet into the
H6279G
engine air intake, which is located on the
Caution: Some high pressure cleaning right-hand-side front wing (viewed from
systems are sufficiently powerful to penetrate driver’s position), or the heater air intake ducts,
door and window seals and damage rubbing or through the wheel trim apertures onto the
strips and locking mechanisms. Never aim brake components, or at the door, window or
the water jet directly at the engine air intake, sunroof seals, where water pressure could
heater air intakes, body and sunroof seals, or penetrate the seals.
at any components that might easily be If damage or corrosion to the underbody area is
damaged. detected, please have the vehicle checked by a
Read individual product warnings before Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer at the
using any car cleaning or washing products. earliest opportunity.
Wash your vehicle frequently using a sponge Cleaning after off-road driving
and generous quantities of cold or lukewarm Ensure that the vehicle and underside is
water containing a car shampoo. Rinse and dry cleaned soon after off-road driving, taking
off with a chamois leather. particular care to clean areas where mud and
• Do not use hot water. debris has compacted.
• Do not use detergent soap products or
washing-up liquid.
• In hot weather, do not wash the vehicle in
direct sunlight.
Removing tar spots
Use white spirit to remove tar spots and
stubborn grease stains from paintwork. Then
wash immediately with soapy water to remove
all traces of spirit.
267
L

Body protection CLEANING THE INTERIOR
After washing, inspect the paintwork for
damage. Any stone chips, fractures or deep WARNING
scratches in the bodywork should be repaired Read individual product warnings before
promptly. Bare metal will corrode quickly and using any car cleaning or washing products.
can develop into major repair expense. Some
exterior panels of your vehicle are made of
aluminium which will not corrode in the same CAR CARE PRODUCTS
manner as steel. However, any damage should Facia Cleaner STC4683
still receive prompt attention. Minor chips and (300 ml aerosol)
scratches can be repaired with touch-up Fabric Cleaner STC4685
materials available from your Land Rover (300 ml aerosol)
Dealer/Authorised Repairer. Larger areas of Leather Cleaning Kit BAC500490
damage need to be corrected to professional
standards immediately.
Insect Remover STC4686
Polishing (300 ml aerosol)
Occasionally treat the paint surface with an Glass Cleaner STC4681
approved polish containing the following
properties: (300 ml aerosol)
Bumper Cleaner STC4679
• Very mild abrasives to remove surface
contamination without removing or (300 ml aerosol)
damaging the paint. De-icer STC4677
• Filling compounds that will fill scratches (300 ml aerosol)
and reduce their visibility. De-icer STC4676
• Wax to provide a protective coating (500 ml trigger spray)
between the paint and the elements. Screenwash STC4672
Caution: DO NOT apply car polish to the (250 ml bottle)
unpainted areas of the bumper mouldings -
Screenwash STC4687
polish will become ingrained in the textured
finished. (500 ml bottle)
Alloy Wheel Cleaner STC4675
Glass and mirrors
(500 ml trigger spray)
Clean the rear window with a soft cloth to avoid
damaging the heating elements. DO NOT Wash ‘n’ Wax STC4680
scrape the glass or use an abrasive cleaning (300 ml bottle)
fluid. Wax Polish STC4682
Mirror glass is particularly susceptible to (300 ml bottle)
damage. Wash with soapy water. DO NOT use
abrasive cleaning compounds or metal
scrapers to remove ice.
268
R

Plastic materials Seat belts
Clean plastic-faced or cloth-covered surfaces Extend the belts, then use warm water and a
with warm water and a non-detergent soap and non-detergent soap to clean. Allow the belts to
wipe with a clean cloth. dry naturally, and do not retract them or use the
vehicle until they are completely dry.
WARNING
DO NOT polish instrument panel components Airbag module covers
- for safety, these should remain To prevent airbag SRS damage, the steering
non-reflective. wheel centre pad and area of the instrument
panel containing the passenger airbag should
Leather ONLY be cleaned sparingly with a damp cloth
and upholstery cleaner.
Land Rover recommends that leather is cleaned
and protected at least every six months, but DO NOT allow these areas to be flooded with
maybe as often as every one to two months for liquid, and DO NOT use petrol, detergent,
high mileage vehicles , or vehicles kept in a furniture cream or polishes.
hostile environment.
Leather cleaning kit, BAC500490, is
recommended and endorsed by Land Rover for
this purpose. Use in accordance with the
instructions printed on the label.
Caution: Some materials/fabrics are prone to
‘dye-transfer’ which can cause unsightly
discolouration of lighter coloured leathers.
Affected areas should be cleaned and
re-protected as soon as possible.
DO NOT use chemical or abrasive materials to
clean leather. Petrol, white spirit, alcohol,
detergents, washing-up liquid, household
cleaners, furniture polishes/creams or solvents
should never be used on leather. While these
products may give initially impressive results,
their use will lead to rapid deterioration of the
leather and will invalidate the warranty.
Carpet and fabrics
Clean with diluted nylon upholstery cleaner -
test on a concealed area first.
Instrument pack, clock and radio
Clean with a dry cloth only. DO NOT use
cleaning fluids or sprays.
269
L
Identification Numbers
Identification Numbers
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (VIN)
A B
C
D
E
F
H6280G
A. Type approval (where required) The VIN (and recommended maximum vehicle
B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) weights) is stamped on a plate riveted to the top
of the bonnet locking platform (this should
C. Gross vehicle weight (where required)
match the VIN recorded in the Service Portfolio
D. Gross train weight (where required) book).
E. Maximum front axle load (where required) In addition, as a deterrent to car thieves and to
F. Maximum rear axle load (where required) assist the police, the VIN is stamped on a plate
If you need to communicate with a Land Rover which is visible through the lowest part of the
Dealer/Authorised Repairer, you may be asked left side of the windscreen and also stamped on
to quote the Vehicle Identification Number the vehicle body (on the front face of the
(VIN). right-hand front suspension tower).
270
R
Parts and Accessories

Parts and Accessories
PARTS AND ACCESSORIES Electrical equipment
WARNING WARNING
The fitting of non-approved parts and It is extremely hazardous to fit or replace
accessories, or the carrying out of parts or accessories the installation of which
non-approved alterations or conversions, requires the dismantling of, or addition to,
may be dangerous and could affect the safety either the electrical or fuel systems.
of the vehicle and occupants, and also
invalidate the terms and conditions of the ALWAYS consult a Land Rover
vehicle warranty. Dealer/Authorised Repairer before fitting any
accessory.
Your vehicle has been designed, built and Fitting inferior quality parts or accessories, may
tested to cope with a variety of off-road driving be dangerous and could invalidate the vehicle
conditions, some of which can place the warranty.
severest possible demands on control systems It is recommended that you always consult a
and components. As such, fitting replacement Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer for
parts and accessories that have been developed advice regarding the approval, suitability,
and tested to the same stringent standards as installation and use of any parts or accessories
the original components will safeguard the before fitting.
continued reliability, safety and performance of
your vehicle. After-sales service
To augment the vehicle's already impressive The After Sales Parts service is of paramount
performance, a comprehensive range of Land importance, both in the UK and across the
Rover-approved spare parts and accessories is world. In the UK there are over 100 authorised
available, enabling the vehicle to fulfil a wide Land Rover Dealers, all computer linked for
variety of roles, and enhancing and protecting rapid ordering of parts and accessories.
the vehicle in the many tasks to which it can be In addition, with franchised representation in
applied. over 100 countries worldwide, Land Rover are
Land Rover parts are the only parts built to able to support your vehicle wherever you go.
original equipment specifications AND Travelling abroad
approved by Land Rover designers; this means
In certain countries, it is illegal to fit parts which
that every single part and accessory has been
have not been made to the vehicle
rigorously tested by the same engineering team
manufacturers' specification.
that designed and built the vehicle and can
therefore be guaranteed for twelve months with Owners should ensure that any parts or
unlimited mileage. accessories fitted to the vehicle while travelling
abroad will also conform to the legal
A full list and description of all accessories is
requirements of their own country when they
available from your Land Rover
return home.
271
L
272
R
Wheel Changing
Roadside Emergency
TOOL KIT
1
2
3 4
6
5
7
8
H6282G
The tool kit consists of:

1. Screwdriver handle.
2. Screwdriver blade.
3. Jack screw rotating hook.
4. Extension piece.
5. Wheel nut brace.
H6281G
6. Wheel chocks.
The tool tray is located under a lift-up panel set
in the loadspace floor. 7. Wheel change jack.
Note: Take careful note of the stowage position 8. Locking wheel nut key*.
of each of the tools as it is important to return Care of the jack
them to their correct position after use.
Examine the jack occasionally, clean and grease
the moving parts, particularly the screw thread,
to prevent corrosion.
To avoid contamination, the jack should always
be stowed in its fully closed position.
WARNING
After wheel changing, always secure tools,
chocks, jack and replaced wheel in their
correct storage positions.
273
L
Wheel Changing
PUNCTURED TYRES Tilt Sensor*
If you have a flat tyre while driving: Your vehicle is fitted with a tilt sensor which
activates the alarm if the vehicle is tilted fore
• Do not brake heavily.
and aft, or side to side, after it has been locked.
• Gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.
If you wish to have the doors locked while
• Hold the steering wheel firmly. jacking up the vehicle, for any reason, lock the
• Slowly move to a safe and suitable place at doors by pressing the lock button on the
the side of the road. remote handset twice within three seconds.
Wheel Changing Safety Using wheel chocks
If possible, choose a safe place to stop away
WARNING
from the main road. Always ask your
As an additional safety precaution, it is
passengers to get out of the vehicle and wait in
necessary to chock the road wheels in two
a safe area away from other traffic.
places before raising the vehicle.
WARNING
Switch on the hazard warning lights and set
the hazard warning triangle* a suitable
distance behind the vehicle to alert other road
users.
Before changing a wheel, ensure that the front

wheels are in the straight-ahead position (if
possible), apply the handbrake, select ‘P’ (Park)
in automatic transmission vehicles or any gear
in manual transmission, and select LOW range
in the transfer box.
Turn off the starter switch, remove the key and
engage the steering lock. Observe the following
precautions:
• Ensure that the jack will be positioned on
firm, level ground; NEVER on soft ground,
H6283G
or over metal gratings or manhole covers.
DO NOT place additional material between If possible, position the vehicle on level ground,
the jack and the ground; this may chocking both sides of the wheel diagonally
jeopardise the safety of the jacking opposite the one to be removed.
operation.
• Chock the wheel(s), see Using wheel
chocks, 274.
• NEVER raise the vehicle with passengers
inside, or with a caravan or trailer
connected!
274
R
Wheel Changing
REMOVING THE SPARE WHEEL
Spare wheel
Always remove the spare wheel before jacking
up the vehicle.
WARNING
The wheels are extremely heavy. Take care
when manoeuvring the spare wheel.
Note: Before removing the spare wheel from

the vehicle, take a look at the position that the
spare wheel is stowed in, as you will need to
check that the wheel about to be removed from
the vehicle is returned to the correct storage
position.
H6284G
If jacking the vehicle on a slope is unavoidable,

place the chocks on the downhill side of the two
opposite wheels.
The wheel chocks are stowed in the tool kit, as
shown in TOOL KIT, 273.
H6285
275
L
Wheel Changing
With the tailgate open: 3. Fit the wheel nut brace to the wheel-hoist
1. Lift open the spare wheel mechanism winch nut and rotate anticlockwise to lower
access hatch in the rear loadspace. the spare wheel.
Remove the jack from the tool tray. Caution: The mechanism has been
designed for use with the wheel nut
2. Tilt up the circular locking cap covering the
brace. DO NOT use power tools on the
spare-wheel storage nut.
wheel-hoist winch.
When the wheel has reached the ground,
continue to wind the handle until the cable
is slack.
Do not attempt to turn the winch beyond
the physical stop.
H6287G
H6286G
276
R
Wheel Changing
H6288G
4. Hold the cable and tilt the lifting lug until it

can be lifted through the hole in the wheel,
as shown above.
277
L
Wheel Changing
CHANGING A WHEEL
Positioning the jack - right-hand side
H6289G
Caution: Before positioning the jack under the WARNING

vehicle, ensure that the air suspension is set
Always:
to Off-road height.
• Place the jack on firm, level ground.
WARNING • Position the jack from the side of the
NEVER work beneath the vehicle with the jack vehicle, in line with the appropriate
as the only means of support. The jack is jacking point.
designed for wheel changing only.
• Raise the jack so that the pin in the head
Always remove the spare wheel before of the jack engages with a hole in the
jacking up the vehicle. chassis rail at the points shown in the
illustrations.
278
R
Wheel Changing
Positioning the jack - left-hand side
H6290G
WARNING WARNING
ALWAYS use the complete, two-piece, jack ONLY jack the vehicle using the jack location
lever throughout to minimise any chance of points described, or damage to the vehicle
accidental damage or injury. could occur.
279
L
Wheel Changing
Operating the jack Changing a wheel
Always remove the spare wheel before jacking
up the vehicle.
1. Raise the vehicle until the tyre is clear of the
ground.
2. Remove the wheel nuts and place to one
side to prevent them from being lost.
3. Remove the road wheel.
Note: DO NOT damage the style surface of the
wheel by placing it face down on the road.
4. Finally, check the tyre pressure at the
earliest opportunity (see WHEELS &
TYRES, 313).
WARNING
When fitting a wheel, ensure that the mating
faces of the hub and wheel are clean and free
from rust or anti-seize compound - any
accumulation of dirt or rust could cause the
wheel nuts to become loose.
5. On alloy wheels, use an approved anti-seize

compound to treat the wheel mounting
bore. This will minimise any tendency for
adhesion between the wheel and the bore.
Ensure that no compound comes into
contact with the brake components or the
flat mounting surfaces of the wheel.
If, due to an emergency situation, this
treatment is not practicable; refit the spare
H6291G
wheel for the time being, but remove and
Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel nut treat the wheel at the earliest opportunity.
brace to slacken the wheel nuts half a turn 6. Fit the spare wheel with the valve stem
anticlockwise. outwards and lightly tighten the wheel
Attach the jack cranking lever to the jack. Fit the nuts, ensuring they are firmly seated. DO
wheel nut brace onto the end of the cranking NOT fully tighten whilst the tyre is clear of
lever. the ground. See Directional Tyres*, 262.
Turn the jack lever clockwise to raise the jack
cradle until it engages with the jacking point.
Ensure that the base of the jack is in full contact
with the road surface.
280
R
Wheel Changing
7. Ensure that the space under and around the Temporary spare wheel*
vehicle is free from obstructions then lower
the vehicle and remove the jack and wheel WARNING
chocks. The following precautions must be observed
when the temporary spare wheel is in use:
8. Fully tighten the wheel nuts in an
alternating pattern until all are tightened. • DRIVE CAUTIOUSLY; the temporary spare
DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN by using foot wheel tyre is smaller in size and higher in
pressure or extension bars on the wheel pressure than a regular tyre. It will cause
nut brace, as this could overstress the a harsher ride and may have less traction
wheel nuts. Check the wheel nut torque at on some road surfaces. If driving off-road
the earliest opportunity (see WHEELS & on a temporary spare wheel, drive with
TYRES, 313). extra caution.
9. Using a suitable blunt tool, apply light • The temporary spare wheel is for
pressure to the rear of the displaced wheel TEMPORARY use only. It MUST be
centre cap and remove. Using hand replaced by a normal-sized wheel and
pressure only, fit the centre cap into the tyre as soon as possible.
newly fitted wheel. Return tools, chocks, • Only ONE temporary spare wheel is to be
jack and the displaced wheel to their used on the vehicle at any one time.
correct storage positions. • DO NOT drive at a speed exceeding 80
10. REMEMBER to change to ‘H’ (HIGH range) km/h (50 mph).
before driving. • The tyre pressure in the temporary spare
Note: During jacking, the air suspension wheel/tyre should be as detailed in the
system may enter an automatic ‘freeze’ state, tyre pressures table, see WHEELS &
see Suspension Freeze, 197. TYRES, 313.
• The temporary spare wheel has a shorter
life than a regular tyre. Replace the tyre
with one of the same type and
specification.
• The use of snow chains is not permitted
on a temporary spare wheel.
281
L
Wheel Changing
Stowing the changed wheel
WARNING
DO NOT stow the wheel while the vehicle is
still raised on the jack.
1. Place the wheel under the rear of the

vehicle with its style surface uppermost.
2. Place the lifting lug through the wheel
aperture and locate it in position.
3. Winch up the wheel using the wheel-hoist
mechanism.
The mechanism has been designed for use
with the wheel nut brace. DO NOT use
power tools on the wheel-hoist winch.
4. Continue to wind up until the mechanism
‘clutches out’. This is confirmed by a clear
physical feedback from the wheel nut brace
and an audible noise.
5. Check that the wheel has returned to the
same position as the spare wheel as
previously noted. If in any doubt, unwind
the winch slightly and repeat the previous
step.
WARNING
The wheel must be securely retained in its
correct position by the winch mechanism or it
could become loose.
6. Replace the circular locking cap over the H6288G

wheel-hoist nut. As the underside of this
cap is exposed to the same conditions as Note: If, for any reason, the spare wheel is not
the underside of the vehicle, ensure that it to be fitted back under the vehicle, the wheel
is firmly in place. hoist should be rewound as follows.
7. Place the tools back into their stowage Position the lifting lug level on the cable and
location. wind up the wheel hoist mechanism until it
‘clutches out’.
282
R
Wheel Changing
LOCKING WHEEL NUTS Note: A code number is stamped on the side of
Vehicles may be equipped with a locking wheel the side of the locking nut. Ensure the number
nut on each wheel. These are similar to is recorded on the Security Information card
standard wheel nuts, and can only be removed supplied with the literature pack. Quote this
using the special adaptor provided in the tool number if a replacement is required. DO NOT
kit. keep the Security Information card in the
vehicle.
Insert the adaptor firmly onto the locking wheel
nut.
Using the wheel nut brace, unscrew the wheel
nut and adaptor.
Be sure to return the locking wheel nut adaptor
to the correct storage position.
H6292G
283
L
Emergency Starting
Emergency Starting
STARTING AN ENGINE WITH A Turn off the starter switch and ALL electrical
DISCHARGED BATTERY equipment of BOTH vehicles.
Using Booster Cables WARNING

Using booster cables (jump leads) from a DO NOT use a 24 Volt booster start system.
donor battery, or a battery fitted to a donor
vehicle, is the only approved method of starting Boosting Procedure
a vehicle with a discharged battery.
Caution: DO NOT push or tow start!
WARNING +
During normal operation batteries emit
explosive hydrogen gas - ensure sparks and
naked lights are kept away from the engine
compartment. +
DO NOT attempt to start the vehicle if the
electrolyte in the battery is suspected of being
frozen. +
Make sure BOTH batteries are of the same

voltage (12 volts), and that the booster cables
have insulated clamps and are approved for
use with 12 volt batteries.
DO NOT disconnect the discharged battery. +
DO NOT connect positive (+) terminals to
negative (-) terminals, and ensure booster
cables are kept away from any moving parts
in the engine compartment.
Take care when working near rotating parts of
the engine.
H6293L
Boosting from Another Vehicle Always adopt the following procedure,

If a donor vehicle is to be used, both vehicles ensuring the cables are connected in the
should be parked with their battery locations order shown below:
adjacent to each other. Ensure that the two 1. On the donor vehicle, connect one end of
vehicles do not touch. the BLACK booster cable to the negative (-)
Apply the handbrakes and ensure that the terminal of the battery or the vehicle’s
transmission of both vehicles is set in neutral negative (-) connection point.
(‘P’ or Park for vehicles with automatic
transmission).
284
R
Emergency Starting
2. On the disabled vehicle, connect the other
end of the BLACK booster cable to a good
earth point (e.g. an engine mounting or
other unpainted metal surface) at least
0.5m (20 in.) from the battery and well
away from fuel and brake lines.
3. On the donor vehicle, connect one end of
the RED booster cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the battery or the vehicle’s
positive (+) connection point.
4. On the disabled vehicle, connect the other
end of the RED booster cable to the positive
(+) battery terminal.
WARNING
ENSURE that each connection is securely
made and that there is no risk of the clips
accidentally slipping or being pulled from the
connection points/battery terminal - this
could cause sparking, which could lead to fire
or explosion.
Check that the cables are clear of any moving

parts of both engines, then start the engine of
the donor vehicle and allow it to idle for a few
minutes.
Now start the vehicle with the discharged
battery. Once both engines are running
normally, allow them to idle for two minutes
before switching off the donor vehicle engine.
DO NOT switch on any electrical circuits on the
previously disabled vehicle until AFTER the
booster cables have been removed.
Disconnecting the booster cables must be an
EXACT reversal of the procedure used to
connect them, i.e. disconnect the RED cable
from the positive (+) battery terminal on the
boosted battery FIRST.
285
L
Fuses
Fuses
FUSES Engine Compartment Fuse Box

Fuses are simple circuit devices which protect The engine compartment fuse box is located at
electrical equipment against the effects of the rear of the engine bay. To view the fuse box,
excess current. the under-bonnet cover will have to be
removed, see REMOVING UNDER-BONNET
A ‘blown’ fuse is indicated when the electrical
COVERS, 243. The plastic lid of the box is
equipment it protects becomes inoperative.
removed by pressing the plastic tabs in.
Fuses are colour coded to help identify their
amperage, as follows:
Blade fuse colours
VIOLET 3 amp
TAN 5 amp
BROWN 7.5 amp
RED 10 amp
BLUE 15 amp
YELLOW 20 amp
WHITE 25 amp
GREEN 30 amp
Cartridge fuse colours (engine bay only)
BLUE 20 amp
PINK 30 amp
H6300L
GREEN 40 amp
RED 50 amp
YELLOW 60 amp
Note: Owners are advised against removing or

replacing the relays (identified as R1-R19 on
the relays) and fusible links (identified as
FL1-FL20 on the fusible links). Failure of any of
these items should be investigated by a
qualified technician.
286
R
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuses
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5
F1 25 5 F2
F3 5 25 F4
A F1 F2
FL1 FL2 FL3
25A 5A F5 F6
50A 30A 30A 10 15
F3 F4
FL4
B FL5 FL6
5A 25A
F7 25 25 F8
50A 30A F5 F6
10A 15A
10 10
F9 15 15 F10
F7 F8 10 10
R6 R7
10 10
25A 25A
10 10
F11 15 10 F12
F9 F10 10 10
10 10
15A 15A 10 10 F13 10 20 F14
10 10
F11 F12
10 10
15A 10A 10 F15 30 10 F16
10
F13 F14
10 10
R8 R9 10A 20A 10
10
10
10
F17 15 30 F18
F15 F16 10 10
30A 10A
F19 5 F20
F17 F18
15A 30A F21 30 F22
F19 F20
R10 R11 5A
ALT F23 25 20 F24
F21 F22
30A F25 10 20 F26
F23 F24
25A 20A
F27 5 20 F28
F25 F26
R12 R13 10A 20A F29 30 10 F30

F27 F28
5A 20A
F29 F30
30A 10A
H6303G
R14 R15 FL7 FL8

30A 30A
A
FL9 FL10
40A 60A
R16 R17 FL11

30A
FL12
40A
FL13 FL14
B 40A 40A SM
R18 R19 FL15 FL16

40A 40A
FL17 FL18
50A 50A
FL19
FL20
Where Fitted
Torque Values - (m8 17Nm +/-1) (M5 5Nm +/-1)
H6302G
287
L
Fuses
Fuse specification
Fuse Rating Circuit protected
number (amps)
1 25 Fuel pump
2
3 5 Air suspension ECU
4 25 Petrol - V8 Supercharged - supercharger cooling pump
4 25 Diesel - diesel EMS (ECU & fuel pump relay control)
5 10 Petrol - petrol EMS (purge valve, EGR, inlet manifold
tune valve), E-Box fan
6 15 Petrol - petrol EMS (coils)
7 25 Hevac - front seat heat
8 25 Rear seat heat
9 15 Active roll control
10 15 Petrol - petrol EMS (throttle motor, MAF), cool fan
10 15 Diesel - cool fan
11 15 Petrol - petrol EMS (rear oxygen sensors)
12 10 Heated wash jets
13 10 Petrol - petrol EMS (ECU, VVTs and fuel pump relay
control)
13 10 Diesel - diesel EMS (PCV, VCV)
14 20 Petrol - petrol EMS (front oxygen sensors)
15 30 Heated front screen
16 10 Heated door mirrors
17 15 Petrol - petrol EMS (injectors)
17 15 Diesel - diesel EMS (MAF, EGR), E-Box fan
18 30 Heated front screen
19 15
20 5 Alternator
21
22 30 Rear blower
23 25 Dynamic Stability Control system
24 20 Petrol - brake boost pump
25 10 Lighting switch
27 5 Engine control module (EMS)
28 20 Fuel burning heater
29 30 Front wipers
30 10 Auto transmission ECU
288
R
Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box A label on the rear of the glovebox hopper
shows the circuits protected, the fuse values
and their locations. They are also listed on the
following page.
Checking or renewing a fuse
Always turn the starter switch to position ‘O’
and switch off the affected electrical circuit
before removing a fuse.
WARNING
Fit only replacement fuses of the same rating
and type. Always rectify the cause of the
failure before replacing a fuse. Seek qualified
assistance if necessary.
H6375L
The passenger compartment fuse box is fitted

behind the glovebox. To access the fuses, open
the glovebox to the service position.
This is done by opening the glovebox normally
and then pinching the top of the support stays
located either side of the hopper. This allows
the glovebox to be lowered into the footwell.
289
L
H6306G
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
10A 10A 10A 10A 10A 10A 25A 30A 5A
F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 2 F20 F21 F22
10A 15A 25A 10A 15A 10A 20A 5A 15A 15A 25A 10A
F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 F28 F29 F30 F31 F32 F33 F34 1
Glovebox label
5A 5A 5A 5A 10A 5A 30A 25A 20A 15A 5A 15A
F35 F36 F37 F38 F39 F40 F41 F42 F43 F44 F45 F46 F47 3 F48
and their locations.

5A 5A 5A 15A 5A 5A 5A 30A 10A 5A 30A 15A 15A
F49 F50 F51 F52 F53 F54 F55
30A 10A 10A 5A 15A 5A 15A
F56 F57 F58 F59 R1
10A 10A 10A 10A
F60 F61 F62 F63
5A 10A 5A 10A
R2 R3
F64 F65 F66
5A 5A WHERE
F67 F68 F69 FITTED
5A 5A 5A R4 R5
SPARE FUSES
L7MTA YQS500120
The label on the rear of the glovebox hopper

shows the circuits protected, the fuse values,
290
Fuses
R
Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuses Always replace a fuse with another of the same
The fuse removal tweezers are located in the value, however, if the replacement fuse blows
passenger compartment fusebox. Place the immediately the circuit MUST be checked by a
tweezers onto the head of the suspect fuse (as qualified Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
shown), squeeze the middle (arrowed) and pull Repairer.
to remove. A break in the wire inside the fuse
indicates that the fuse has 'blown' and must be
replaced.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
10
10
10
10
10
10
25
30
5
F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22
10
15
25
10
15
10
20
15
15
25
10
5
F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 F28 F29 F30 F31 F32 F33 F34
10
30
25
20
15
15
5
5
5
F35 F36 F37 F38 F39 F40 F41 F42 F43 F44 F45 F46 F47 F48
15
30
30
15
15
10
5
5
5
5
5
F49 F50 F51 F52 F53 F54 F55

30
10
10
15
15
5
F56 F57 F58 F59

10
10
10
10
F60 F61 F62 F63

10
10
5
F64 F65 F66

5
F67 F68 F69

5
5
SPARES
H6309G
291
L
Fuses
Fuse specification
number (amps)
1 10 Interior lamps - glovebox lamp, vanity mirror lamp, map lamps,
switchable roof lamps
2 10 RH sidelamps
3 10
4 10 LH sidelamps
5 10 Reverse lamps
6 10 Tow reverse lamp
7 25 Driver’s window
8 30 Trailer pick-up (battery feed)
9 5 SRS
10
11 10 Washer pump
12 15 Horn
13 25 Heated Rear Window
14 10 Tow sidelamp
15 15 Brake lamps, Brake switch
16 10 Powerfold mirror
17 20 Rear RH window
18 5 Rain sensor, ambient light sensor (auto lamps)
19 15 Socket accessory - Row 2
20 15 Sunroof
21 25 Passenger window
22 10 Trailer pick-up (ignition feed)
23 5
24 5 Transfer box - centre diff, Terrain Response
25 5 Engine control module
26 5 Battery back-up sounder
27 10 Adaptive front lighting / Headlamp levelling
28 5 Fusebox engine compartment - ignition
29 30 Passenger electric seat
30 25
31 20 Rear LH window
32 15 Rear fog lamps
33 5 Mirror adjust, PRNDS - Auto transmission selector, passenger
electric seat, driver non memory electric seat
34 15 Socket accessory - row 1
292
R
Fuses
number (amps)
36 5 Tyre pressure monitoring/Park Distance Control
37 5 Dynamic Stability Control
38 15 Front fog lamps
39 5 Instrument pack
40 5 Key in sense
41 5 Electric park brake
42 30 Audio amp
43 10 RF receiver, tyre pressure monitoring
44 5 PRNDS Auto transmission selector
45
46 30 Drivers electric seat
47 15 Socket accessory - Row 3
48 15 Rear wiper
49 30 CDL (central door locking)
50 10 Electric fuel flap actuator
51 10 HVAC ECU
52 5 Telephone, traffic message centre
53 15 Media player, head module, DVD player
54 5 Electric seat - memory, Lumbar pump
55 15 Cigar lighter
56 10 Adaptive front lighting
57 10 Rear seat entertainment module
58 10 Telephone, infotainment display, multi-media module, TV tuner
59 10 Cubby box cooler
60 5 Engine control module (ECM) - starter signal
61 10 Adaptive front lighting
62 5 Low beam, auto lamps
63 10 Diagnostic socket
64 5 Auto transmission
65
66 5 HDC switch, Brake switch, Steering angle sensor/DSC switch
67 5 Auto lamps
68 5 Instrument pack
69 5 Electrochromatic mirror, Homelink
293
L
Fuses
Tow hitch fuses
1. Brake lamp 7.5 amp
1 2. Ignition feed 15 amp
2
3 3. Battery feed 15 amp
4 4. Rear fog lamps 7.5 amp
5
6 5. Right-hand tail 5 amp
lamp
6. Number plate 5 amp
and left-hand tail
lamp
The supplementary fuse box that protects the

tow hitch circuits, is located under the cover in
the luggage compartment.
H6310
294
R
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement
REPLACING BULBS Note: In certain territories it is a legal

Check the operation of all exterior lamps before requirement to carry spare bulbs, in case of
you drive the vehicle. bulb failure. A replacement bulb kit is available
as an approved accessory from your Land
Caution: Before replacing a bulb, always Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
switch off the starter switch and appropriate
lighting switch to prevent any possibility of a Halogen bulbs
short circuit. Only replace bulbs with the Halogen bulbs are used for main beam, dipped
same type and specification. beam and front fog lamps. Take care NOT to
touch this type of bulb with your fingers; always
use a cloth to handle them. If necessary, clean
Replacement bulbs the bulb with methylated spirits to remove
Note: All bulbs must be rated at 12 volts. fingerprints.
Xenon lamp units*
Bulb Watts
Headlamps, low and high beam 55 (H7) WARNING
(Halogen) • Used Xenon lamp units contain mercury,
Headlamps, low and high beam 55 (D2S) which is hazardous and can be injurious
(Xenon) to health.
Cornering lamps (Halogen) 35 (H8) • A very high voltage is required to ignite
Front side lamps W5W the gas and metal vapour used to power
Front direction indicators S8 Xenon lamps. Contact with this voltage
Rear direction indicators P21 could cause very serious injury.
Front fog lamps (Halogen) 55 (H11) • Replacement or maintenance of Xenon
Side repeater lamps W5W lamps should be carried out only by
Reverse lamps P21 qualified personnel.
Rear fog guard lamps P21
Some vehicles are fitted with Xenon
Stop/tail lamps P21/5
dipped/main beam headlamp units. Xenon
Number plate lamps W5W lamps provide significantly improved visibility,
Door/puddle lamps W5W especially during adverse weather and driving
Interior lamps W5W conditions.
Luggage/footwell lamps W5W The operational life of a Xenon lamp is
Luggage/tailgate lamps W5W significantly longer than that of a conventional
Glovebox lamp W5W or Halogen bulb.
Vanity mirror lamp 1.2 Seek advice about the proper disposal
of Xenon lamp units from a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer or your
local disposal authority.
295
L
Bulb Replacement
HEADLAMP UNIT
The headlamp unit contains four lamps and it is
necessary to completely remove the unit from
the vehicle in order to change any of the bulbs.
WARNING
Do not attempt to change any bulb with the
lighting switched on. If the lighting has just
been switched off, give the bulbs time to cool
down.
Removal of headlamp unit
H6312G
2. Carefully lever up the two locking bars.
H6406G
3. Disconnect the wiring plug from the back
of the unit and remove the unit from the
1. Remove the grille by pressing down on the vehicle. Place face down on a flat surface
four upper clips securing the grille to the covered in a soft material to prevent
vehicle body. Lift the grille clear of the damage to the unit’s lenses.
vehicle and place it where it will not sustain
any damage.
296
R
Bulb Replacement
Bulb access
1 2
H6313G 4 3
The four bulbs within the headlamp unit,
accessible under domed caps are:
1. Direction indicator
H6314G
2. Dipped beam/xenon
3. Main beam Note: To access the direction indicator, the
4. Side lamp and cornering lamp*/static headlamp unit locking slide must be completely
bending lamp removed from the unit.
See Replacement bulbs, 295.
297
L
Bulb Replacement
To change a main or dipped beam bulb
(Halogen only)
H6317G
Dipped beam.
1. Twist and lift off the domed cap.
H6316G 2. Pull off the electrical connector.
Main beam
3. Release the spring clip holding the bulb in
place and lift out the bulb.
4. Insert the new bulb and repeat the above
procedure in reverse order. When replacing
the cap, align the arrowheads on the cap
and the body of the unit.
Note: After the replacement of any main or
dipped beam bulb, the alignment of the
headlamps should be checked by a Land Rover
298
R
Bulb Replacement
To change a Xenon bulb
H6337G

2. Twist the connector cap anticlockwise to
unlock it. Pull clear of the bulb.
Note: After the replacement of any main or
dipped beam bulb, the alignment of the
headlamps should be checked by a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer. H6338G
3. Release the spring clip holding the bulb in

place and lift out the bulb.
procedure in reverse order. When replacing
the cap, ensure that the lugs are in contact
with the bulb base.
299
L
Bulb Replacement
Changing a cornering lamp/static bending Changing a front side lamp bulb
bulb*
H6319G

2. Pull out the bulb complete with electrical
H6318G
connector.
3. Pull the bulb out of the electrical connector.
2. Twist the bulb holder anti-clockwise to procedure in reverse order.
unlock, then pull out the bulb complete
When replacing the cap, align the
with electrical connector.
arrowheads on the cap and the body of the
3. To release the bulb, depress the two unit.
catches (solid arrows in inset), then pull to
remove the bulb from the holder.
procedure in reverse order.
unit.
300
R
Bulb Replacement
Changing a front indicator lamp bulb Refitting the headlamp unit
H6320G

2. Twist the bulb holder anti-clockwise to
unlock, then pull out the bulb complete
with electrical connector.
3. Pull the bulb out of the electrical connector.
4. Insert the new bulb and repeat the above H6322G
procedure in reverse order.

1. Reconnect the wiring plug.
2. Offer up the unit into position.
unit. 3. Push down on the two locking slides.
4. Refit the grille.
301
L
Bulb Replacement
REARLAMP UNIT 3. Disconnect the wiring multi-plug and
remove the unit from the vehicle. Place face
down on a flat surface covered in a soft
material to prevent damage to the unit’s
lenses.
2
1
H6323G
4
Note: If accessory lamp guards are fitted, refer H6324G
to the separate accessory user instructions for
Each bulb is now accessible by twisting off its
removal.
electrical connection cap. See Replacement
The rearlamp unit contains four lamps and it is bulbs, 295.
necessary to completely remove the unit from
1. Stop/tail lamp
the vehicle in order to change any of the bulbs.
2. Reversing lamp
Removal of rearlamp unit
3. Direction indicator
1. With the tailgate open, remove two screws
4. Rear fog guard lamp
from the edge of the unit nearer the tailgate
aperture.
2. Pull the unit away from the vehicle.
302
R
Bulb Replacement
Refitting the rearlamp unit SIDE REPEATER LAMP
1. Reconnect the electrical multi-plug.
2. Locate the unit’s two studs in the sockets at
the outer side of the mounting face.
3. Insert and tighten the two screws on the
side of the unit nearer the tailgate aperture.
4. Check that all of the bulbs work.
NUMBER PLATE LAMP
H6327G
Push the lens firmly towards the front of the

vehicle and withdraw the lamp unit from the
wing. Twist to release the bulb holder from the
lens unit, then pull the bulb from its socket.
H6326G
Using a suitable tool, lever the lens from the

tailgate lamp (see inset). Twist the bulb holder
anti-clockwise to unlock, then pull out the bulb
complete with electrical connector.
Pull the bulb to remove.
303
L
Bulb Replacement
FRONT FOG LAMPS
H6328G H6329G
To access the bulb; using a suitable tool, lever Twist the bulb holder anti-clockwise to unlock
the fog lamp surround panel out of the front and pull to remove from the lens assembly.
bumper. Remove the three securing screws to Depress the two catches (solid arrows in inset),
release the lamp unit. Ease the unit out of the then pull to remove the bulb from the holder.
front bumper. Before fitting the replacement bulb, note the
‘flat’ and the tab on the otherwise circular shape
of the bulb mounting flange. The tab acts as a
key to enable correct positioning of the bulb in
the bulb holder.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass with your
fingers. If necessary, clean the bulb with
methylated spirits.
After the replacement of a fog lamp bulb, the
alignment of the lamp should be checked by a
304
R
Bulb Replacement
DOOR/PUDDLE/FOOTWELL COURTESY LAMPS*
LAMPS*
H6330G
H6333G
With the relevant door open, insert a small Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver into the
flat-bladed screwdriver under the forward edge indent on the side of the lens and carefully prise
of the lens. to lever the lamp unit out of the the lens from the lamp unit. Pull the bulb to
door. Pull the bulb to remove. remove.
305
L
Bulb Replacement
MAP LAMP VANITY MIRROR LAMP*
H6335G
With the vanity mirror cover open, use a small

flat-bladed screwdriver to lever the relevant
lens from the mirror/lamp unit. Pull the bulb to
remove.
H6334G
Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver into the

indent on the side of the lens and prise the lens
from the lamp unit. Pull the bulb out to remove
it.
306
R
Lubricants & Fluids

Technical Data
Lubricants & Fluids
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS

Recommendations for all climates and conditions.
Note: Recommended oils are complete in themselves and additives should not be used.
Note: It is essential to change oil much more frequently if the vehicle is operated under severe
conditions, especially if deep wading is carried out.
Engine oil - V8 Petrol vehicles
Use a 5W/30 oil meeting specification ACEA: A1 or A3, or API SJ or SL.
Engine oil - V8 Petrol supercharged vehicles
Use a 5W/30 oil meeting specification ACEA: A1 or A3, or API SJ or SL.
Engine oil - Diesel vehicles
Use 5W/30 oil meeting ACEA: B1 or B3.
Main gearbox
Automatic: Shell ATF M1375.4
Transfer gearbox
All vehicles: Shell TF 0753.
Front differential:
All vehicles: SAF XO.
Rear differential:
Non-locking: SAF XO.
Locking: Castrol SAF Carbon Mod Plus.
Power steering
Texaco 14315 Cold Climate PAS fluid.
Dynamic Response
Texaco 14315 Cold Climate PAS fluid.
Brake reservoir
Use Shell DOT4 ESL or a low viscosity DOT4 brake fluid that meets ISO 4925 class 6 and Land Rover
LRES22BF03 requirements.
Windscreen washers
Screen washer fluid.
307
L
Lubricants & Fluids

Engine cooling system
Use Castrol antifreeze SF, with one part antifreeze to one part water for protection down to -36°C
(-33°F).
Caution: Be aware that different types of antifreeze are VERY different from each other; even
different types from the same manufacturer.
The use of non-approved antifreeze will have an adverse effect on the engine cooling system and
therefore engine durability.
Inertia reel seat belts
DO NOT LUBRICATE. These components are lubricated for life during manufacture.
LAND ROVER RECOMMENDS
308
R
Capacities
Capacities
CAPACITIES
The following capacities are approximate and provided as a guide only. All oil levels must be checked
using the dipstick or level plugs as applicable.
Fuel tank:
- Petrol vehicles 88 litres 19.3 gall
- Diesel vehicles 84 litres 18.4 gall
Engine oil (from dry):
- Diesel vehicles 6,55 litres 11.5 pints
- V8 NA Petrol vehicles 8,0 litres 14 pints
- V8 SC Petrol vehicles 10.9 litres 19.2 pints
Engine oil refill and filter change:
- V8 NA Petrol vehicles 7,7 litres 13.5 pints
- V8 SC Petrol vehicles 8,0 litres 14 pints
Automatic gearbox Filled for life. Filled for life.
Front differential 0,69 litres 1.2 pints
Rear differential - non-locking 1,16 litres 2 pints
Rear differential - electronic locking 1,61 litres 2.8 pints
Washer reservoir 5,0 litres 8.8 pints
Cooling system (fill from dry):
- V8 NA Petrol vehicles 15 litres 26.4 pints
- V8 SC Petrol vehicles 16 litres 28.1 pints
Cooling system (refill):
- Diesel vehicles 8 litres 14.1 pints
- V8 NA Petrol vehicles 9,5 litres 16.7 pints
- V8 SC Petrol vehicles 12 litres 21.1 pints
309
L
Engines
Engines
ENGINES
V6 Diesel
Recommended Fuel Diesel or Automotive Gas Oil (AGO) to EN 590
specification. This engine is NOT COMPATIBLE
with ‘Bio-diesel’ fuel.
Capacity 2720 cm3
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6
Bore 81,0 mm
Stroke 88,0 mm
Number of cylinders 6
Compression ratio 17.3:1
V8 Petrol Naturally Aspirated (NA)

Recommended Fuel UNLEADED 95 RON to EN 228 specification
Unleaded with a RON no lower than 90 may be
used.
Capacity 4398 cm3
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Bore 88,0 mm
Stroke 90,3 mm
Spark plugs NGK IFR5N10
Spark plug gap Non-adjustable
V8 Petrol supercharged (SC)

Recommended Fuel UNLEADED 95 RON to EN 228 specification
Unleaded with a RON no lower than 90 may be
used.
Capacity 4196 cm3
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Bore 86,0 mm
Stroke 90,3 mm
Spark plugs NGK IFR5N10
Spark plug gap Non-adjustable
310
R
Electrical System
Electrical System
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery type:
Petrol vehicles H7 75 amp/hr
Diesel vehicles H8 75 amp/hr
Battery rating:
Voltage and polarity 12 V, negative (-) earth
Charging circuit Alternator
311
L
Steering
Steering
STEERING
Steering wheel turns lock to lock 3.3

Turning circle 11.45 metres (37.56 ft)
Camber angle -0.5°
Castor angle 4.4°
King pin inclination 13.9°
Front wheel toe-out included angle 10o
312
R
Wheels & Tyres

Wheels & Tyres
WHEELS & TYRES

WARNING
• ALWAYS use radial-ply tyres front and back. DO NOT use cross-ply tyres, or interchange
tyres from front to back
• For optimum performance and handling ALWAYS replace tyres with the same make and type
as those fitted from new at the factory. If these tyres are not available, consult your Dealer
for advice on Land Rover approved alternatives. Failure to do so may adversely affect vehicle
handling.
• NEVER drive your vehicle if the tyres are badly worn, cut or damaged, or if the pressures are
incorrect.
• Incorrectly inflated tyres wear rapidly and can seriously affect the vehicle’s safety and road
handling characteristics.
• Your vehicle is fitted with tubeless road wheels that will NOT accept inner tubes. DO NOT fit
a tubed tyre.
• ONLY Land Rover approved wheel and tyre combinations should be fitted to the vehicle.
• If a temporary spare is in use the vehicle must be driven with caution at reduced speed (80
km/h (50 mph maximum). A standard wheel and tyre should be fitted as soon as possible,
and only one temporary spare should be fitted to the vehicle at any one time.
Wheel size and type

Type Size
Alloy wheels 7J x 17
8J x 18
8J x 19
9J x 19
9.5J x 20
Temporary spare wheel - steel 5.5J x 19
Road wheel nut torque to hub 140 Nm (+/- 10 Nm)
313
L
Wheels & Tyres

Tyre specification
Wheel size Tyre Load Index Snow Chain Fitment
Front Rear
7J x 17 (alloy wheel) 235/65 R17 - All terrain tyre 108H Y N
8J x 18 (alloy wheel) 255/55 R18 - All terrain tyre 109V Y N
8J x 19 (alloy wheel) 255/50 R19 - All terrain tyre 107Y Y N
9J x 19 (alloy wheel) 255/50 R19 - All terrain tyre 107Y N N
9.5J x 20 (alloy wheel) 275/40 R20 - All terrain tyre 106Y N N
5.5J x 19 (steel wheel) T175/80 R19 - Temporary spare 122M N N
tyre
Note: Your vehicle tyres are tuned to maximise driving dynamics. Although the standard tyres do
have all weather capability, for the maximum winter or off-road capability, alternative tyres are
available and should be fitted if extreme conditions are going to be encountered.
Note: For further information on Snow Chains, see SNOW CHAINS, 263.
Temporary spare wheel*
WARNING
The following precautions must be observed when the temporary spare wheel is in use:
DRIVE CAUTIOUSLY; the temporary spare wheel tyre is smaller in size and higher in pressure
than a regular tyre. It will cause a harsher ride and may have less traction on some road surfaces.
If driving off-road on a temporary spare wheel, drive with extra caution.
• The temporary spare wheel is for TEMPORARY use only. It MUST be replaced by a
normal-sized wheel and tyre as soon as possible.
• Only ONE temporary spare wheel is to be used on the vehicle at any one time.
• DO NOT drive at a speed exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).
• The tyre pressure in the temporary spare wheel/tyre should be as detailed in the tyre
pressures table, see WHEELS & TYRES, 313.
• The temporary spare wheel has a shorter life than a regular tyre. Replace the tyre with one
of the same type and specification.
• The use of snow chains is not permitted on a temporary spare wheel.
314
R
Wheels & Tyres

TYRE PRESSURES
Tyre inflation pressures
Normal operating conditions Front 230 2.3 34
Rear 250 2.5 36
Vehicle loaded to maximum gross vehicle weight or Front 260 2.6 38
(any load condition above 4 occupants)
Rear 290 2.9 42
Temporary spare wheel (All operating conditions) 420 4.2 60
Note: The pressure for your spare tyre should be set to the highest value given for your vehicle’s
wheel/tyre size combination and adjusted after fitment.
Note: When towing a heavily laden trailer, tyre pressures should be increased to the maximum
specified in the handbook, and road speeds limited to 100 km/h (60 mph). This excludes the
temporary spare wheel* which has a maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) with tyre
pressures maintained at those shown in the above table.
Accessory wheels - insert details

Wheel size Tyre Snow Chain Fitment
Front Rear
Accessory wheel tyre pressures - insert details

Normal operating conditions Front
Rear
Vehicle loaded to maximum gross vehicle weight Front
Rear
315
L
Vehicle Weights
Vehicle Weights
VEHICLE WEIGHTS
Approximate unladen vehicle weight (full fuel tank, excluding options)

Petrol engine vehicles (NA) 2480-2485 kg 5467-5478 lb
Petrol engine vehicles (SC) 2572 kg 5670 lb
Diesel engine vehicles 2455-2479 kg 5412-5465 lb
Maximum gross vehicle weight (GVW)

Petrol engine vehicles (NA) 3070 kg 6768 lb
Petrol engine vehicles (SC) 3125 kg 6889 lb
Diesel engine vehicles 3070 kg 6768 lb
Maximum front axle load

All vehicles 1470 kg 3241 lb
Maximum rear axle load

All vehicles 1710 kg 3770 lb
Maximum towing limits

Front axle load 1470 kg 3241 lb
Rear axle load 1967 kg 4336 lb
Gross Train Weight
(Weight of vehicle plus trailer with overrun brakes)
Petrol engine vehicles (NA) 6570 kg 14,484 lb
Petrol engine vehicles (SC) 6625 kg 14,605 lb
Diesel engine vehicles 6570 kg 14,484 lb
Note: The pressure for your spare tyre should be set to the highest value given for your vehicle’s
wheel/tyre size combination and adjusted after fitment.
Note: Axle weights are non-additive. The individual maximum axle weights and gross vehicle weight
must not be exceeded.
316
R
Dimensions
Dimensions
DIMENSIONS
C D G
E
A F
H6340G
Dimensions
A Overall width (including mirrors) 2170 mm 85.4 in.
B Overall height (including antenna module) 1812 mm 71.3 in.
B Overall height (including roof rails) 1784 mm 70.2 in.
E Wheelbase 2745 mm 108 in.
Track:
- Front 1605mm 63.2 in.
- Rear 1612.5mm 63.5 in.
F Overall length 4788 mm 188.5 in.
Overall length (including no plate plinth) 4798 mm 188.9 in.
Approach and departure angles

Maximum gradient (at EEC kerb weight) 35o Continuous operation
45o Drive through operation
C Approach angle (at EEC kerb weight):
- On-road 30.2o
- Off-road 34.0o
D Ramp angle
- On-road 20.0o
- Off-road 25.0o
G Departure angle with tow hitch (at EEC kerb weight):
- On-road 15.1o
- Off-road 17.8o
G Departure angle without tow hitch (at EEC kerb weight):
- On-road 26.0o
- Off-road 29.0o
317
L
Towing
TOWING WEIGHTS & DIMENSIONS
Towing
Maximum permissible towed weights On-road Off-road

Unbraked trailers 750 kg (1654 lb) 750 kg (1654 lb)
Trailers with overrun brakes 3500 kg (7716 lb) 1000 kg (2205 lb)
Roof rack load (including the mass of roof rack) 75 kg (165 lb) 50 kg (110 lb)
TOW BAR DIMENSIONS
H6224G
A Wheel centre to centre of towball 1191 mm 46.9 in.

B Ground to centre of towball 395 mm 15.55 in.
C Centre of towball to tow bar attachment 170 mm 6.7 in.
D Centre of towball to tow bar attachment 124 mm 4.9 in.
Dimensions refer to towing equipment officially released by Land Rover
318
R
Towing
MULTI-HEIGHT DROP PLATE
TOW BAR DIMENSIONS
H I
D F E
G
B
A
J K
H6225N
A Wheel centre to centre of towball (horiz) 1210 mm 47.64 in.

B Centre of outer attachment points to centre of towball (horiz) 403,6 mm 15.89 in.
C Centreline of housing ‘bayonet’ slot tip radius to centre of 192,4 mm 7.57 in.
towball (horiz)
D Centre of inner attachment points to centre of towball (horiz) 108 mm 4.25 in.
E Centre of inner attachment points to centre of towball (vert) 20 mm 0.79 in.
F Centre of upper towball plate bolt to centre of towball (vert) 36 mm 1.42 in.
G Centre of lower towball plate bolt to centre of towball (vert) 70 mm 2.76 in.
319
L
Towing
H Centre of outer attachment points to centre of towball (horiz) 167,3 mm 6.59 in.
I Centreline of housing ‘bayonet’ slot tip radius to centre of 174,3 mm 6.86 in.
towball (vert)
J Distance between inner attachment point centres 180,5 mm 7.10 in.
K Distance between outer attachment point centres 822,5 mm 32.38 in.
320
R
Appendices
Appendices
DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY
The Declarations of Conformity are from manufacturers of RF (Radio Frequency) equipment, whose
components are used in the manufacture of your Range Rover Sport.
These manufacturers state that their components comply with relevant rules of the R & TTE (Radio
and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment) directive.
The directive requires the manufacturer of short range radio devices to self-certify that RF parts fitted
to Land Rover vehicles are fit for use and that the declarations are supplied with the vehicle
documentation. If at a future date a technical inspection is required, the declarations will provide all
necessary information.
Note: The Declarations of Conformity are published in the native language of the RF equipment
manufacturer, in compliance with the R & TTE Directive.
321
L
Appendices
322
R
Appendices
323
L
Appendices
324
R
Index
A Audio system
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Adaptive speed control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 off-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Air suspension rear controls*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
access height. . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 194, 195 remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Automatic transmission use . . . . . . . . . . . 164
crawl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193, 195 Auxiliary equipment (use of). . . . . . . . . . . 171
door open override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Auxiliary power sockets
extended mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 loadspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
height change warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . 195 rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 B
off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Battery
on-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 boost starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
remote handset operation . . . . . . . . . . 197 disconnection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 disconnection effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
suspension freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Air vents jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
face level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 reconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 removal and replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Airbag replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
curtain airbags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Airbag SRS specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Bonnet opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
disabling switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Booster starting your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 284
disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Brake fluid
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 check & top-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Brakes
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 anti-lock brakes (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
partial arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 cornering control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
perimetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 electronic brake distribution (EBD) . . . 183
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 emergency brake assist (EBA) . . . . . . . 183
Anti-lock braking (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 foot brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 off-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 parkbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
servo assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
warning indicator (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
325
L
Index
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Cubby box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
bulb types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Cup holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
cornering lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
door lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 second row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
front fog lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 D
halogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Data recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
halogen bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Declarations of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Dimensions
indicator front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Air Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
loadbay lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Door mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
number plate lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Door/puddle lamps
puddle lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Driving (stability). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
refitting headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Dynamic Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198, 252
side lamp front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Dynamic Response warning . . . . . . . . . . . 102
side repeater lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) . . . . . . . . 187
vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
E
xenon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Xenon lamp units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
anti-trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
C rear isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Card holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Electrical system data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Carpets (cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD). . . . . . 183
CD storage Electronic Traction Control (ETC) . . . . . . . 188
cubby box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Emergency Brake Assist (EBA) . . . . . . . . . 183
glovebox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Emergency information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Emission control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Child restraints
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Child safety locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Cleaning after off-road driving . . . . . 237, 267
Cleaning (exterior) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Cleaning (interior). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
adjusting (premium audio). . . . . . . . . . 131
Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Coolant
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Cooling system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Cornering brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
326
R
Index
Engine Folding armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Front seat head restraint adjust . . . . . . . . . 44
check & top-up oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Fuel
compartment (diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 cut-off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
compartment (petrol) . . . . . . . . . 244, 245 economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 225
data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 empty tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . 156 filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
immobilisation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
oil specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247, 307 specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160, 310
running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
starting (diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
starting (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
warming-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 223 main fuse box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Engine oil disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 passenger compartment . . . . . . . 289, 291
Exterior lamps renewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS). 220 trailer electrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
automatic control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 G
cornering lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Gauges
daytime running lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
direction indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 108 speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
front fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
hazard warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
headlamp courtesy delay . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Gear selector display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 96
headlamp washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Gearbox
high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Automatic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
high beam flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 default mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
licence plate lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 electronic modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
manual headlamp levelling . . . . . . . . . 105 kick down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
marker lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 manual mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
master switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 selector positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
rear fog guard lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
reversing lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 fault lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
side lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 transfer box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
stop lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 high range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
xenon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 low range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
xenon beam adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Glovebox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
F
Facia controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fluid specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
327
L
Index
H Interior lamps
Handset automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
battery recharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 collision illumination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 glovebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
customer programmable button. . . . . . . 26 instrument pack illumination dimmer . . 106
Land Rover button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 33 loadspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 low-level illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 roof mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Hazard warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Headlamp adjustment (driving abroad) . . . 11 Interior locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Headlamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Interior space protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Headlamp courtesy delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 J
Height (of vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Jack
Hill Descent Control (HDC) operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
fade out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 279
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 wheel changing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Jump starting your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 K
I Keys
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
In-car telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 L
Information labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Instrument pack Lazy entry* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Loadbay lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
personal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Loadspace
warning indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Instrument panel Locking wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Locking/unlocking
Interior (cleaning). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
interior switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
speed-related . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Luggage anchor points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
M
Main fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
328
R
Index
Main message centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 84 Off-road driving
critical warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 85 accelerating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 85 basic techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 85 braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 239 checks and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 237
antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 crossing a ditch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
bonnet opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 crossing a ridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
brake fluid gear selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
check & top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 ground clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 negotiating a gully . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
coolant ruts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
check & top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 slippery surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 soft surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
disposal of fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 steep slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231, 232
Dynamic Response check & top-up. . . 252 steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
dynamometers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 surveying the ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 traversing slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
engine oil wading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
check & top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Oil disposal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247, 307 Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
poisonous fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 P
power steering check & top-up . . . . . . 251 Park Distance Control (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . 162
safety in the garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
service portfolio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Parkbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Parts & accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
under-bonnet covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Passenger compartment air filter . . . . . . . 124
windscreen washers Perimetric alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Poisonous fluids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Map lamp bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . 306 Polishing (the bodywork) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Mirror (interior) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
auto-dim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Pre-tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
manual dim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Punctured tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Mirrors (exterior)
R
adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Rear seat armrest fold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Rear seat head restraint adjust . . . . . . . . . . 49
electric operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Rear view mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Recovery (of vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
O Refitting underbonnet covers . . . . . . . . . . 243
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 96 Remote handset battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
329
L
Index
Remote handset programing . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Starter switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Air suspension control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Starting
Headlamp courtesy delay . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 automatic models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 boost starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Removing underbonnet covers. . . . . . . . . 243 catalyst (precautions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Road testing on dynamometers . . . . . . . . 241 cold climates (diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Roof racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 cold climates (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 diesel models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
S jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Safety on the forecourt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 petrol models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Screen wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 warming-up the engine. . . . . . . . . 155, 223
Seat belt Steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Steering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Steering entry/exit mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Steering wheel
caring for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 adjustment electric* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 adjustment manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Steering wheel position memory. . . . . . . . . 73
locking mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Sun visor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 138
pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Sunroof
pre-tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 54 anti-trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 electric operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Seat heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 front/rear roller blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Seats Superlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Suspension (Air) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 T
folding armrest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Tailgate
front (power-operated). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
lumbar support adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 41 Tailgate emergency unlock . . . . . . . . . . 37, 39
rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Temperature controls
seat memory facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Security card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 automatic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Security system information. . . . . . . . . . . . 26 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Service interval indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Service portfolio book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Temporary spare wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Single point entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Terrain Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200, 204
Smokers equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 driver override options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Spare wheel (removing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Ticket holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Speed-related locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Tilt sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
330
R
Index
Tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Tyre
Tow bar label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 directional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
detatchable tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 pressure label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
electrical socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Pressure Monitoring System . . . . . . . . 264
gear selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 265, 315
tow bar dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 punctures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
tow bar dimensions (multi-height) . . . 319 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262, 265
tow bar removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
tow bar stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
tow bars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 wear indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Tyre information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208, 316, 318 V
Towing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Vanity mirror lamp
front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Vehicle dimensions
refitting front access panel . . . . . . . . . 214 Air Suspension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
refitting rear access panel . . . . . . . . . . 215 Vehicle height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
removing front access panel . . . . . . . . 213 Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . 270
removing rear access panel . . . . . . . . . 215 Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Transfer gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 after towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Transmission towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Vehicle stability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
default mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Ventilation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
electronic modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Voice Recognition
kick down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Activating the system . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 148
manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Voice recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 148
selector positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 help commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 149
sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 notepad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
fault lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 steering wheel control . . . . . . . . . . 17, 148
transfer box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
W
high range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Warming-up (the engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
low range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Transporter or trailer lashing . . . . . . . . . . 217
Transporting your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
331
L
Index
Warning indicators Wheels
Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 locking wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
airbag SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
anti-lock braking (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 anti-trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
battery charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 rear isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 101 safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
check engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Windscreen washers
cruise control active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Windscreen wipers
Dynamic Stability Control. . . . . . . . . . . . 99 blade replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
front fog lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 intermittent variable delay. . . . . . . . . . . 109
glow plugs (diesel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 intermittent wipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
headlamp main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 rear window wash/wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
low oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 98 speed-dependant mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
parkbrake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 variable delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
rear fog guard lamps . . . . . . . . 98, 99, 100 Wiper blade replacement
seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 98 front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Washers (windscreen) X
fluid top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Xenon headlamp adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . 106
jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Washing (the bodywork) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
axle loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
gross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
kerb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Wheel
size & type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
temporary spare. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281, 314
Wheel changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
jacking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
locking wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
stowing spare. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
tilt sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Wheel chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
332

Range Rover Sport User Manual 2005

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Range Rover Sport User Manual 2005

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Range Rover Sport User Manual 2005

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

R

Publication Part No. LRL 21 02 54 501

© Land Rover 2004

Filling Station Information

If the driver’s door is not fully closed when the

1. Key release button. Press to release the

1. Dynamic Response (RED). SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR

To view the next service date, turn the starter

The detent positions from fully pushed in are:

Follow the process shown in HEADLAMP UNIT,

Rear window wash/wipe

For more detailed information on the wash/wipe

Remote handset Starter key reminder

accelerator pedal is pressed. To delay this

release, hold the parkbrake lever in the raised

To move from ‘P’ or ‘N’ into a drive gear

RESONANCE WITH LOWERED

From the passenger side of the car, open the

Filling Station Information

The fuel filler flap springs out, revealing the

OPENING THE BONNET 1. Inside bonnet release

Engine oil top-up

Filling Station Information

Loading condition kPa bar lbf/in2

HANDLING CHARACTERISTICS WARNING LABELS ATTACHED

Caution: Cautions are included in this

requirements for your vehicle and also includes T175/80R19

services have been carried out at the

TOW BAR LABEL

Information on tyre pressures for differing tyres

A label, located on the inside face of the rear

Keys and Handsets

KEYS AND HANDSETS Note: Should a key transmitter be lost or

Locks and Alarms

SECURITY SYSTEM ‘LAND ROVER’ BUTTON

Locks and Alarms

Locks and Alarms

For further information see AIR SUSPENSION,

Locks and Alarms

Locks and Alarms

Locks and Alarms

Locks and Alarms

Your vehicle is fitted with a sophisticated

Locks and Alarms

Locking with the remote handset

Locks and Alarms

Locks and Alarms

Under a removable cap on the left-hand front

Locks and Alarms

1. Insert the key fully into the slot in the H5977G

Locks and Alarms

Locks and Alarms

Child safety locks are fitted to the rear doors.

Locks and Alarms

Opening the tailglass

Lumbar support adjustment*

Push and hold the switch to move the seat to

WARNING Setting the memory pre-sets

Folding down the seats

SEAT BELTS SEATBELT USE DURING PREGNANCY